Author: Johannes Surya

  • Meaning of Faith in God’s Angels

    Meaning of Faith in God’s Angels – In general folklore, angels are considered to be forces of nature, holograms or a good illusion. Westerners sometimes depict angels as chubby baby cherubs, or handsome and handsome men, or beautiful young women with halos surrounding their heads.

    However, in Islam, angels are real creatures created by God. Angels themselves cannot be seen with the naked eye. Angels are not objects to be worshiped or prayed to. Angels submit to God and carry out his orders.

    In the view of Islam, there are no fallen angels. They are not divided into good angels or bad angels. Humans do not become angels after they die. Satan is not an angel, but Satan is a type of jinn. In the Islamic religion, angels must be believed in, must be trusted. Believing in the existence of angels is in the second pillar of faith. Below will be explained the belief in angels along with the names of angels believed in Islam.

    Meaning of Faith in God’s Angels

    Faith means believing, Believing in God’s Angels means believing that angels are true” creatures of God who were created from Light, and do not have sex, so they always obey God’s commands.

    Angel comes from the Arabic language ‘malak’ which means messenger, the plural form is ‘malaikah’. Angels are believed to be heavenly beings, created from light by Allah SWT. This is mentioned in a hadith narrated by Muslims. The hadith reads,

    عَنْ عَائِشَةَ قَالَتْ قَالَ رَسُوْلُ اللهِ صَلَّ اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّم خُلِقَتِ المَلٰئِكَةُ مِنْ نُوْرِ وَخُلِقَ الْجَانُّ مِنْ مَارِجِ مِنْ نَارٍ وَخُلِقَ اٰدَمَ مِمَّا وُصِفَ لَكُمْ (HR. Muslim:5314)

    “an ‘aa`isyat qaalat qala rasulullahi shallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam khuliqatil malaikati min nuri wa khuliqal jaannu min maari min naar wa khuliqa aadama mimmaa wushifalakum

    Meaning : “Angels were created from light and Jinn were created from a mixture of fire, and Adam was created from earth.”

    Angels have roles such as praising Allah SWT and carrying out the laws of nature. Islam does not even have a graphic or symbolic representation of angels. However, angels are often depicted as beautiful creatures with wings. Angels form different hierarchies and cosmic orders.

    Angels do not eat or drink, have no anger, and never tire.

    {فَلَمَّا رَأَى أَيْدِيَهُمْ لَا تَصِلُ إِلَيْهِ نَكِرَهُمْ وَأَوْجَسَ مِنْهُمْ خِيفَةً قَالُوا لَا تَخَفْ إِنَّا أُرْسِلْنَا إِلَى قَوْمِ لُوطٍ وَامْرَأَتُهُ قَائِمَةٌ فَضَحِكَتْ} (Surat Hud: 70-71)

    Meaning : So when he saw that their hands did not touch him, Ibrahim looked at their actions as strange, and felt afraid of them. The angel said, “Do not be afraid, indeed we are (angels) sent to the people of Lut.” And his wife stood (behind the curtain), then he smiled.

     

    The angel that humans have seen with the naked eye is the angel Gabriel. Angel Gabriel once met Prophet Muhammad SAW.

    It is narrated in the Sahih Book of Ibn Hiban, from the companion of Abdullah Ibn Mas’ud, the Messenger of Allah said:

    On Ibn Masoud – may God bless him and grant him peace – he said in this verse: {And he saw it descend further} [Al-Najm: 13], the Messenger of God – may God bless him and grant him peace – said: I saw Gabriel at the end of his chest, upon him there are seventy Jannahs, يَنْثِرُ من رِيشِه التَّاوِيلُ : الدُّرُّ والياقُوتُ

    From Ibn Mas’ud RA that he said about this verse, “And verily Muhammad saw Gabriel (in his original form) at another time.” (QS. An-Najm: 13)

    The Prophet SAW said, “I saw Gabriel in Sidratul Muntaha, he had six hundred wings scattered in his fur with diamonds and gems of different colors.”

    Angels also never stop or feel bored to worship Allah SWT, this is stated in Al-Quran chapter 21 verse 20 which reads,

    وَاِنَّا لَنَحْنُ الْمُسَبِّحُوْنَ

    Meaning : And verily we glorify (to Allah). (QS: As Shafat: 166)

    Although there is no history that says when angels were created, many believe that angels are the first creations of God, and live in the heavenly realm.

    Many scholars debate whether humans or angels have a higher degree. But in the Al-Quran, the prostration of angels to Adam is often considered as proof of human supremacy over angels. But there are also those who think that angels are superior to humans because they do not have anger and lust.

    Faith in God is also often said to be the key to a servant’s success in the afterlife. However, practicing faith is not as simple as we imagine. There are pillars, branches, and everything we experience and witness that intersects with our faith. Learn all that in the Encyclopaedia of Faith book below.

     

    Evidence for God’s Angels

    Faith in angels is an obligation commanded by God. This is stated in the Al-Quran, chapter An-nisa verse 136 which reads,

    يٰٓاَيُّهَا ​​الَّذِيْنَ اٰمَنُوْٓا اٰمِنُوْا بِاللّٰهِ وَرَسُوْلِهٖ وَالْكِتٰبِ الَّذِيْ نَزَّلَ عَلٰى رَسُوْلِهٖ وَالْكِتٰبِ الَّذِيْٓ اَنْزَلَ مِنْ قَبْلُ ۗوَمَنْ يَّكْفُرْ بِاللّٰهِ وَمَلٰۤىِٕكَتِهٖ وَكُتُبِهٖ وَرُسُلِهٖ وَالْيَوْمِ الْاٰخِرِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلٰلًا ۢ بَعِيْدًا

    Meaning : “O people who believe! Keep believing in Allah and His Messenger (Muhammad) and in the Book (Al-Qur’an) that was revealed to His Messenger, as well as the book that was revealed before. Whoever disbelieves in God, His angels, His books, His messengers, and the Hereafter, then indeed, that person has gone astray very far.”

    In that verse, God not only commands people to believe in angels, but God commands us to believe in His books, His messengers and the Last Day or Judgment Day. Study the SD/MI book Iman Kepa Malaikat Allah SWT to have more knowledge, understanding, and practice goodness in everyday life.

    Names of angels and their duties

    How many angels were created by Allah SWT? Actually, only God knows the answer. Angels do not have the same status because they are given different tasks.

    Some angels are assigned to carry out God’s law in the world. For example, the angel Michael is responsible for the rain and directs it wherever God wants.

    Michael the Archangel has assistants who help him in carrying out the orders of Allah SWT, they direct the wind and clouds according to God’s will. There are also those who are in charge of blowing the trumpet on the Day of Judgment and there are also those who are in charge of taking life from human bodies.

    There is also a group of angels who pray for those creatures of God who give good deeds to others. Angels love those who believe and ask God to forgive their sins.

    Among them there are also angels who protect the believer throughout his life, both when he is inside the house, outside the house and when he is asleep. Learn more about the existence of angels, starting from believing in their existence, their abilities, the types of angels and their functions in the book Malaikat Dalam Al Quran: Seri Makhluk Ghaib.

    10 Angels that we must believe in

    As for the 10 Angels that we must believe in, namely,

    1. Angel Gabriel His job is to deliver revelation
    2. Archangel Mikail’s task is to distribute Rizki
    3. Angel Izroel His job is to take lives
    4. Isrofil angel His task is to blow the trumpet
    5. Angel Rokib His job is to record human actions
    6. Angel Atid His job is to record human actions
    7. The Munkar dan Nakir Angel’s task is to ask him in the grave
    8. Angel nakir His task is to ask in the grave
    9. Angel Malik His job is to guard hell
    10. Angel Ridwan His job is to guard heaven

    Angel Gabriel’s task

    Jibril: Jibril is an angel tasked with delivering revelations from Allah SWT. Gabriel is the angel responsible for revealing the Quran to Prophet Muhammad SAW verse by verse. Angel Gabriel is the angel who communicates with all the prophets and also descends with the blessing of Allah SWT on the night of Laylatul Qadr or the night of a thousand moons. Angel Gabriel is also recognized as an extraordinary fighter in Islam. The angel Gabriel is believed to be the leader of the angelic army into the Badr War.

    The angel Jibreel following the war is described in a hadith narrated by Ibn Hisham that the Messenger of Allah called out to him “Rejoice O Abu Bakr because God’s help has come. The angel Gabriel grabbed the bridle of his horse, then pulled it towards the cloud of dust (the battlefield).”

     

    God said:

    وَلَقَدْ نَصَرَكُمُ اللُّ بِبَدْرٍ وََانْتُمْ اَذِلَّةٌۚ فَتَّوُواُوا اللَّّ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَشْكُرُوْنَ

    It means : Truly God has helped you in the battle of Badr. (Ali Imran: 123)

     

    اِذْ تَقُوْلُ لِلْمُؤْمِنِيْينَ إَلَنْ يَّكْفِيكُمْ انْ يُّمِدَّكُمْ ربُّكُمْ بِثَلٰثَةِ الَافٍ مِّنَ الْمَلٰۤىِٕكَةِ مُنْزَلِينَۗ

    Meaning : (Remember) when you said to the believers, “Isn’t it enough for you that God helps you with three thousand angels sent down (from heaven)?” (At Tawbah: 27)

     

    In addition, this is also mentioned in the Al-Quran, chapter Al-Anfal verse 9 which reads,

    اِذْ تَسْتَغِيْثُونَ رَبَّكُمْ فَاسْتَجَابَ لَكُمْ انِيْ مُمِدُّكُمْ بِالْفٍ مِّنَ الْمَلٰىِٕكَةِ مُرْدِفِيْنَ

    It means : “Remember, when you ask for help from your Lord, and He grants you permission, ‘Indeed I will bring reinforcements to you with a thousand angels who come in succession,’”

     

    Archangel Michael’s task

    Mikail: The angel Mikail is the angel responsible for directing rain, food and sustenance with the will of Allah SWT. Some scholars also agree that the angel Michael also has responsibility over the angels who bring the laws of nature. Archangel Michael is one of the four main angels of God. This is mentioned in a hadith,

    From Alqamah bin Martsad, from Abdurrahman bin Sabith, he said,

    يُدَبِّرُ الأُمُورَ أَرْبَعَةٌ : جِبْرِيلُ ، وَمِيكَائِيلُ ، وَإِسْرَافِيلُ ، وَمَلَكُ الْمَوْتِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَى نَبِيِّنَا وَعَلَيْهِمْ وَسَلَّمَ ، فَجِبْرِيلُ عَلَى الرِّيحِ وَالْجُنُودِ ، وَمِيكَائِيلُ عَلَى الْقَطْرِ وَالنَّبَاتِ ، وَمَلَكُ الْمَوْتِ يَقْبِضُ الأَرْوَاحَ ، وَإِسْرَافِيلُ يُبَلِّغُهُمْ مَا يُؤْمَرُونَ بِهِ

    There are 4 angels who manage affairs: Jibril, Mikail, Israfil and the Angel of Death – may blessings and peace be poured out on our prophet and them. Jibreel arranges the wind and the forces, Mikail arranges the rain and the trees, the angel of death who takes away lives, and Israfil conveys to them what they are commanded. (HR. Abu Shaikh al-Ashbahani in al-Adzamah, no. 294. This hadith is a Maqthu’ hadith, because Abdurrahman bin Sabith was a tabi’in).

    In a hadith it was also mentioned that the angel Michael never smiled after the angel Michael saw how hell was created, this was conveyed by the angel Gabriel to the Prophet Muhammad. The hadith was narrated by Anas bin Malik, the Prophet Muhammad SAW asked the angel Gabriel ‘why have I never seen the angel Michael smile? then the angel Gabriel answered, ‘Mikail has never smiled since hell was created.’

     

    The task of Angel Israfil

    Israfil: the angel Israfil is the angel who blows the trumpet at the end of time. The angel Israfil is responsible for signaling the coming of the Day of Judgment by blowing his trumpet.

    In the Al-Quran, Surat Al-Qamar verse 6, it is mentioned that the angel Israfil calls for something unpleasant on the Day of Retribution.

    فَتَوَلَّ عَنْهُمْ ۘ يَوْمَ يَدْعُ الدَّعِ الِلٰى شَيْءٍ نُّكُرٍۙ

    “So turn away from them, Remember the day when a caller or an angel calls to something unpleasant on the day of retribution.”

     

    The task of the Angel of Israel

    Izrail: The angel Izrail has the task of taking life from the human body and he will take the believers to heaven and the unbelievers to hell. Angel Izrail took human life with the help of his subordinates. This is explained in Al-Quran surah As-Sajdah verse 11 which reads,

    say

    Meaning : “The angel of death entrusted to (take away) your life will kill you, then only to your Lord will you be returned”.

     

    In addition, it is also mentioned in the Al-Quran chapter Al-Araf verse 37 which reads,

    فَمَنْ اَظْلَمُ مِمَّنِ افْتَرٰى عَلَى اللّٰهِ كَذِبًا اَوْ كَذَّبَ بِاٰيٰتِهٖۗ اُولٰۤىِٕكَ يَنَالُهُمْ نَصِيْبُهُمْ مِّنَ الْكِتٰبِۗ حَتّٰٓى اِذَا جَاۤءَتْهُمْ رُسُلُنَا يَتَوَفَّوْنَهُمْۙ قَالُوْٓا اَيْنَ مَا كُنْتُمْ تَدْعُوْنَ مِنْ دُوْنِ اللّٰهِ ۗقَالُوْا ضَلُّوْا عَنَّا وَشَهِدُوْا عَلٰٓى اَنْفُسِهِمْ اَنَّهُمْ كَانُوْا كٰفِرِيْنَ

    Meaning : “Then who is more unjust than the one who makes up lies against Allah or denies His verses? Those people will get the share that has been determined for them in the Book (Lauh Mahfuzh); until when Our messengers (angels) came to them to take his life, (at that time) Our messenger asked: “Where (idols) do you usually worship besides Allah?” The polytheists replied: “The idols have all disappeared from us,” and they admitted to themselves that they were disbelievers.

     

    The duties of Angel Munkar and Nakir

    Munkar and Nakir: Angels Munkar and Nakir are angels who are in charge of asking people in the grave. This is explained in a hadith narrated by Tirmidhi. The hadith reads,

    عَنْ أَبِي هُرَيْرَةَ رضي الله عنه قَالَ : قَالَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ : إِذَا قُبِرَ الْمَيِّتُ أَوْ قَالَ أَحَدُكُمْ أَتَاهُ مَلَكَانِ أَسْوَدَانِ أَزْرَقَانِ يُقَالُ لأَحَدِهِمَا الْمُنْكَرُ وَالآخَرُ النَّكِيرُ (HR At-Tirmidzi)

    From Abu Hurairah RA said, the Messenger of God SAW said, “When the body has been buried or when one of you is buried, there are two angels who come to him, both of them black and bluish, named Munkar and the other named Nakir.” (HR At-Tirmidhi)

     

    From Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu ‘anhu who said, the Messenger of Allah sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said,

    إِذَا قُبِرَ الْمَيِّتُ أَوْ قَالَ أَحَدُكُمْ أَتَاهُ مَلَكَانِ أَسْوَدَانِ أَزْرَقَانِ يُقَالُ لأَحَدِهِمَا الْمُنْكَرُ وَالآخَرُ النَّكِيرُ ، فَيَقُولَانِ : مَا كُنْتَ تَقُولُ فِي هَذَا الرَّجُلِ ؟ فَيَقُولُ مَا كَانَ يَقُولُ: He is a servant of God and His Messenger, I testify that there is no god but God, and Muhammad is a servant of God and His Messenger. فَيَقُولانِ : قَدْ كُنَّا نَعْلَمُ أَنَّكَ تَقُولُ هَذَا ، ثُمَّ يُفْسَحُ لَهُ فِي قَبْرِهِ سَبْعُونَ ذِرَاعًا فِي سَبْعِينَ ، ثُمَّ يُنَوَّرُ لَهُ فِيهِ ، ثُمَّ يُقَالُ لَهُ : نَمْ ، فَيَقُولُ : أَرْجِعُ إِلَى أَهْلِي فَأُخْبِرُهُمْ ، فَيَقُولَانِ : نَمْ كَنَوْمَةِ الْعَرُوسِ الَّذِي لا يُوقِظُهُ إِلا أَحَبُّ أَهْلِهِ إِلَيْهِ حَتَّى God bless you.

    And he said: فَيَقُولَانِ : قَدْ كُنَّا نَعْلَمُ أَنَّكَ تَقُولُ ذَلِكَ ، فَيُقَالُ لِلأَرْضِ : الْتَئِمِي عَلَيْهِ ، فَتَلْتَئِمُ عَلَيْهِ ، فَتَخْتَلِفُ فِيهَا أَضْلاعُهُ ، فَلا يَزَالُ فِيهَا مُعَذَّبًا حَتَّى يَبْعَثَهُ اللَّهُ مِنْ مَضْجَعِهِ ذَلِكَ

    “When the body or one of you has been buried, then he will be approached by two black and blue angels, one of them Munkar and the other Nakir, both of them will say: What do you think about this person (Prophet Muhammad)?, then he will answer as when in world: Abdullah and His Messenger, I bear witness that there is no god worthy of worship except Allah, and I bear witness that Muhammad is the messenger of Allah. Both of them said: We have known that you used to say that. Then his grave was expanded 70 x 70 cubits, and it was given light, and it was said: Sleep. He replied: “I want to go home to tell my family”. Both of them said: “Sleep, as the bridegroom sleeps, no one can wake him up except the one he loves the most,

    Duties of Angels Raqib and Atid

    Raqib and Atid: The angels Raqib and Atid are angels who have the task of recording good and bad deeds. This is stated in Al-Quran Surat Qaf verses 17 and 18 which reads,

    إِذْ يَتَلَقَّى الْمُتَلَقِّيَانِ عَنِ الْيَمِينِ وَعَنِ الشِّمَالِ قَعِيدٌ (17) What is the meaning of the words of the Prophet (18)

    Meaning : “(Remember) when two angels recorded (his deeds), one sat on the right and the other on the left. There is not a word he utters but there is a guardian angel by his side who is always ready (to record).”

    In addition, it is also mentioned in the Al-Quran chapter Al-Infithar verse 10-12 which reads,

    وَاِنَّ عَلَيْكُمْ لَحٰفِظِيْينَۙ
    كَرَامًا كَاتِبِيْنَۙ
    يَعْلَمُوْنَ مَا تَفْعَلُونَ

    Meaning : “Indeed there are (angels) for you who watch over (your work), who are noble (in the eyes of God) and record (your work), they know what you do”

    The deeds recorded by the angels Raqib and Atid will be placed around the neck of people on the Day of Judgment. This is explained in Al-Quran surah Al-Isra verse 13 and 14 which reads,

    وَكُلَّ اِنْسَانٍ اَلْزَمْنٰهُ طٰۤىِٕرَهٗ فِيْ عُنُقِهٖۗ وَنُخْرِجُ لَهٗ يَوْمَ الْقِيٰمَةِ كِتٰبًا يَّلْقٰىهُ مَنْشُوْرًا
    اِقْرَأْ كِتَابَكَۗ كَفٰى بِنَفْسِكَ الْيَوْمَ عَلَيْكَ حَسِيْبًاۗ

    “And every human being, We have fixed his deeds (just as a necklace is fixed) on his neck. And We will bring forth for him on the Day of Resurrection a book which he will find open. “Read your book, suffice yourself at this time as your accountant”

     

    The task of Angels Malik and Ridwan

    Malik and Ridwan: Angel Ridwan has the task of guarding the gates of heaven. While the angel Malik has the duty of guarding the gates of hell. This is stated in the Al-Quran, Surat Az-Zukhruf, verses 77 and 78 which read,

    وَنَادَوْا يٰمٰلِكُ لِيَقْضِ عَلَيْنَا رَبُّّۗ قَالَ نَّكُمْ مكِثُونَ
    لَقْ ِيْنٌكْ بِالْحقِّ وَلِنَّ اَكُرَكُمْ لِلَحَقِّ ٰرُِوْنَ

    Meaning : “And they exclaimed, “O (Angel) Malik! Let your Lord kill us.” He replied, indeed, you will remain (in this hell). Indeed, We have come to bring you the truth but most of you hate the truth”

    In addition, it is also mentioned in Al-Quran Surat Az-Zumar verse 73 which reads,

    وَسِيْقَ الَّذِيْنَ اتَّقَوْا رَبَّهُمْ اِلَى الْجَنَّةِ زُمَرًا ۗحَتّٰىٓ اِذَا جَاۤءُوْهَا وَفُتِحَتْ اَبْوَابُهَا وَقَالَ لَهُمْ خَزَنَتُهَا سَلٰمٌ عَلَيْكُمْ طِبْتُمْ فَادْخُلُوْهَا خٰلِدِيْنَ

    It means : “And those who fear their Lord are taken to heaven in groups. So that when they reached it (paradise) and its doors were opened, its guardians said to them, “Peace be upon you, blessed be you! So enter, you remain in it.”

    The wisdom of believing in angels

    In the book Lautan Hikmah Becoming a Beneficial Person, it is explained how with us having faith can be one of the bases to calm the heart, calm the soul, and give instructions within.

    Here is the wisdom gained if we believe in angels:

    • It is one form of human piety to Allah SWT.
    • Strengthen faith in Allah SWT.
    • will always pray and always forgive for others.
    • People who believe in angels are always kept away from sinning.
    • Always be thankful to Allah SWT, be thankful for realizing that Allah has created angels to help all human lives.
    • Establishing a feeling of pleasure to do good deeds.
    • Feeling afraid if he has committed an immoral act or is about to commit an immoral act, because he is confident that all actions will not escape the supervision of angels.
    • People who believe in angels will always fear Allah SWT, and compete in doing good deeds.
    • Always to always think and be careful in everything you do, because good or bad deeds will always be held accountable in the afterlife.
    • Be sure that the help of Allah SWT is a real thing.
    • Always to be honest, trustworthy and do good.
    • The faith in yourself will be much stronger and much more confident in Allah SWT.
    • People who believe in angels have perfect faith.
    • Cultivate a sense to always glorify the name of Allah SWT, because with the power of Allah SWT he has created angels, special creatures in the eyes of Allah.
    • Avoid people if they want to do bad or reprehensible actions.
    • Adding to the awareness that nature exists that cannot be reached by the five human senses.
    • Increase enthusiasm in worship and always be sincere in performing worship even if there is no one to see, but confident that God and his angels can witness the act.

     

  • The Meaning of Montage: Its Function, Purpose, and Influence on Children’s Fine Motor Skills

    Meaning of Montage – When attending Kindergarten in the past, were Reader often taught by the teacher to make an art using the paste technique? Usually the art teaches us how to cut paper and then paste it according to the pattern of the existing picture. Well, that simple art is usually called montage.

    Although it looks simple, this montage art is often used as a special learning tool to develop children’s creativity while also training children’s fine motor skills. Both of these things are obviously important so that when they grow up, the child’s right brain develops for things in the field of art. So what exactly is montage? Is it just children’s art that uses the paste technique? How does this montage art influence the development of fine motor skills in children? Well, for Reader to understand these things, let’s read the following comments!

    Meaning of Montage

    The term “montage” comes from the English language, namely ” montage ” which means sticking . If you look at KBBI (Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia), the term “montase” has a definition as ‘a composition of images produced by mixing elements from several sources ‘ or ‘a group of images that are selected, arranged, and linked from various elements to produce a form with new ideas. ‘. Meanwhile, according to Sumanto (2005), he thinks that montage is a creation of applied art that is made from the pasting of photo cutouts or photo cutouts on the image-based field.

    Almost the same as that, Ayu (2017) also expressed the definition of montage which is a combination of pictures produced from mixing elements of several works. Usually, these montage artworks are combined according to existing themes, such as rural themes, mountains, rivers, houses. Well, from the themes or picture patterns that already exist, we have to cut paper or photos with random shapes and then paste them on the picture pattern. Then, according to Susanto (2012) he also thinks that montage is a work made by cutting picture objects from various sources, then pasted on a field so that it becomes a unity of work and theme.

    Well, from some experts’ opinions about what montage is, it can be concluded that this montage is a work of art whose activity is in the form of cutting paper pictures or photos from various sources, then the pieces are pasted on a field that has been organized as a theme, so that it will produce a unity works and themes.

    This montage making activity is usually done by students in Kindergarten to develop their fine motor skills as well as train creativity. In carrying out this montage making activity, of course they should be taught and supervised by their teacher. Not infrequently, the basic materials used for this montage activity will use materials available in the surrounding environment. Let’s just say there is photo paper, used magazines, newspapers, gift paper, poster paper, and many more. Therefore, the implementation of this montage activity also teaches children to use the materials around them as a recycling of a work of art.

    If this montage work is developed, then of course it can become a greater work of art, even often collaborated with painting, decorative art, artwork, relief, even sculpture. In its development, this montage was indeed just a two-dimensional work of art, but now it has become a three-dimensional work of art.

    This montage making activity, if applied to Kindergarten children, can be used as a game. Yes, the children will be invited to have fun while cutting the prepared papers into pieces according to their creativity. After that, the children were taught to stick it neatly on a picture pattern that had been prepared beforehand.

    Tools and Materials Used for Montage

    Actually, the tools and materials used to make this montage artwork are quite simple and even easy to obtain. If this montage-making activity is applied to children’s learning in Kindergarten, then the teacher needs to guide and supervise because the tools used are scissors. Indeed, there are now special scissors for children that are designed not to be too sharp at the end, but still their use requires teacher supervision. Well, here are some tools and materials that can be used to create a two-dimensional montage artwork.

    1. Cutting Tool

    The cutting tools in question can be scissors, cutters, and knives. As this montage-making activity is done by children in a Kindergarten, then just use special scissors that are designed for children. In addition, the use of scissors is considered to make the cut more neat. But still remember to always be careful when using any cutting tool 

    2. Glue

    The glue used to make this montage art is paper glue  so that the pieces of paper can stick easily to the pattern that has been made before.

    3. Photo Paper

    In fact, the size selection on this photo paper is adapted to the size of the montage theme to be made. If the montage is simple, alias to be done by kindergarten children, then just use picture paper the size of a notebook. However, if you are a professional, then you can use the A3 size which is wide enough for a variety of themes.

    4. Printer

    Usually, the shape of the picture pattern that suits a particular theme is often difficult to reproduce. Therefore, printing it through a printer is a precise way that can be done to make it easier. Kindergarten teachers can also use it by searching for a simple picture pattern first on the internet, then printing it through this printer.

    5. Color Paper

    Colored paper can be used as an option to be cut into pieces using scissors and then combined with the existing picture pattern. There are various types of colored paper, it can be in the form of crepe paper, folding paper, gift paper, gold paper, art paper, and so on. If it is used as learning for kindergarten children, then they will usually choose crepe paper, folding paper, or gift paper that is easy to obtain.

    6. Used Newspapers and Magazines

    Used newspapers and magazines can also be used as another option to cut into pieces and then combine them with existing picture patterns. Usually, kindergarten teachers will ask their students to use these old newspapers and magazines because they don’t need to spend money to get them.

    Montage Making Techniques

    In making a montage artwork in a simple way, it can be done with basic techniques such as:

    1. Cut some pictures from magazines, posters, used newspapers, and any paper that is used into small pieces.
    2. Stick the pieces on the prepared base.
    3. Arrange the pieces to form a picture arrangement that fits the picture pattern or theme.

    Functions and Benefits of Montage

    Montage function

    The basic function of creating montage art is indeed to improve the cognitive aspects of children, where children can match and collaborate with existing pictures. But it turns out, there are other functions of this art of montage, among others:

    1. Practical Functions

    That is, the function of everyday objects, which this montage artwork can be used as decoration material.

    2. Educative Function

    That is, it can help to develop thinking, emotional absorption, aesthetics, and creativity in children.

    3. Expression Functions

    That is, by using various materials and textures, of course it can stimulate expression in children.

    4. Psychological Functions

    That is, by pouring ideas and emotions on children, so that they will feel satisfied as well as happy. This can also make children feel reduced in their psychological burden.

    5. Social Functions

    That is to be able to provide employment for people who are really skilled in the art of montage. From the many works that are owned, it is hoped to be able to create employment, especially with the capital of creativity.

    Montage benefits

    Based on the function of montage on the perpetrator, it is clear that the existence of the art of montage can provide various benefits. For children, this montage-making activity can train their thinking, emotional, and creativity skills. This, if continuously trained, will of course affect the ability of the right brain. Meanwhile for adults, montage making activities can also be used as a source of employment because it turns out that it can be developed into a 3-dimensional work of art. If this 3-dimensional montage artwork is sold, of course it will not be cheap.

    Purpose of Montage

    The montage-making activity done by the children, is not immediately without purpose. The main purpose of teaching children about this montage is to improve fine motor skills in children, especially those related to the movement of their fingers. Sumantri (2005) also stated that the purpose of fine motor development in children is in the form of:

    1. So that children can develop fine motor skills, especially those related to the movement skills of both hands.
    2. So that children are able to move their body parts, especially those related to the movement of the fingers.
    3. So that the child is able to coordinate eye senses and hand activities.
    4. So that children are able to control their emotions, especially when doing fine motor activities.

    Why Art Learning Is Necessary For Children?

    Art learning for children which can be taught in Kindergarten is of course important. The main purpose of learning art in a formal education is not to train children to become an artist, but rather so that they get useful experiences for their personality development. In addition, the experience of creating art was found to sharpen children’s sensitivity and make them more appreciative of what is in their surroundings. After all, the existence of art learning will also help children to develop an impression and increase their ability to enjoy and appreciate an existing work of art.

    According to some experts, there are several purposes of the art learning process for children, namely:

    1. Develop sensitivity related to sensory perception through a variety of creative art experiences, especially those that suit their character. Bearing in mind that the level of development of the child’s artistic ability can be taught at every level of formal education.
    2. Stimulating the growth of imaginative ideas and the ability to find various creative ideas. This creative idea can be useful in solving narcissistic or aesthetic problems, which can be done through a process of exploration, creation, and appreciation tailored to the child’s interests and potential.
    3. Develop the ability to appreciate art, especially in the context of history and culture. In addition, learning art can also foster children’s understanding, awareness, and ability to appreciate the diversity of local and global cultures. If this awareness is nurtured from an early age, then it can be a means of forming a mutually tolerant and democratic attitude in this pluralistic society.

    Well, so it can be concluded that the existence of art learning which has been implemented in our education system turns out to provide various benefits for children from an early age, especially to develop creativity.

    The Effect of Montage on Children’s Fine Motor Skills

    As explained earlier, it turns out that this seemingly simple montage activity can have an effect on children’s fine motor skills. By doing these activities, children will indirectly go through the process of thinking and developing their creativity. Not only that, the shearing activity also has a full impact on children’s patience as well as training the fine motor skills of their fingers.

    This is evident from the many studies on increasing fine motor skills through montage activities in early childhood. From these studies, it is concluded that this montage activity makes children skilled in developing fine motor skills, in the form of cutting, arranging, and gluing. Through this montage activity, it can also improve fine motor skills and increase children’s creativity, because children will be given many pictures that must be selected before being cut, arranged and then pasted to make a theme so that it can increase creativity.

    Understanding What Fine Motor Skills Are

    Previously, we always discussed fine motor skills. Really, what is fine motor?

    According to Sumantri (2005), this fine motor is a form of organization based on the use of a group of small muscles such as the fingers on the hand that often require precision and coordination with the hands. This skill certainly includes the use of tools to work on an object. Meanwhile, Sujiono (2010), also thinks that fine motor is a movement that only involves certain parts of the body, especially by small muscles. Well, based on some of the experts’ opinions, it can be concluded that this fine motor is a movement performed by small human muscles, which usually involves certain parts of the body such as the fingers when performing an activity.

    This motoric development will certainly be influenced by the organs and functions of the central nervous system in the brain. This central nervous system will play an important role in coordinating every child’s fine motor movement. Therefore, these fine motor movements should be taught from an early age so that they can develop until they become adults later.

    Well, that’s a review of what montage is and its benefits for children’s fine motor development. Does Reader still remember the experience of making this montage while in Kindergarten?

     

  • Understanding Montage, Functions, How to Make, and Differences with Collage

    Montage – Almost everyone loves artistic creations. It’s just that one individual does not always like the same artistic creation. Introducing artistic creations to children is very good because it can increase the creativity and imagination of a child.

    One of the right art creations to introduce to children is montage. When hearing the montage name alone, it may seem strange to some people. If you are one of the people who don’t know what montage is, don’t worry because this article will discuss more about montage. So, read this review to the end, Reader.

    Meaning of Montage

    Montage is an application art creation made from the pasting of photo cutouts or foot cutouts on the base of the image. Definition of montage according to the Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) montage is a composition of images produced from the mixing of elements from several sources. Another definition in KBBI also explains that montage is a sequential image produced in a film to depict related ideas.

    According to the book ” Coloring Picture Reference, Collage, Montage, Mosaic and Application “. Montase’s work itself is made by pasting various ready-made pictures which are already in magazines, newspapers, calendars, online media and so on.

    Then, the picture is cut and can be rearranged to become a new picture in a book or something like that. In its development, montage was limited to two-dimensional works, but now it has added to three-dimensional works. Montage itself comes from the English language (montage) which means sticking.

    Montage Techniques

    Quoted from the book “Montase and Learning” by Nurul Aini S.Pd. and friends, montage techniques are divided into two, namely montage of photo techniques and montage of manual paste techniques. Here are the techniques from montage, namely:

    1. Photo Montage Technique

    A photo montage is a photo made from pasting or a compilation of several other photos. Usually, the montage is relatively simple, for example it starts by pasting a photo of a human on a photo of a scene.

    2. Manual Paste Technique Montage

    In this manual paste technique, which is a technique by pasting pieces of images from various sources on a field to display a specific message or theme.

    In this technique, not only emphasizing the theme to be conveyed, but the type of image pasted must also be observed in order to produce harmony and compatibility.

    Montage function

    Montage can not only be a romantic work of art that can be given to a couple. As for the function of montage is to channel your love for the beauty of photos or creative art. In addition, another montage function is to be a vehicle to express or express ideas, ideas, imagination and aesthetic experience in the form of a very personal symbolic expression.

    You can certainly express love through montage art. Not only that, another benefit of montage is as a conduit for various psychological problems experienced by a person. In fact, montage can be a means to obtain emotional balance, so as to achieve peace, comfort and personal satisfaction.

    Here are the various functions of montage, namely:

    1. Practical Functions

    In addition to being individual as a medium of expression, montage also has a practical function to channel people’s love for beauty in creating various beautiful things such as handicraft products, aesthetic furniture, comfortable dwellings as well as communication and entertainment media.

    2. Educative Function

    Montage indirectly helps a child’s self-development which includes physical, thinking, absorption, emotions, taste for beauty and creativity. A person will learn about something more easily through a pleasant activity such as playing.

    3. Expression Functions

    The elements of art in montage works such as lines, colors, shapes and textures are a visual language used to express or express ideas, ideas, imagination and aesthetic experiences which are then expressed in the form of very personal symbolic expressions.

    4. Psychological Functions

    In addition to being a medium of expression, montage is also beneficial as a therapeutic function. This function is a means of sublimation, relaxation, that is, channeling various psychological problems experienced by a person.

    After undergoing self-therapy through this art, a person will gain emotional balance, thus achieving peace, comfort and inner satisfaction. Therapy through art such as this montage is not concerned with the value of the level of beauty of the work produced, but is more concerned with the implementation of the traumatic healing process in a person.

    How to Make a Montage

    A romantic scrapbook that contains a series of photos and decorations reminding of someone’s love journey, that’s what montage art is like. For Reader who is still confused, montage is a group of pictures that are selected, arranged and linked from various elements to produce a form with new ideas. Then to make it visible, also add pieces of map pictures, embossed writing, paper with stories, stamps with dates, and even scrabble that becomes a decoration inside.

    The group of pictures and decorations includes a montage that can become a creative memory book full of meaning. In fact, not only through scrapbooking, you can also create a montage in a container to create your own story. In fact, montage art has become a modern business in both 2D and 3D forms. Here are some tips on making your own montage that Reader can try, among others.

    1. Prepare the Theme

    Of course you should prepare the theme first. You can also give a scrapbook using the montage technique to remember your love journey in a unique and certainly romantic way or you may want to give photo stickers and pictures combined into a frame as a wall decoration.

    Choose what montage concept you want by sticking a lot of colors, making it classic or just black and white? Of course, this is also very important in preparing the theme first so that the desired montage result is not messy.

    2. Prepare Materials and Equipment

    After knowing that the montage theme is suitable for your lover’s liking, immediately prepare the materials and equipment! Of course you need to print the photos you want to create into one. Then, look for photo decorations that will support the montage theme of your choice.

    The tools and materials needed are as follows:

    • Scissors Scissors
      all fit the size and needs of the montage creation itself.
    • Adhesive glue Glue
      is useful as a basic tool for making montages.
    • Photo book or HVS paper to paste pictures
    • Crayons, markers or colored pencils
    • All images are from various sources that will be combined

    3. Cut Pictures from Existing Reference Sources

    The next step after you have determined the theme (picture design), use scissors to select and cut interesting and suitable pictures from the various sources you have. Pay attention and concentrate when cutting the picture because it affects the quality of the picture, cut and collect all the picture objects you want to insert.

    4. Paste in order

    When all the materials and equipment are ready, then you can start by pasting the pictures according to the sequence. It is good, if you give a number behind the photo or picture that will be pasted when creating the montage work so that it is easier to complete.

    5. Add Color or Shades

    Of course it is necessary to create the value of beauty by adding color or pattern using crayons. The colors used are recommended to complement each other, so make sure the colors are not too dominant compared to the pictures that are the object of your montage work.

    6. Look at the results of the work

    Finally, your montage artwork will form a new picture and produce a new story according to the theme you created. Basically, the technique of making this montage artwork is not difficult and all we have to do is select, cut and paste pictures to create a new work. Even so, it still requires creativity and innovation for the determination and selection of images so that the results are good and interesting.

    Meaning of Illustration

    Knowing the term illustration is a word that comes from the Dutch language ” illustrazione ” which has the meaning of decoration with pictures. Terminologically, the term illustration is a picture that functions as a means to explain certain events.

    Two experts in this field, Putra and Lakoro (2012:2) explain that illustration has three important points. According to him, illustrations are used to explain stories, writings, poems and other information.

    The Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) explains the types of illustrations in the form of pictures (photos, drawings) to help clarify the content of books, essays and so on. In addition, also as a picture, design or diagram for decorating (cover page and so on).

    Types of Illustrations

    1. Pictures of Naturalist Illustrations

    Naturalist is a type of illustration that has the same color and shape as reality in nature without any additions or subtractions.

    2. Decorative Illustration Pictures

    Decorative is a type of illustration that has the function of decorating something with a simplified or exaggerated form with certain styles.

    3. Cartoon Pictures

    Cartoons are types of illustrations that have a funny shape or have certain special characteristics. In general, the types of cartoon illustrations often decorate comics, illustrated stories and children’s magazines.

    4. Caricature picture

    Caricature is a type of illustrative image in the form of satire or criticism in which there is a deviation of body proportions. These types of caricature illustrations are usually found in newspapers or magazines.

    5. Illustrated Stories

    Picture stories are types of illustrated pictures of a type of picture or comic that are given text. The type of illustration of a picture story using a picture technique made with the basis of a story with an interesting point of view.

    6. Textbook Illustrations

    A textbook is a type of illustrated picture with the function of explaining a text or event, either scientific or in the form of part pictures. Types of illustrations in textbooks have the form of natural pictures, charts, photos.

    7. Imaginary Illustration

    Illusion is a type of illustrative picture from the result of creative processing in an imaginative or imaginary way. Types of imaginary illustration pictures are generally found in story illustrations, comics, novels, and novels.

    8. Table

    Tables are types of illustrations that are used to present an activity, data and analyze the data into column and business form.

    9. Pie Chart

    A pie chart is a type of illustration that has a circle shape or pieces with a total of 3600 components.

    10. Organization Chart

    An organization chart is a type of illustration with a data presentation method in the form of an organizational structure based on levels and hierarchies.

    11. Bar Chart

    A bar chart is a type of illustration that can be used to see data trends based on observations over time.

    12. Graph Chart

    A graph chart is a type of illustration that is used to present quantitative data by using a coordinate system.

    13. Combination Chart

    Combination charts are types of illustrations from the combination of bar charts and graph charts .

    14. Flowcharts Flowcharts
    are types of illustrative pictures that show the order and relationship between processes and their instructions.

    15. Maps

    A map is a type of illustration in the form of a picture or drawing of the whole or part of the earth’s surface, both land and sea. Knowing the term illustration is a word that comes from the Dutch language ” illustrazione ” which has the meaning of decoration with pictures. Terminologically, the term illustration is a picture that functions as a means to explain certain events.

    Various Illustration Functions

    Here are some types of illustrative functions, among others:

    Descriptive Functions

    The descriptive function of illustration is used to explain the meaning of a long text through a picture.

    Analysis Functions

    The function of an illustration analyst is to express in detail the parts of an object.

    Analytics Functions

    The analytical function of illustration is to express in detail the parts of an object.

    Qualitative Functions

    The qualitative function of illustration is generally used in making tables, graphics, photos, symbols, pictures, etc.

    The Role of Illustration

    Illustration certainly has a role in montage, the following are the roles of illustration, namely:

    1. The role of illustration is to make it easier to understand a piece of writing. The presence of illustrations helps us find the meaning of a text that we read thoroughly.
    2. The role of illustration is a means of expressing ideas or thoughts through a picture. Many of them like to draw to express ideas or thoughts through a picture. Many of them like to draw to express what they feel, channel their hobbies, express their feelings and so on.
    3. The role of illustration is to briefly explain a text or story.
    4. The role of illustration is to increase the aesthetic value of a picture or writing. The presence of illustrations makes it easier for a person to understand a message to be conveyed.
    5. Illustrations can be used to give a complete picture of the content of a work. One of the examples is on magazines or books. An illustration is very good at making readers curious and making them addicted to read more.
    6. The role of illustration is a means to communicate. In general, a picture can describe a piece of writing.
    7. The role of illustration is to explain a concept through pictures.

    The difference between Collage, Montage, and Mosaic

    The difference between collage, montage and mosaic comes from the attached material. For more details will be explained in the discussion below.

    Material

    Collage uses different types of materials on one pattern. For example, ingredients from nature are combined with processed ingredients. Montage uses material from several pictures that have been combined into a new work, while mosaic is an arrangement of pieces with the same type of material to form something according to your wishes.

    Final Result

    Montage consists of one material, but comes from many pictures and the end result is a theme. Mosaic comes from small pieces of material arranged to form a specific theme. Unlike montage and collage, mosaic is a picture made up of small parts. Traditionally, mosaics are small tiles made of terracotta, broken glass, ceramic or marble and are usually attached to floors and walls.

    From the differences above it can be said that this mosaic has a difference from collage and montage. So, mosaic is an artistic technique that uses small parts to create a whole picture or object. According to the Tate Gallery, mosaics have been used as a decorative medium for over five thousand years.

    From a distance, mosaic art sparkles with an impressive array of colors and patterns. Up close, the intricacies that make up this work can be revealed, and you can see how much time and energy must be spent to create a work of art.

     

  • Definition of Monopoly, Features, Causes, and Examples in Indonesia

    Definition of monopoly – Actually, monopoly is very attached and close to everyday life, Reader! Has Reader ever found a business or product, where the product and business are owned by only one company?

    More or less, that’s an example of a monopoly. Then, what is the true meaning of monopoly and what are the effects and examples of monopoly in Indonesia? Check out the following explanation, yes!

    Definition of Monopoly

    The word monopoly itself, comes from Greek which comes from kaya monos ie own and polein which means seller.

    From the root of the word monopoly, the term monopoly can be defined as a condition where there is only one seller who supplies or offers certain goods or services.

    The term monopoly can also be interpreted as a situation where a business is dominated by only one company or market and the company or market has no competitors.

    In general, products and services that come from monopoly companies are products that are one of the needs that are much needed by society in general.

    According to Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia (KBBI), the concept of monopoly is defined as the procurement of certain merchandise either in the local or national market and at least a third of the market is controlled by one person or one group. So, the price of goods can be controlled.

    Monopoly can also be interpreted as a business situation that is fully held by only one company.

    This can happen because only those companies have services that are needed by many people. So, making the company has no other competitors.

    By practicing monopoly, the company can take maximum profit.

    The monopoly market itself is one of the forms of interaction between demand and supply that is characterized by only one producer or single producer facing many consumers or many buyers.

    According to Law Number 5 of 1999 on the Prohibition of Monopoly Practices and Unhealthy Business Competition, this monopoly activity is the control over the production and or marketing of goods or over the use of certain services by only one group of business actors and has no other competitors.

    So it can be concluded, that the company that does this monopolistic act can obtain maximum profit at the same time and enable the company to become a market operator as well as a price operator.

    In monopoly activities, there is a monopoly market. Monopoly market is a form where there is a single seller who dominates the market, the seller has the power to determine the price and does not have similar goods.

    In the monopoly market, there are no other similar goods and there are no competitors. A seller in a monopoly market is called a monopolist. As monopolists, they have the power to set prices.

    Because of their power, the monopolist is also called a price setter or price maker. A monopolist can reduce and increase prices by determining the amount of goods that will be produced by the company.

    The fewer goods produced by the company, the more expensive the price of the goods and vice versa.

    Despite that, the seller also has limitations in determining the price. If the pricing is too expensive, then people will delay purchasing the product.

    Consumers will also try to find or make substitute goods or substitutes for the product or even, consumers will look for goods in the black market because they are looking for goods that are available and at a cheap price.

    The terms monopoly, monopolistic and monopsony are terms that have different definitions. Although the three terms may sound the same to Reader’ ears. So, what is the difference?

    As explained earlier, monopoly means that there is one seller present in the market. So monopsony means that there is only one buyer in one market.

    While the term monopolistic, is a condition where there are several companies that offer similar services, but the services are not exactly the same.

    This happens because of differences in the field of technology, field and so on.

    Well, up to now Reader has understood not the meaning of monopoly, monopoly market even to some terms that sound the same as the word monopoly?
    In order to better understand, Reader needs to know the causes of the following monopoly.

    Causes of Monopoly Actions

    Why can monopoly actions occur? There are several reasons why this monopolistic action can happen to the point of causing unhealthy competition between companies or traders. Here is the explanation.

    1. Monopoly by Nature

    The first cause of monopoly is natural. Like when there is a company that is located close to the resources used.

    So the geographical location and climate of the location will also support the company to be the only company that provides its products and services.

    2. Monopoly by Law

    The second cause is due to regulations or laws that apply in a country. It is intended to make a product or service related to the needs of the community, so that the price can be controlled by the government.

    3. Monopoly by license

    The third reason for the existence of monopoly activities is because a company has patent rights on the intellectual property owned by the company, for example such as Microsoft and Google.

    Characteristics of Monopoly

    From the understanding above, there are some general characteristics or features to identify monopoly companies. Here is the explanation.

    1. There is only one supplier or one company

    This first feature, of course, is the most easily identified feature of a monopoly. When a company has a monopoly, then the company will be the only supplier of goods or products needed by the community.

    That is, the company controls the resources completely, so that only the company is able to make the product or item.

    2. No Replacement or Substitution Goods

    Because there is no other supplier or company, then the consumer does not have any alternative goods, when an item is empty. So, there is no substitute or substitution item that can be chosen by the consumer.

    3. Price Maker

    As has been explained before, that companies that carry out monopoly activities get large profits from the results of the authority they have, that is, they can freely determine the price of a product and determine the price freely, so the third characteristic of a monopoly is the price maker.

    4. Prospective newcomers, will have difficulty entering the market

    The fourth feature of monopoly, is that new entrants who will enter the market will encounter many obstacles.

    This is due to the three characteristics of the previous monopoly, namely that the company can freely determine the price of its own products and the consumer has become accustomed to not having a choice, except to buy the product or service sold by the company.

    5. Have a Small Advertising Budget

    Monopoly companies generally have a relatively small marketing and advertising budget.

    6. Causing Injustice

    Monopoly practices that occur can cause injustice and loss for the community.

    Monopolies in Indonesia and Examples

    Because this monopoly activity can cause losses, the Indonesian government also applies special policies so that the practice of monopoly activities is not carried out arbitrarily by irresponsible parties.

    In Indonesia, the agency that has the authority to oversee the practice of monopolistic activities is called the Business Competition Supervision Commission or KPPU.

    Where this KPPU has a task that has been regulated in Law Number 5 of 1999, about the realization of a more efficient national economy and welfare of its people.

    The KPPU itself has a mission which is the prosecution and prevention of the internalization of business competition values ​​as well as institutional strengthening.

    There are several examples of monopoly companies in Indonesia. Some of them are Pertamina, PLN and PDAM, where the three companies are the main and only suppliers of fuel, electricity and clean water for the needs of the community.

    The three companies in Indonesia are companies that have a monopoly because of the law. So, the government has the authority to determine the price of the three products.

    Apart from Indonesia, of course this monopoly market also happens abroad. Examples of foreign companies that have monopolies are Google, Microsoft and Facebook.

    The three companies have competitors, but those competitors generally do not have the same strength as the three companies and find it difficult to compete.

    The three companies have a monopoly, because they have patent rights. So that only those three companies are able to produce services or products needed by consumers.

    As has been explained above, that monopolies can bring losses for the people as well as profits for the companies that do the monopolies.

    Until then, the anti-monopoly movement emerged as well as other policies that discuss monopoly, including monopoly policy in Indonesia.

    Regarding this matter, Asril Sitompul, the author of the book ” Monopoly Practices and Unhealthy Business Competition ” explained that the legal regulations regarding monopoly in Indonesia are still quite new and about business competition and anti-monopoly which is interesting to read. If interested in reading this book, Reader can buy it by clicking on the following book.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Monopoly Markets

    After learning the characteristics and examples of monopolies in Indonesia, Reader certainly knew that monopolies bring a lot of losses for some parties, but also bring good fortune for others.

    Here are the advantages and disadvantages of a monopoly market.

    A. Disadvantages of Monopoly Markets

    1. Harming Consumers

    As explained in the definition of monopoly, due to the practice of monopoly, consumers do not have other product alternatives other than the products and services that have been provided by the company that performs the monopoly.

    As a result, consumers feel reluctant to buy these products and services, because the prices charged by companies sometimes rise to the point where they are considered unreasonable by consumers.

    However, because the company has a monopoly, the company does not feel afraid of losing customers, and the company can provide less than optimal service to the extent that it causes the customer to lose.

    2. Triggering the Presence of the Black Market

    The monopoly market has a second disadvantage, which is that it can trigger the emergence of a black market. Where the black market, will sell products similar to monopoly companies, but sold or obtained illegally.

    The black market makes consumers, get products and services at more affordable prices when compared to the monopoly market, so it is not rare that consumers prefer to buy their necessities in the black market.

    3. Requires a Big Cost

    The last disadvantage caused by monopoly is that it requires large costs. A company that wants to monopolize, then it must have a large enough cost, so that the company continues to be able to monopolize the market by using the latest technologies in accordance with the development of the times.

    B. Advantages of Monopoly Markets

    In addition to the shortcomings caused by the monopoly market, apparently the monopoly market still brings profit for some parties, especially to the perpetrators of the monopoly activities.

    Here are some advantages of a monopoly market.

    1. Low Level of Competition

    Companies that are in the monopoly market, have a fairly low level of competition.

    2. Freely Install Price Tariffs

    As the only supplier, the company will not be afraid of losing customers even if it gives a high price that is considered unreasonable.

    3. Continuous Innovation

    Companies involved in monopoly activities will continue to improve innovation and creativity, so that consumers feel satisfied and loyal to the company.

    4. Efficiency of the Company’s Operational Activities

    Because it does not have competitors, even companies that have a monopoly can run their operations more efficiently, in addition to that, companies will also be more free to develop ideas and innovations that are needed without interference from other competitors.

    Why Are Companies Able To Do Monopolies?

    There are several reasons that make a company able to monopolize, among them are the following.

    1. The company has mastered the raw materials needed by many consumers and has become one of the staples that people always look for.
    2. Monopoly companies have production techniques and production methods that are not owned by other companies or groups. So that it is easy for the company to process and utilize production techniques well in order to produce a specific product.
    3. Companies have special rights granted by the government, for example such as patent rights on certain inventions and licenses. An example is patent rights owned by Facebook or Microsoft.
    4. Companies that will do monopoly, have a large capital cost. For example, such as a combination of several companies, or drug companies that buy other companies or consolidate with other companies to be able to dominate the market.
    5. Companies that are involved in the monopoly market, generally have certain unique performance and skills and these skills are not owned by other companies. An example is business done by startup companies , startup companies generally have advanced technology, such as artificial intelligence that other companies do not have.
    6. Companies involved in the monopoly market are generally companies that have been standing for a long time and are too large. So that the company dominates upstream to downstream and forms an ecosystem that is difficult for new players to enter.
    7. Companies can monopolize, due to market limitations as well as the natural nature of the industry.

    That is the explanation of the meaning of monopoly , the causes of its occurrence, characteristics, and examples.:

  • Understanding Modernization: Characteristics, Impact and Examples

    Understanding Modernization – Does Reader know that modernization can cause an impact on every element present in society? This modernization can be one of the factors that can cause a community environment to experience progress and change in it.

    One of the impacts of modernization that is easily realized and felt is progress in the field of technology. As in the past, mobile phones were not yet available, so the process of exchanging messages with people far away could only be done through letters delivered by couriers and took a long time. The development of technology as well as the discussion of basic concepts to the most complex concepts can also be found by Reader in the book Deep Learning Modernization of Machine Learning for Big Data.

    So what exactly is modernization? And what impact can be caused by modernization other than technological progress? Here is a brief explanation of modernization.

    Meaning of Modernization

    Modernization is a process of change from something that is not yet advanced to something more advanced. Modernization can also be said to be a process of transformation towards progress or improvement in various aspects of life in society which Reader can learn through the book Risk Society Towards New Modernity below.

    Modernization comes from the Latin word ” modernus” . The word ” modernus” also comes from the word ‘ modo’ which is the way and ‘ ermus’ which indicates the time period in the present.

    Some members also expressed their opinions about the meaning of modernization. Like Harold Rosenberg, according to Rosenberg modernization is a new tradition and refers to urbanization or to what extent and how the erosion of the rural nature of a group of people can occur.

    Soerjono Soekanto also expressed his opinion on modernization. According to Soerjono, modernization is a process of change that initially changes from a traditional way to a more advanced way. The process of change is intended to improve the well-being of the community.

    Ogburn and Nimkoff argue that modernization is an effort that is made to be able to direct society to be able to project itself into a more real future and not just wishful thinking.

    According to Abdul Syam, modernization is a process of transformation to more advanced and improved changes in various aspects of social life.

    Different from other experts, Neil Smelser thinks that modernization is an irregularity in the structure of society that performs different functions at the same time, then will be divided into several substructures to be able to carry out those more specific functions. Smelser also thinks that modernization will always involve the concepts of structural differentiation.

    From the understanding according to the expert, it can be concluded that modernization is a process of change that is present in social life and can make social life more advanced or improved.

    Characteristics of Modernization

    Reader needs to know that modernization has the purpose of being able to improve the quality of life of the community, besides this modernization process also seeks to be able to improve the mindset in the community so that it becomes better.

    When viewed from the impact, modernization will certainly provide good impacts for life in the community. Therefore, Reader needs to recognize this modernization change process.

    Modernization can be recognized by the society involved in it through several characteristics present in the modernization. Here are the features of modernization.

    1. Society can behave heterogeneously.
    2. Mobility in society is quite high.
    3. Society has no ties to custom.
    4. Community action in the context of modernization is rational.
    5. Having a high level of organization, especially in self-discipline.
    6. Centralization of authority is in the implementation of social planning.
    7. Have a systematic data collection system.
    8. Scientific thinking that exists in society is institutionalized into the life of the ruler and his society.
    9. The creation of a climate favored by the community through modernization in the use of mass communication tools.

    In addition to the characteristics of modernization, a modern society is also one of the characteristics of the occurrence of a modernization process in the environment. Here are the characteristics of modern society.

    1. Heterogeneous , modernized societies will merge and form unions and associations in the development process. A heterogeneous society is also closely related to a multicultural society, that is, a society consisting of different ethnicities and tribes in a certain region.
    2. Open Stratification System , modern society has a stratification system that is open to the changes of the times that are influenced by globalization and can cause the grouping of social strata to fade.
    3. High Mobility of Society , similar to the modernization characteristics of modern society also has high mobility due to the high population movement from villages to cities.
    4. Possessing Objective Thinking , modern society has a more objective nature in looking at something because it sees the existence of many changes and accepts the differences that exist in society.

    Those are some of the characteristics of modernization and modern society that can be distinguished from other social change processes .

    Well, Reader can also learn more about this modernization phenomenon through books available on Sinaumedia.com such as the following book.

    This book was written by Muhammad Taufan and Ine which also summarizes the modernization material as explained in this article. In addition, this book is also compiled using a student-centered learning paradigm, so it will certainly make it easier for Reader when learning Sociology materials such as modernization.

    Impact of Modernization

    As has been explained in the definition and characteristics of modernization, modernization will generally have an impact as a result of the process of changing an environment in society from one that is still backward to progress and become more sophisticated.

    When viewed only from its meaning, this modernization is seen to have a positive impact on the community in its environment. However, it turns out that there is also a negative impact given by modernization, you know.

    In order to be more clear, Reader needs to listen to the impact of modernization, both positive and negative. Here is the explanation.

    1. Positive Impact of Modernization

    • There is a change in values ​​and attitudes. This change happened because society proved to have a thought pattern that changed from an irrational thought pattern to a rational one.
    • There is development in the field of science and technology. This development can make it easier for the community to be active and can encourage the community to think more advanced.
    • Developments in science can also give form to the modernization process that occurs in society.
    • There is an increase in social life that changes for the better. The use of technology, as well as knowledge that develops can improve the function of community life, so that community life becomes much better over time.
    • Society experiences changes in behavior and way of life with science and technology that continues to grow.
    • Modernization can increase the effectiveness and efficiency of individual jobs in the community.
    • The effectiveness and efficiency caused by this modernization has an impact on the production process, so that it can improve the economy in a country.
    • The community will have an open attitude towards change as well as a desire to always innovate in order to achieve the well-being that the community aspires to.

    2. Negative Impact of Modernization

    1. Resulting in social disparity. The social disparity caused by modernization can be seen through the phenomenon of social groups such as homeless, unemployed, street vendors and others.
    2. Causing the strengthening of the gap between the educated community and the uneducated community and can cause changes in the existing social order in the community.
    3. There is an economic gap that can be seen through the difference between the lives of the rich community and the poor community, thus triggering the emergence of a consumptive culture and a culture of demonstration effect or showing off.
    4. Can cause pollution of the natural environment, as a result of development such as industrial factories that occur continuously.
    5. Modernization can have an impact on the increase in criminality, because everyone has a desire to be able to surpass others and try to achieve that goal in various ways including criminal ways.
    6. There is a shift in values ​​in local culture.
    7. The loss of customs from the community’s local culture that has been handed down from generation to generation and become one of the unique attractions and values ​​of the community.
    8. Causing the occurrence of westernization bias or excessive worship of western culture, both in a person’s lifestyle and way of looking.
    9. There is a technological gap or digital divide in society.

    Symptoms of Modernization

    Before the modernization process occurs in a community environment, this modernization occurs through several symptoms that can be viewed from various fields on aspects of life in the community.

    Here is a further explanation of the symptoms of modernization.

    1. Field of Culture

    The symptoms of modernization that occur in the field of culture can be marked through traditional culture that is displaced by the influence of culture from outside. Symptoms in the cultural field can also be seen through the occurrence of acculturation between two different cultures.

    There is also research carried out related to the level of religiosity of Indonesians in general and the ethnic groups in the regions specifically by Prof. Dr. Bungaran Antonius Simanjuntak which was made into a book titled Tradition, Religion, and Acceptance of Modernization in Society.

     

    2. Political Field

    The next symptoms of modernization can be seen through the political field. In the political field, the symptoms of modernization can be seen through the many countries that have escaped colonialism and the emergence of new countries that have become independent.

    In the political field, the symptoms of modernization can also be seen through the growth of democratic countries and the birth of political institutions. In addition, the recognition of human rights is also one of the symptoms of modernization.

    The symptoms of modernization in this political field are the most easily seen or realized by the public, because the democratic system is usually supported through direct and secret general elections involving the public.

    There is also a view of the modernization model of the study of Family Law through the approach of legal epistemology, epistemology owned by KHI and CLD-KHI which is discussed in the book Modernization of Family Law below.

     

    3. Economic field

    In the economic field, the symptoms of modernization can be seen from the increasing complexity of society’s needs for goods and services, so that the industrial sector is then built on a large scale to produce consumer demand goods.

    4. Social Field

    The formation of many new groups in society is a symptom of modernization in the social field. New groups in the society in question such as labor groups, intellectuals, manager groups to economic groups based on their class, namely low class and high class.

     

    Examples of Modernization 

    In order to more clearly understand the material of this modernization, Reader can see some examples of modernization according to the areas affected by modernization. Here are the examples.

    1. Examples of Modernization in the Field of Culture

    a. Behavior

    In the field of culture, one example of modernization is the changing behavior of society from children to adults. An example is the change in the behavior of children in 2021 who tend to be more comfortable debating or being able to critically answer parents’ questions, because they have been given enough knowledge since childhood.

    In Indonesia itself, in order to defend its human dignity, it faces the inevitable challenges of modernity, which is also discussed in the book Religion, Philosophy, Modernity – Human Dignity by Frans Magnis Suseno.

    b. Language

    The language used by modernized societies has also changed. In the past, like in Java, people had difficulty using Indonesian, because their everyday language was Javanese, so it would be difficult to communicate with people outside the island of Java.

    Now, residents of the island of Java can use fluent Indonesian and even master foreign languages.

    c. Lifestyle

    The lifestyle of modern society will change along with the modernization of the society in which it lives. For example, like before, people don’t care too much about fashion and food.

    In the past, the Indonesian people ate food that could be harvested through the produce of the garden or by slaughtering their livestock and their age, the Indonesian people were not too picky when it came to food.

    But now, people tend to choose food more, because they pay attention to their health conditions. In addition, there are vegetarian and other lifestyles that did not exist before.

    2. Examples of Modernization in the Economic Field

    In the economic field, modernization can be seen through the following examples.

    The development of industries in the community, so as to be able to expand employment. In addition, changes in the nature of society that are increasingly consumptive and require many goods and services, such as online taxi services, reflexology massage services and services to spend on daily needs.

    In addition, developments in the field of technology also affect the economic field, such as industries or factories that produce goods now using machines more than humans. This is considered, because machines are more effective, cheaper and faster than humans, so that the employment field narrows and causes the termination of employment relationships on a large scale.

    3. Examples of Modernization in the Political Field 

    In the political field, examples of modernization can be seen through the influence of relations between countries that grow and develop on an international and global scale. In addition, there are visions and missions that make up international organizations and consist of several countries such as the UN, ASEAN, the EU and so on.

    The establishment of bilateral and multilateral cooperation is also one of the examples of modernization in the political field. This cooperation from various sources is one of the consequences of globalization and is expected to provide benefits for the interests of countries that establish cooperation.

    4. Examples of Modernization in the Social Field 

    It’s easy for people to access information quickly just by using a mobile phone. Now there are many online media that will always provide updates on topics that are attractive to readers.

    The ease of reading news and accessing information is one example of modernization in the social field.

    In addition to the ease of accessing information, growth in the field of transformation and distribution processes is also an example of modernization in the social field. For example, public transportation is available in various regions, even in remote regions, as well as online ojek that can reach wherever Reader wants to go.

    Currently in Indonesia there is also a KRL that has been officially used since July 1, 2013 due to this modernization. Learn about the implementation of e-ticketing at KRL and various other service innovations that are discussed in the book Untold Story E-Ticketing – “Behind the Scenes” Modernization of KRL Jabodetabek .

    Reader, that’s a brief explanation of the material of modernization starting from its meaning according to experts, characteristics, symptoms to examples of modernization.

     

  • Understanding Moderators: Duties, Must Haves and How to Be

    Moderator: Meaning, Duties, and How to Be – Do you know Najwa Shihab? Or maybe, you become one of the millions of viewers who are always mesmerized by the way he drives events? Or even, maybe you have ambitions to be like Najwa Shihab? Conducting interviews and also leading discussion activities between important figures in this country?

    Indeed, it cannot be denied that recently, the popularity of Najwa Shihab and the television show she hosts is increasing, especially among young people who are starting to think critically and are happy to find various kinds of information. Through the events he led, Najwa Shihab often invited various important speakers to then be invited to discuss various issues that are being hotly discussed by the community.

    The ability possessed by Najwa Shihab to guide the course of a discussion is indeed one of the main attractions of the event. His firm and straightforward manner and his ability to ask sharp questions seemed to be able to hypnotize and attract the attention of the event’s connoisseurs.

    Common people often think that a moderator has the same meaning as a master of ceremony (MC) or what is commonly called a host. This is because the two professions have the same task, which is to guide the course of an event. However, in reality, the two professions are different.

    The difference between moderators and event leaders is generally found in their duties and responsibilities. A moderator has the duty and responsibility to guide the exchange of ideas between members in the forums. For example, such as in debates, discussions, deliberations, meetings, speeches, and various other similar activities. While the MC or event driver, has a wider duty and responsibility that is to drive in various events but comprehensively, covering from the opening of the event to the closing.

    Well, in this article, we will discuss various things about moderators. Starting from the understanding of moderators, duties and responsibilities, functions, anything that a moderator should have, and also the steps that should be taken when one day you become a moderator. Here is a summary of moderators from kitabisa.net!

    INTERPRETATION OF MODERATORS

    Actually, what is the meaning of moderator? If traced from the original language, which is English, moderator has the meaning of someone who moderates or becomes an intermediary. While according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), moderator has several meanings, namely:

    1. People who have duties as mediators (referees, judges, etc.)
    2. The leader of the meeting (discussion, meeting, deliberation) who is the mediator in the event of discussion or discussion of problems
    3. A device in the machine that controls or regulates the flow of energy or fuel

    In this article, the context of the moderator that we will discuss is as an intermediary in the running of an event, so you can focus on the meaning from the first and second points.

    A question arose: “why does a discussion need a moderator as an intermediary?”

    One of the main reasons for needing a moderator as an intermediary for discussion activities is time. A moderator is needed as an intermediary for discussion activities, because discussion activities have a predetermined time limit, especially if the discussion activity is shown on TV, then there is a time limit for advertisements, as well as for subsequent TV events. Just imagine if a discussion activity is not given a time limit, then the discussion will be very long and boring.

    A moderator in the discussion activity gives time limits, as a reminder, when party A starts speaking, when party A should stop speaking, when party B starts speaking, and so on until the discussion activity ends according to the time that has been determined.

    Maybe after reading the explanation earlier, you will feel “wow, it seems like being a moderator is not an easy thing”. Before you conclude that, it would be good if you could learn more about the duties, responsibilities, and functions of a moderator.

    MODERATOR’S DUTIES

    Reported from various sources, a moderator has various duties and responsibilities including:

    1. As a controller as well as a supervisor in discussion activities in a forum.
    2. Ensure that the discussion or discussion in the forum, takes place in accordance with the main topic that has been determined.
    3. Create ideas and create new topics so that the forum becomes dynamic and remains alive.
    4. Provide an opening or brief introduction on the explanation of the topic that will be discussed in the forum.
    5. Give a warning or reminder if in the forum there are members of the forum whose discussion becomes irrelevant or has deviated from the main topic being discussed.
    6. Give a warning or warning if there are members of the forum who start to break the rules or are considered to have the potential to disrupt the forum.

    It turns out that there are a lot of responsibilities as a moderator. However, in any case, all the duties and responsibilities of the moderator are very important to do so that the discussion activities in the forum can run well, smoothly, and in accordance with what is expected.

    THINGS THAT SHOULD BE OWNED BY THE MODERATOR

    A moderator should prepare some important things so that discussion activities in the forum can run smoothly. In addition to things that can be prepared, moderators also need to have certain qualities and attitudes in overcoming problems that will arise. Here are the things that a moderator should have:

    1. Mastering the Topic To Be Discussed

    There are many misconceptions about a moderator. Among them is the assumption that the main ability that a moderator must have is to be fluent in speaking. However, it turns out that being fluent in speaking is still not enough. A moderator must have a broad vision, at least must first master the topic to be discussed in the forum.

    Moderators must master the topics that will be discussed in the forum, because even though the moderator does not have the capacity to deliver the material or express his arguments in the forum, the moderator is still someone who has control over the ongoing discussion. Moderators have the responsibility to ensure that the discussions and arguments presented by forum members are still appropriate or relevant to the topic being discussed.

    2. Be neutral and objective

    Moderators are forbidden to have bad or good prejudices and also to be inclined (bias) to one of the parties in the forum. Moderators are required to be objective in carrying out their duties so that justice is created in the discussion activities in the forum for each member.

    3. Have the ability to observe and listen well

    Moderators are required to be able to pay attention to all types of responses, both verbal responses (verbally) and non-verbal responses (body language). Moderators must observe and listen to ensure that no sentences or words are missed from every conversation delivered by the members in the forum.

    4. Able to understand the position

    Moderators do not have the capacity to deliver material and are also prohibited from expressing their personal arguments in the forum they are leading. The moderator is indeed required to master the main topics discussed in the discussion, but this is done because the moderator must understand the main points of the discussion in the discussion. The moderator’s job is to supervise the course of the discussion and therefore, he is not allowed to take over the duties of other members such as by presenting material, presenting arguments, and or talking too much about the topic being discussed in the discussion.

    5. Have a calm but firm attitude

    Debate that occurs in a discussion forum is a natural thing. Sometimes, in the debate, there will be things that can trigger verbal arguments or even fights. Moderators in this situation are required to have a firm attitude towards all members of the discussion forum. Moderators must dare to dissolve at the same time ensure that the discussion activities will continue without interruption. This attitude to be firm should also be accompanied by a calm attitude and not easy to get caught.

    6. Able to melt the atmosphere

    In some situations in a forum, it will be very helpful if a moderator has the ability to make the atmosphere less tense and more relaxed. This is useful to make it easier for forum members to convey their ideas and arguments because the discussion atmosphere in the forum becomes more relaxed and intimate. However, this should be done as necessary and not excessive because if it is excessive then it will even disrupt the progress of the discussion activities.

    HOW TO BE A GOOD MODERATOR

    After knowing the meaning as well as the duties and responsibilities of a moderator, you also need to know the procedures or steps that must be prepared to become a moderator, which include:

    1. Understand the duties and functions of moderators

    The main task and function of a moderator in a debate or discussion activity in a forum is to control the activity while ensuring that the discussion activity will go according to plan. Try to focus on that matter only, there is no need to try to give an opinion or defend one of the parties because that is not the right of a moderator.

    2. Study thoroughly the material or topic to be discussed.

    Learn the material or topic that will be discussed or discussed in the discussion activity. Try to do research through various sources such as articles, books, the internet, or ask the experts directly. It is very important for you to understand the material that will be discussed in order to ensure that the discussions held in the forum remain appropriate and relevant.

    3. Study the order of events carefully.

    A moderator must study the order of events carefully. In this case, a moderator can work with the MC. Studying the order of events can make it easier for moderators to set time limits for each session in discussion activities in the forum.

    4. Learn information about the resource person.

    For a forum that brings a resource person as a speaker, it is mandatory for the resource person to find or learn basic information about the resource person. This will help the moderator to carry out his duties, for example to know the name of the resource person, why the resource person was invited, how much capacity the resource person has, and what questions are appropriate to ask the resource person.

    5. Make a small note.

    For those of you who have difficulty memorizing, small notes in notes can help you to be smooth when being a moderator. There is no ban for moderators to open posts, so it’s okay to post, especially if you really need it.

    6. Keep practicing

    Moderators do have a task that seems not easy. There is no instant result, everything that happens in this world always requires a process. Therefore, with effort, determination, and a high will to continue practicing and learning, of course you will be able to become a great moderator. In addition, you can also buy books on how to become a moderator as your guide and guide to learn more effectively.

     

    CONCLUSION

    Moderator is a mediator or leader of a discussion, meeting, and deliberation. Moderator and MC are two different things. The difference is that an MC is the event guide who manages the course of the event starting from the opening to the closing, while a moderator has duties and responsibilities only to maintain the continuation of a discussion. In carrying out his duties, a moderator must master the topics to be discussed, be firm and objective, be able to mediate disputes in the discussion, and have good observation skills.

    To be a good moderator, the things that need to be prepared are by understanding the meaning, duties, and functions of moderators; learn the topic to be discussed, and also learn basic info from the resource person (if any). Maybe, being a moderator looks like a difficult job, but you can definitely become a reliable moderator if you keep practicing and want to learn.

     

  • Understanding Capital: History, Types, Sources, and Benefits

    Definition of Capital – “Where to get capital from?” We often hear these questions when dealing with the business world. The existence of capital is very necessary to start a business. Without capital, it is impossible for a business unit to run and grow.

    Both small-scale and large-scale businesses still need capital in order to carry out their business activities. So what is the meaning of capital when viewed from a general perspective? And how important is the existence of capital? Reader, now is the time to talk about capital.

    Definition of Capital

    There are many experts who express their opinions about capital. Let’s discuss one by one, Reader.

    1. Bambang Riyanto

    The professor from the Faculty of Economics and Business explained that capital is the result of production that in the future can be reused for further production . In its development, capital is emphasized on value, and buy, or as a collectivity of capital goods.

    While what is meant by capital goods are all the goods in the company with all their productive functions to generate income. In other words, capital is the power to manage capital goods.

    2. Lawrence J. Gitman

    The author of the book Principles of Managerial Finance states that capital is a specific term loan charged to the company. This can be seen in the financial balance of the company on the right side, in addition to the obligations that must be borne at this time.

    3. Drs. Moekijat

    This country’s administration experts have the view that capital is all the things owned by the company. Starting from cash, credit, manufacturing rights, patents, machines for operations, office inventory, digital assets, property, business facilities and equipment, brands, resources, and all things that are valuable but cannot be divided.

    In practice, capital is often viewed from the total ownership of the company. These rights consist of a certain amount of funds, surplus, valuable resources, and indivisible profits.

    4. Jacob Louis Meij

    Professor of Business Economics Groningen University as well as a business economist in the Netherlands believes that capital is all the goods in a company’s household that can be collected to generate income. This can be seen in the balance on the debit side.

    Meanwhile, wealth is the purchasing power that is in various capitals. Its position is on the credit side of the balance sheet.

    5. Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

    According to KBBI, capital is a fund that can be used as a parent or fund to do business, release money, and so on. In other words, capital is property (can be in the form of funds, goods, etc.) that can be used to produce something that can increase wealth and profit.

    Still according to KBBI, capital can also be interpreted as something that a person or company uses as supplies to work, fight, and so on.

    If we conclude, capital is all the things we have in the form of money, goods, other assets that we can use to generate profit in running a business. In practice, capital can be categorized into several types, such as cash and non-cash fund capital, debt – receivables, enthusiasm, knowledge, relationships, skills, confidence, brands, ideas, etc.

    So Reader, can we move on to the next point? If not, Reader can try re-reading in a calm condition and good mood . If so, let’s move on to the next point.

    Capital History

    The capital can be obtained through working by hunting, studying, poetry, farming, mining, working in people’s companies, and so on. Then the capital is sold or bartered with something of equal or higher value, or processed first. From the accumulated capital one can do business activities.

    Sometimes, a person has capital in the form of skills and things that cannot be monetized. On the other hand, there are other people who have capital in the form of money but cannot run a business, either because they are busy or because they are not experts in the business. So the cooperation between one party and another started to run a business together based on the capital they each have.

    If the cooperation spreads to the public, then the capital market appears. It’s called the capital market because the public can be the capital of a company without having to get to know the business owner. Then the capital owned by the investor can be sold to other investors. Now, let’s look at the historical record of the capital market.

    1. The First Revenue Sharing System Practiced by Publicans (Years ±3 BC)

    The first revenue-sharing system recorded by history was a joint business run by the Publicans during the Roman Empire. Publicans are people who do business (capitalist average) as general contractors. They became providers of services required by the Roman government, such as providing military needs, collecting taxes, and building public facilities.

    At one time, the Roman Empire was busy strengthening the military so tax collection was done by the Publicans. The tender system used at that time was won by whoever was able to give the highest bid in giving taxes to the government. The profit is obtained from the difference between the tax they collect and the nominal amount deposited to the government.

    This project is very risky and requires a large amount of capital, so the Publicans joined forces. If the amount of property accumulated is smaller than that deposited to the government, the loss is borne by many people. If it is profitable, then the profit share is adjusted to the amount of capital invested in the beginning.

    2. The First Stock Document in the World

    It was Stora Kopparbergs Bergslag that recorded its name as the first company in the world to issue share documents. Copper mining in Falun, Sweden has been started since the 850s by local residents partially.

    On June 16, 1288, the King of Sweden confirmed a document called the Deed of Exchange. The document is the first written document about the fare. In this document it is stated that A. Peter a bishop gets an eighth of the mining revenue. The existence of the division of mining revenue shows that the share document has existed since that time.

    At that time, the mine was managed and administered by a well-organized organization. No longer run by local residents, but run with an integrated system. The organization is named Stora Kopparberg.

    3. The First Capital Market in the World

    Reader must be familiar with the company name Vereenigde Oost Indische Compagnie (VOC). But Reader may be surprised to learn that VOC is the first company in the world to open the capital market. With large capital, the VOC had the ability to monopolize trade. This is one of the reasons why VOC became a very strong company in the economy.

    How much is his wealth? Launching from Visual Capitalist, if equated with the current USD exchange rate, the wealth of the VOC reached $7.9 trillion or the equivalent of 112 trillion. Fantastic amount isn’t it? To achieve the same wealth, it is necessary to combine 20 large companies such as Microsoft, Apple, Exxonmobil, Alibaba, Amazon, Berkshire Hathaway, Samsung, Tencent, and so on.

    The power of the VOC made trade competition in Europe more intense so that the VOC obtained permission to form its own military and political power. So it can be said that the VOC became a “country within a country”. However, due to massive corruption, the VOC went bankrupt and was closed by the Dutch Government. Because of that, there is an insinuation that the VOC is also referred to as Vergaan Onder Corruptie which means destroyed due to corruption.

    As a company that opens the capital market in the world, the capital market in Indonesia has also been going on since the Dutch Government came to power in the colonial era. In 1912, the Netherlands officially opened a stock exchange branch in Batavia (Jakarta).

    Types of Capital

    1. Types of capital based on sources.

    Based on the source, capital is divided into two, namely internal capital and external capital.

    a. Internal Capital

    Internal capital is capital derived from the wealth of company owners, shareholders’ capital, the sale of securities, or capital obtained from company profits.

    Examples of internal capital are vehicles, inventory, means of production, personal savings, buildings, shares, land, company profits, and so on that do not use external wealth.

    b. External capital

    External capital is capital obtained apart from the company’s wealth. The capital can be obtained from investors or creditors such as banks, cooperatives, personal loans.

    Usually, external capital is required due to limited internal capital resources. Company managers are worried that internal capital will not be sufficient to carry out or develop business activities.

    Examples of external capital are loans from banks/cooperatives, unpaid employee salaries, unpaid production costs to suppliers, investments deposited by investors.

    2. Types of Capital Based on Ownership

    Based on the owner, capital is divided into two, namely individual capital and social capital.

    a. Private Capital

    This type of capital is capital that comes from a person. The advantage of private equity is that it facilitates various business activities and provides optimal profit to the owner. Examples of this type of capital are personal property, deposits, and shares.

    b. Social Capital

    This type of capital is capital owned by the community. This capital provides benefits for the community in general in doing business activities. Examples of social capital are roads, ports, markets, bridges, stations, and others.

    3. Types of Capital Based on Its Existence

    If viewed from its nature, capital is divided into two types, namely active capital and passive capital. Here is an explanation of both.

    a. Concrete Capital (Active)

    Concrete capital or active capital is capital that can be seen with the naked eye and tangible. Examples of concrete capital are money, raw materials, buildings or places of business, vehicles, machines, warehouses, etc.

    b. Abstract Capital (Passive)

    Abstract capital is business capital that cannot be seen with the naked eye. Its value is difficult to measure directly. However, abstract capital is very important for the sustainability of the company.

    Examples of abstract capital are knowledge, skills, copyright, brand, social media, business connections, managerial, and so on. Concrete capital and abstract capital are both needed to develop and expand a company.

    Both should go hand in hand. Because to start business operations, Reader must have knowledge first. Reader also needs funds to start production. To make and market products, Reader needs the right supplier and customer connections. To develop managerial skills, Reader needs to upgrade their knowledge and skills. Thus, both are equally important.

    4. Types of Capital Based on Their Properties

    Based on its nature, capital is divided into two types, namely fixed capital and current capital. Come on Reader, let’s learn what fixed capital and current capital are.

    a. Fixed Capital

    Fixed capital or fixed capital is capital that can be used for production several times in the long term and repeatedly. Examples of fixed capital are buildings, machines, land, computers, vehicles, test equipment, etc.

    b. Liquid Capital

    Current capital or variable capital is capital that is used up in one production process. Examples of current capital are raw materials, fuel, disposable tools, and so on.

    Capital Benefit

    1. Prepare raw materials.

    Before doing the production process, Reader definitely needs raw materials. Procurement of raw materials requires capital.

    2. Doing the production process.

    To carry out the production process, of course we need costs such as water to wash materials, soap, fuel, electricity, gas, and so on.

    3. Manage business permits.

    Having a business license is essential for a business unit. Especially if you want to cooperate with external parties and in large numbers. In managing business permits, Reader needs to prepare capital because it sometimes requires the services of a notary.

    4. Manage patent rights.

    Some of Reader works in business activities may be unique and prone to be recognized as the property of other companies. So Reader needs to manage the patent rights so that the product is registered in your name. Managing patent rights also requires capital.

    5. Paying employee salaries.

    Due to the many activities in running the business, Reader needs the help of others. You need capital to be able to fulfill employee rights with a salary that is in accordance with the agreement between your company and the employee. In addition, allowances, insurance, overtime pay also need to be recorded.

    6. Savings.

    A good company is a company that has a savings account as a reserve fund. This savings can also serve as capital in a desperate situation.

    7. Increase the trust of other parties.

    The existence of capital can increase the trust of your prospective partner. Some prospective partners consider the financial condition of the company they will work with. This is not surprising because to make sure that the company that will work together is not playing around.

    8. Other requirements.

    Other requirements that require capital are to open new branches, expand markets, transportation, pulses, company inventory, and other company needs.

     

  • Understanding Social Mobility: Theory, Form, Influencing Factors

    Definition of Social Mobility – Does Reader realize that in this social life, there is bound to be a shift or change in social strata for each individual? Or even the move or change in social strata has actually happened to you and your family?

    The existence of the transfer or change of the social stratum is a natural thing to be able to happen, whether it is a change towards a higher social stratum or even a lower one from the previous social stratum. This happens because every member of society must want to have a better life than before, so they will actively try to change the social strata.

    So, what is the meaning of social mobility? Reader must already know that mobility means displacement, so what about social mobility?

    Well, so that Reader can understand that, let’s read the following comments!

    Understanding Appropriate Mobility According to Experts

    The discussion about social mobility is included in the discipline of sociology, so the understanding of it is of course expressed by experts who are sociologists.

    Edward Ransford

    According to Ransford, social mobility is a move that leads up or down in a hierarchical social environment.

    Anthony Giddens

    According to Giddens, social mobility is something that refers to the movement of an individual and groups between different socioeconomic positions.

    William Kornblum

    Kornblum believes that social mobility is the movement of individuals, families, and social groups from one social layer to another.

    Michael S. Bassis

    According to Bassis, social mobility is a process of upward and downward movement in the socioeconomic environment that can change a person’s social status in the social order.

    Kimball Young and Raymond W. Mack

    These two sociologists stated that social mobility is a process of mobility in the social structure, namely certain patterns that regulate the organization in a social group.

    Paul B. Horton

    Horton also expressed his opinion related to social mobility, which is a movement of movement from one social class to another, or movement from one stratum to another.

    Well, based on these definitions, it can be concluded that social mobility is a process of movement that occurs in individuals or groups from one social position to another social position . Regarding Indonesian society today, it has an open social layer system, so the level of social mobility can increase compared to the closed social layer system. In a closed social layer system, it actually tends to be low in terms of social mobility, as can be seen in societies that still prioritize the caste system.

    Social mobility will always involve three main things, namely.

    1. Social class changes, both upwards and downwards.
    2. Experienced by humans as individuals and in groups.
    3. Gaining a new social class.

    Theory About Social Mobility

    In the same way as the main subject matter in the sub-discipline of science, this social mobility also has various theories, so it does not come from the thought of “nawur” only. Theories about social mobility have been formulated by sociologists, such as Martin Lipset and Hans Zetterberg, Ralph Turner, and Pitirim Sorokin. Well, here is a review of those theories!

    1. Martin Lipset and Hans Zetterberg

    The theory of social mobility that was initiated by Martin and Hans focuses on the causes and dimensions of the occurrence of social mobility among the community.

    In terms of the causes of social mobility there are two. First, there is supply from unfilled status positions. Second, there is a change in levels. Simply put, whenever there is social mobility with upward movement, there will definitely also be downward movement.

    Meanwhile, in terms of the dimensions of social mobility, there are four dimensions:

    • Occupation Ranking

    In this first dimension, experts argue that a job owned by an individual is believed to be an important factor that differentiates the existence of beliefs, values, norms, habits, and even emotional expression from an individual.

    • Consumption Ranking

    In this consumption ranking dimension, it refers to the lifestyle owned by an individual or a group of people. People who have the same lifestyle and honor ( prestige ) will usually be in the same consumption class. This consumption calculation index is not based on total employment income, but on the total income that has been spent on certain activities.

    • Social Class Ranking

    In this dimension, an individual can be said to be in the same social class as other individuals, when they accept the individual together and have relationships between individuals.

    For example, A is an ordinary student who is in the middle social class. However, he hangs out with a group of students in the upper social class. Well, the people who are in that group, accept A with pleasure to join them. This makes A in the upper social class dimension, even though he comes from a middle social class.

    • Power Rankings

    In this ranking dimension, it refers to role relationships, in the form of power relationships owned by individuals. They believe that the power or position owned by other individuals can be a “vehicle” in this social mobility effort.

    2. Ralph Turner

    The theory proposed by Ralph Turner links the education system with existing social mobility efforts. The assumption behind the thought is that there is an open class system, marked by the opening of public schools, so that there will be opportunities for the community to do vertical social mobility.

    Ralph Turner also stated that there are two types of social mobility, which are based on community norms, namely sponsor mobility and contest mobility.

    In sponsor-type mobility, the determination of community members who can enter the upper social class is through selection and is based on some necessary criteria. The determination also cannot be canceled by any strategy.

    Meanwhile, in the type of contest mobility, there is a system where the upper social status becomes a gift or reward for a person, if he succeeds through the various efforts he does in an open competition. From the “contest” of the competition, a person will use their abilities and strategies to compete with other individuals fairly.

    3. Pitirim Sorokin

    The third theory expressed by Sorokin is related to the opportunity or chance of social mobility for an individual or a group of individuals.

    Sorokin thinks that in a society not everyone will get the same opportunity as others to be able to change their social status.

    Through the theory, Sorokin indirectly divided two types of social mobility, namely horizontal mobility and vertical mobility.

    Forms of Social Mobility

    Basically, every human being, both individually and in groups, will never feel satisfied with what they get in their lives, so they want to continue to move towards a better social status. Social mobility is of course closely related to social stratification, because it refers to the definition of movement from one social layer to another, both downward and upward.

    Well, the following are the forms of mobility that occur in the social order.

    1. Horizontal Social Mobility

    Horizontal social mobility is the change of individuals and groups as social objects towards other social groups of equal status. The meaning of this level is that there is no change in the degree of the person’s position.

    For example, Pak Kuncoro is a Mathematics teacher in high school, but because the high school environment does not suit him, he decided to become a Mathematics teacher in junior high school.

    In horizontal social mobility this can happen in the following cases:

    • Level or Status

    Social mobility is closely related to the level or social status possessed by an individual, even if it is equal or horizontal. For example, Pak Yohan was the principal at SMA Produce, then he was transferred to become the principal at SMA Wei. What happened to Pak Yohan can still be called social mobility but in an equal social status.

    • Territory

    Social mobility can happen in any small matter. Even moving the place or region where you work can also be called horizontal social mobility, because your social status is still the same as before.

    2. Vertical Social Mobility

    Vertical social mobility is a form of movement of individuals or groups as social objects towards unequal social positions. The meaning of unequal is that the social status can go up (up) or down (down). There are several factors that cause vertical social mobility, namely:

    • Wealth

    This factor can certainly change the position or social position of a person, which can make him richer or even poorer.

    • Authority

    Factors of power can also cause vertical social mobility. A person who has a certain power tends to easily rise to a position so that his power increases and his social mobility can increase drastically. And vice versa, when a person does not have enough power to rise to a position, he will also experience downward social mobility.

    • Education

    The main channel so that a person can experience social mobility fairly is through education, especially formal education. A person with a good educational background will certainly experience an increase in position and social status, especially when working.

    The Direction of Upward Vertical Social Mobility

    Previously, it has been written that this vertical social mobility has two directions, namely upwards and downwards. For upward social mobility, it also has two forms, namely:

    • Get into a higher position or social status

    In this upward social mobility, it usually happens that someone who was at the bottom of social status at the time, then something happens that causes him to get an increase in social status. For example, there is an honorary teacher who was accepted by CPNS. That of course made him experience an increase in social status as a result of his promotion.

    • Form a new group

    The formation of this new group is based on the fact that the group did not exist before. However, it should be known that the “figures” who make up this new group must also be of a higher social status.

    The Direction of Social Mobility is Downward

    Similar to the upward (upward) direction of social mobility, downward (downward) social mobility also has the main forms, namely:

    • Drop a position

    This demotion will usually be related to the department in his work environment. For example, a retired civil servant. When he becomes a pensioner, of course he will indirectly lower his social status because his power when holding a certain position has “lost”.

    • The decrease in the degree of individual groups because there is disintegration

    According to the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI), disintegration is a state of disunity. As a result of this disintegration, a group of individuals can drop their social status simultaneously.

    3. Intergenerational Social Mobility

    This inter-generational mobility is marked by the development of the standard of living in a family’s life, whether it is decreasing or increasing. The main thing in this form of mobility is not the development of the offspring, but the transfer of social status that has an impact on the generation.

    For example, there is a chili trader who only completed his education up to Primary School. However, he managed to send his son to school until he graduated from sailing school. This child managed to change his and his family’s status so that it could be different from the previous status of his parents.

    4. Intragenerational Social Mobility

    Intragenerational horizontal mobility is the transfer of status experienced by a person in the same generation. The meaning of the same generation is that the transfer of the status happens to himself, not to the achievements of his children or family members.

    For example, there is someone who previously worked as a construction porter. Thanks to his perseverance and luck, he managed to become a foreman.

    Another example is that teenagers born in the ’90s have the opportunity to develop science and technology because they are currently in the digital and globalization era.

     

    Inhibiting Factors and Encouraging Factors of Social Mobility

    Factors Inhibiting the Occurrence of Social Mobility

    The occurrence of this social mobility is driven by several factors, namely structural factors and individual factors. Well, here is the description.

    Structural Factors

    1. Job Structure

    Generally, economic activities carried out in the community are divided into two sectors, namely the formal sector and the informal sector. The existence of these differences clearly affects the level of “success” of the social mobility of the people involved.

    Especially in the agricultural sector, the members of the community involved are more likely to have a low status position, so the level of mobility will also be low.

    However, that does not necessarily make them “fail” in their social mobility efforts. Right now there are many members of the community who work in the agricultural sector and have succeeded in social mobility, both horizontally and vertically.

    2. Double Economy

    This dual economy usually occurs in developing countries, causing dualism. First, economic activities are still dominated by traditional elements. Second, its economic activities are dominated by modern elements.

    3. Learning Experience

    Members of the community who come from the middle social class, generally have a more secure learning experience than the learning experience owned by members of the community from the lower social class.

    Moreover, there is a view that degrees, tests, recommendations, even the network of relationships between friends can be a place to exchange information accompanied by recommendations related to job opportunities. This makes it difficult for outsiders to “break through”, so it will cause discrimination.

    Individual Factors

    1. Differences in Ability
    2. Differences in Behavior
    • Education
    • Work Habits
    • Delayed Pleasure Patterns
    • Ability to Play
    • Value Gap Patterns
    • Luck Factor

    Economic Conditions

    The economic situation is the main thing to encourage the occurrence of social mobility, especially in individuals or groups of individuals who live in low economic conditions. When they “dare” to move to another area and manage to raise their status even if it is not too high, it can be called mobility.

    Driving Factors for Social Mobility

    1. Changes in the Political Situation

    Changes in the political situation that occur in a country can basically be a form of people’s support for the new government structure. Well, through those supports, then an individual also has the desire to develop his “business” so that he can do social mobility.

    2. Social and Cultural Changes

    In community life, whether in urban or rural areas, there will always be changes, both in social structure, social interaction, and the prevailing value system. These changes can later encourage individuals to adjust to the demands of the changes, so that they will unconsciously create a desire to do social climbing.

    Remember, social climbing is the transfer of the social status of members of society from a lower social class to a higher social class. Not only that, technological progress and ideological changes also open up the possibility of upward mobility and “create” a new stratification that develops in society.

    3. Economic Changes

    The economic situation that is going on in a society, of course, gives encouragement to individuals or groups of individuals to improve their social status. Especially if the economic situation at that time improved and made them successful in carrying out various types of business.

    1. Poverty Factor
    2. Factors of Class Discrimination
    3. Racial and Religious Difference Factors
    4. Gender Difference Factors
    5. Difference of Interest

    Well, that’s the explanation of the meaning of social mobility and its forms. Reader must have experienced this social mobility, both between generations and intragenerations, because this is very natural to happen, especially to all individuals who live in an open social layer system.

     

  • Understanding MPV Cars: Features, Types, Advantages and Disadvantages

    Understanding MPV Cars: Features, Types, Advantages and Disadvantages

    Definition of MPV Car For users of four-wheeled vehicles, especially those who use the vehicle as a family car, the MPV car type is indeed the right choice. Apart from that, the size of the car is large enough to accommodate up to seven people, this car is also very comfortable to use for traveling and its function is very flexible.

    For Reader friends who are interested in owning a car, of course this MPV type car is very interesting to own. However, for those of you who are still wondering what the heck is an MPV car? In this discussion, we will present related information about the MPV car to make it easier for Reader to consider this type of car to buy.

    For that, let’s find out the meaning of the MPV car, its types, functions, as well as its advantages and disadvantages in this discussion.

    Further information related to the MPV car can be read below!

    What is an MPV car?

    Multi Purpose Vehicle (in Indonesian means: Multipurpose Vehicle, abbreviated as MPV (“MPV”) is a classification of “multipurpose” vehicles that can be used both as passenger and cargo carriers. This type of vehicle is usually classified as a “minibus” (small bus) based on its shape This MPV-type vehicle usually comes in two production versions, namely passenger (with rear passenger seats) and cargo (without windows and rear seats) designed only for cargo transportation.

    The first MPV was made in France in 1987 with the Renault Espace. With the creation of the MPV car, it became a great advance in its time because it could transport more passengers without having to carry a lot of cargo.

    Now the MPV also appears in a new category that is mentioned as a mini MPV with a passenger capacity of 5 passengers but in terms of cargo it can carry more goods than a sedan.

    In the 1990s the MPV movement was quite large in Indonesia, the most popular among the community in the early 90s was Toyota Kijang which offered 1.8 (82 hp) and 1.5 (66 hp) engines which are known to be repulsive and suitable for road conditions in Indonesia. Furthermore, Isuzu introduced a diesel MPV that is in great demand, namely the Isuzu Panther which is known to be very economical with a 2300 cc OHV engine with 63 bhp.

    Then Daihatsu did not want to miss out on other segments, in 1994 it changed the look of the Daihatsu Zebra to the Daihatsu Zebra Espass which offered a 1600 cc engine with 88 hp from other competitors at the time. besides, the 1300 cc (75 hp) engine is said to be more economical.

    Among its competitors, Suzuki Carry is the most suitable for the purchasing power of the public, besides being known for its affordable price, low maintenance costs, and the cheapest fuel consumption in its class. Suzuki Carry will reach the Indonesian community with three engines, namely 1500cc (80hp), 1300cc (72hp) and 1000cc (52hp).

    kijang mpv car

    MPV car features

    As we know that there are many types of cars in the market, one of the most popular is the MPV car. Well, to distinguish the type of MPV car from other types of car, first know the following characteristics of the MPV car.

    1. MPV Passenger Capacity

    It is a vehicle designed for family needs. No wonder if one of its features is a spacious enough cabin that can accommodate up to 7-8 passengers.

    2. Machine Capacity

    As a universal family car, the average MPV engine capacity is less than 1500 cc. Unlike SUVs that are designed to drive on extreme roads and have an engine capacity of 1500 cc or more. MPV is indeed a type of vehicle that is more suitable for driving on flat roads.

    3. Car body

    Because it is used to transport passengers and goods, usually the MPV body is higher and wider, so the interior cabin is wider. These features are also an advantage of the MPV car type, where the slogan “relief makes you happy” This MPV type car is very suitable as a family vehicle.

    4. Operating system

    The operating system has the following functions. Most types of MPV cars use a two-wheel drive system, both front and rear wheel drive.

    5. Clearance

    Other characteristics of MPV cars can be seen in the clearance, which is the distance from the bottom of the car to the ground. This type of MPV has a fairly high ground clearance, an average of more than 200 mm, which makes it possible to drive even on rough roads.

    MPV car type

    MPV cars themselves are divided into several types, namely low, medium and premium types. Here is an explanation of the types of MPV:

    1. Low MPV

    The Low Type MPV is a category of MPV with simpler features and a body that is not too big. But this type can still meet daily transportation needs and save fuel.

    2. Medium MPV

    Being one level above the low MPV, the medium type MPV is a class with a larger body and more complete features than the low MPV. The price of this type of car is slightly more expensive compared to Low MPV.

    3. Premium MPV

    This type is the most advanced type of car in the MPV class. The car body in this category is bigger, with an interior that can be considered VIP class.

    Advantages of MPV cars

    In addition to being a multi-purpose vehicle, MPV cars have several advantages that are a plus compared to other types of cars, among others:

    1. Large capacity

    As a minibus class, this type of MPV is indeed a fairly large type of car. Certainly to fulfill its role as a means of transportation. Its dimensions can accommodate many passengers.

    Like a mini bus, this MPV can accommodate 8 people. The spacious cabin it carries also makes the front row passengers comfortable. The distance between rows of seats is relatively the same regardless of whether it is the second or third row.

    In addition to being a family vehicle, this MPV type car also has a passenger space that is large enough to fit in the trunk of the car. It has enough space for your belongings when traveling with the family.

    2. An environmentally friendly car

    Another advantage of this MPV car is the jar sector in the kitchen. Most types of MPV cars now have environmentally friendly and fuel-efficient engines that are usually more economical.

    3. Relatively Affordable Prices

    This superiority can be one of the strong reasons why MPVs are so popular in Indonesia, namely the price range. The price tag is relatively cheaper than other cars in the same class. Another advantage is that MPVs tend to have a more competitive purchase price. In fact, the price is considered more affordable than other types of cars. In addition, MPV operating and maintenance costs are also relatively cheap, such as fuel consumption, monthly maintenance, service costs, and the purchase of spare parts. The price of the MPV will not drop far from the purchase price. Provided that the condition of the car is still prime and in good condition.

    4. Large Baggage

    After the passenger capacity, the next advantage when buying an MPV car is the large luggage.

    Luggage in the form of bags, suitcases, souvenirs or luggage of any shape can easily fit into the spacious trunk and this certainly makes the MPV a multi-purpose vehicle.

    When driving, let alone a long enough distance, carrying a lot of luggage is certainly annoying when we have to force ourselves into the car.

    Instead of enjoying a comfortable trip, we are bothered with large luggage. Therefore, an MPV car with large luggage is the right solution to make the journey more comfortable.

    5. Comfortable when driven on various terrains

    Despite going through rough roads, MPV passengers still feel comfortable while driving. Because this type of car usually has a spacious cabin. Passengers can sit comfortably and stretch their legs. No wonder, MPV can be relied upon to travel long distances.

    In addition, MPV now also has several features that increase the comfort of the driver and passengers in various road conditions. For example, it has a plateau feature. This feature can help vehicles move more smoothly on different terrains, such as uneven roads, potholes and puddles or floods.

    Thus, passengers can feel more comfortable during the trip. In fact, some brands of MPV cars also have advanced features that allow them to drive on uphill, narrow, and winding roads.

    6. Complete Security Features

    In addition to comfort, driving safety is an important factor in choosing a vehicle. The latest MPV is equipped with various safety features, including Electronic Stability Program (ECS), Tire Pressure Monitoring System and Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) and dual SRS airbags. These features can minimize the risk of accidents and ensure the safety of the driver and passengers during the journey.

    Lack of MPV cars

    It can also be said that MPV type cars have some shortcomings, or rather the other side, which is less suitable for certain needs or users. The following are some of the disadvantages of MPV type cars:

    1. The capacity of the machine is relatively small

    The first disadvantage is that most of the machines use standard equipment and are relatively small. In the Indonesian low-end MPV category, the average only carries a 1.5-1.8L engine.

    But on the other hand, it cannot be called a deficit. Considering this type of car is designed for everyday use in the city where the contour of the road is smooth. Unlike SUVs that are functionally used on extreme roads.

    2. Not suitable for young people

    You can’t even call it a deficiency. Because the target market is family cars, MPV cars are not intended for young people. This type of car does not have a flashy grill, a stylish body, or other “young” elements.

    Well, that’s the comment about MPV type cars not being suitable for young people to use. Basically, this very popular vehicle is designed as a multipurpose minibus, suitable for transportation and family use.

    3. All features remain standard

    Another highlight of the MPV is its features. Potential consumers pay attention to this area.

    In terms of features, most MPVs only have standard features that are limited to ensure driving comfort and safety.

    However, many premium MPVs have advanced features but the price tag is much higher.

    4. Designed only to be driven on smooth roads

    Not as powerful as a jeep, the first MPV’s shortcoming was that it couldn’t drive on bad roads.

    Basically, most MPVs are designed to be driven only on flat roads such as toll roads, toll roads, or paved roads.

    So if you drive an MPV down a hill, on a rocky road, on a muddy road, in water, this car is not suitable.

    5. Less strong uphill

    Another weakness of MPV is that it is not strong going uphill. The reason is that, in addition to only being able to drive on flat roads, this car is also less reliable when going uphill.

    Different from SUV type cars which are very reliable to explore various types of roads such as ramps, rocky roads and worse road conditions.

    6. Low car height

    For a family car with seven seats, the range of MPV cars is relatively low. It’s different with an SUV type car that can only accommodate four people, this is quite high.

    This happens because MPVs use less than 16 inch wheels. If you want to make it higher, the wheel can only be raised 2 inches from the factory default. Therefore, it is not recommended to change 17-19 inch tires to the MPV.

    Tips before buying an MPV car

    Variations in the MPV car segment are of course very many and it is not uncommon for us to be a little confused with what suits the needs of the family, including the availability of pockets.

    Here are some considerations that can be your reference before you decide to buy for family needs and of course your supplies:

    1. Security Features

    Of course, safety is the most important thing you can offer your family, right? Especially when it comes to choosing a vehicle for your beloved family.

    Security is one of the most important factors and should be a priority for families.

    Because the MPV can accommodate a minimum of 5 passengers, the safety requirements must of course be optimal.

    One of the safety systems that you should pay attention to is the ABS EBD BA braking system which is touted as the best braking system. .

    In addition, the ABS braking function is also very useful when drivers use it on winding and slippery roads after rain.

    Another safety feature that your MPV of choice should have is a seat belt and make sure you have a three-point seat belt. In general, this seat belt was developed by Volvo car designer, Nils Bohlin.

    Because of the level of safety and comfort that is the main focus of this seat belt, it is not uncommon for European and Asian car manufacturers to use this type of seat belt.

    These seat belts are designed to prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown and reduce the risk of personal injury.

    Don’t forget the airbag function or what is commonly called airbag, is one of the safety components of your MPV vehicle of choice.

    This airbag is very helpful to you and often saves the life of the driver and passenger in the event of a collision or traffic accident.

    2. Engine and Fuel Performance

    Machine performance is one of the main considerations in choosing an MPV for your beloved family.

    Choose an MPV that has good engine performance and good gear shifting acceleration and of course is fuel efficient so it remains economical in the pocket.

    In general, the average new car has good fuel efficiency because the various supporting features are still good and make the car fuel efficient.

    Of course, Reader friends, you don’t want your pockets to be flat because the car wastes fuel due to poor engine performance, right?

    3. Seat comfort

    The seat is an important part of driving, especially when traveling long distances with the family or in traffic jams.

    When choosing an MPV for a family, the comfort of the seats should be considered.

    Choose a seat that provides comfort for you and other passengers. Make sure each seat is also equipped with a seat belt or safety belt to ensure the safety of both the driver and the passenger.

    Conclusion

    So much for a brief discussion about what an MPV car is: Features, Types, as well as its advantages and disadvantages. Not only knowing what an MPV car is, but also discussing the advantages, disadvantages, tips for buying it and knowing the types of cars on the market.

    Knowing what an MPV car is for automotive lovers is very beneficial to know the right type of four-wheeled vehicle to be a family car with a cheap and environmentally friendly price that is suitable to own as a family vehicle.

  • The Understanding of LCGC Cars and Any Advantages and Disadvantages

    Understanding of LCGC Cars – Currently there are more and more modes of transportation in the market and of course the automotive industry is competing to create good quality and certainly cheap cars in order to enter the middle class market. One type of car that is cheap but has good enough quality is the LCGC (Low Cost Green Car).

    LCGC cars are present as a solution from the government for people who want to have a car but at a cheap price to switch from motorcycles. In addition to its cheap price, the LCGC car, as its name suggests, is also an environmentally friendly car.

    However, for all you Reader friends who want to know more about LCGC cars and may be interested in owning one, you can listen to the information we will provide in this article to find out what advantages this LCGC car presents.

    Further information related to LCGC cars and any advantages we have presented and can be read below!

    What Is LCGC Car?

    LCGC cars or the abbreviation of Low Cost Green Car (Indonesian Environmental Friendly Cars, official name: Energy-Efficient and Affordable Four-Wheel Motorized Vehicle (KBH2) is a car variant that appeared after Indonesia issued a new car law that eliminated cheap cars to set aside cheap and fuel-efficient cars from PPnBM, so the selling price can be sold as low as possible, so basically this car is made domestically to reach the middle class market that considers some specific components in its assembly.

    The launch of this car version is expected to encourage more people to own cars, reduce fuel subsidies and compete with imported cars from Thailand, as well as increase employment in the country. This version is similar to the kei car category in Japan and the Eco Car program in Thailand which also promises tax relief for small and economical cars. Car

    LCGC is a car produced specifically by the government to reduce exhaust gas emissions. That is why this car is the choice of the community because it is said to be environmentally friendly and does not pollute the rural air too much.

    With low gas emissions, it is hoped that the environment can be spared from air pollution due to pollution and the community can live a healthy life. In addition to low gas emissions, this car is also produced with a very small cc, namely 1000cc and 1200cc.

    A car with a small or low cc can minimize fuel consumption, making it much more durable and cost-effective. Because the bigger the cc of the car, the more fuel is consumed.

    It should be known that the LCGC car is intended for the middle class because of its relatively small cc. For that, don’t expect to be able to drive this type of car at high speed.

    In addition, if Reader friends are interested in buying this LCGC car, there are several advantages that can be obtained in addition to the cheap price, this car also has a cheap annual tax so that it can save purchase costs, tax costs, and fuel costs because this LCGC car is also fuel efficient.

    Advantages of LCGC Cars

    LCGC cars are designed to reduce emissions. This type of car is the choice of the community because it is said to be environmentally friendly and does not pollute the air too much. In addition, this type of car has several advantages for the driver. Starting from durability, dimensions, and fuel efficiency.

    This car is really designed to be a real vehicle for gramed friends who want to own a car, especially for those who are just learning to drive. LCGC cars are indeed intended for the middle segment because the cc is quite small. For that, don’t expect to be able to drive this type of car at high speed.

    Some of the advantages that can be obtained by buying this car, among others:

    1. Suitable for those who are just learning to drive

    The advantage of this LCGC car is that it is friendly for beginner drivers. This car is very suitable to be chosen for beginners, both in terms of price because it is quite cheap and has no less diverse variations. In terms of the variation of this car, it is also no less diverse, it just needs to be adapted to the needs of friends of Reader.

    2. The size of the vehicle is more space-saving

    Another advantage of LCGC cars is the smaller vehicle dimensions. With the given dimensions, this type of car is nimble enough to be used on a daily basis, especially on city streets that are usually dense and congested.

    3. Save Fuel

    Low Cost Green Car or LCGC is an environmentally friendly car in accordance with the main purpose of creating this car. Therefore, LCGC cars are designed to consume only one liter of fuel for a minimum distance of 20 kilometers. Fulfilling one of the most important conditions for a vehicle product to enter the environmentally friendly segment (green car). Therefore, the use of fuel components should be as efficient as possible so as not to cause excessive pollution.

    4. Endurance

    LCGC cars are designed to be durable and tested for quality. As a result, LCGC vehicles have a longer service life, supported by easy maintenance and the availability of spare parts. If you want a cheap and environmentally friendly vehicle, this type of car can be the right choice. LCGC is usually not only sold at an affordable price but also comes with reliable features so that users can feel other benefits.

    5. Cheaper vehicle lease prices

    It should be known that friends pay car tax which is much cheaper than other types of cars. The reason is that LCGC cars have entered the PPnBM exemption list, effective from 2021 onwards.

    6. Affordable Maintenance

    In addition to being affordable, LCGC care is also cheap. The cost of processing LCGC itself is approximately Rp. 1.7 million. This fee applies if you service at an official workshop.

    7. Suitable for modification

    For those who like to modify cars, LCGC is very suitable. This car is relatively easy to modify. Both mild and extreme changes.

    This car has been successfully modified by many parties. For example Datsun Go Panca. There are also many workshops that offer specific modifications to the LCGC. So it is not difficult if you want to customize this car.

    8. The resale value is not too low

    The resale value of LCGC is not too low in the market. The average selling value of this car is between Rp 120 million to Rp 150 million. The price depends on the condition of the car and the type of LCGC car itself. The resale value is not too low, so you don’t have to worry if you want to sell this car.

    Lack of LCGC Cars

    All products must have disadvantages behind their advantages. This also applies to LCGC cars. Knowing the shortcomings of the LCGC is as important as knowing the advantages of the car.

    This is because it can be a separate consideration when buying this type of car.

    The disadvantages of the LCGC car itself are:

    1. Too light

    One of the characteristics of the LCGC is its small frame. This makes the weight of the car lighter. Its light weight makes this car a little wobbly, especially at high speeds.

    2. Baggage size is not too big

    Thanks to the small frame, the luggage compartment of the LCGC is also not too wide. Therefore, you can’t even load a lot of stuff into this type of car. In addition to the luggage that is not too wide, the interior of this car is also quite narrow.

    3. The speed is low

    As a car, LCGC is included in the low speed vehicle because it only has a capacity of around 1000-2000 cc. Therefore the energy produced by this car is quite low. So many comments on the advantages and disadvantages of LCGC cars

    So the first thing to know if you want to buy LCGC. Knowing these two facts will make it easier for you to decide whether to buy a car or not.

    Type and price list of LCGC cars

    Thanks to the economical use of fuel, LCGC cars are suitable for everyday use. In Indonesia itself, this type of car is quite a lot and the price is quite affordable.

    The average price of this type of car is less than 200 million rupiah. Some LCGC car registers and market prices that you need to know are:

    1. Honda Brio Satya

    One of the examples of LCGC cars that sell well in 2020 is the Honda Brio Satya. This car was released in 2018 with a more modern design and much wider dimensions. Honda Brio Satya is equipped with i-VTEC cylinder technology engine with a capacity of 1,200 cc. Brio Satya is the most fuel efficient car in its segment with a fuel consumption of 16.6 km/l in urban areas and 22.6 km/l on toll roads.

    For its own price, the Honda Brio Satya car varies according to the brand or model. Type Honda Brio SM/T priced at Rp 151,400,000, Honda Brio EM/T priced at Rp 160,400,000 and Honda Brio E CVT priced at Rp 175,400,000.

    2. Toyota Calya

    Another type of LCGC car is the Toyota Calya. Since this LCGC 7-seater was first released in 2016, it immediately entered the automotive world and sold well in the Indonesian market.

    New Toyota Calya car type 1.2 E STD M/T Price range Rp 146,190,000. While other types such as Toyota Calya 1.2 EM/T are priced at IDR 148,990,000, Toyota Calya 1.2 GM/T IDR 155,290,000, and Toyota Calya 1.2 GA/T IDR 167,490,000.

    3. Daihatsu Sigra

    If Toyota has the Calya, Daihatsu’s LCGC version is the Sigra. This car uses a design similar to Calya because it was built by the same company and platform.

    But Daihatsu Sigra has the advantage of many automatic options that make the price more flexible. Some types are also equipped with safety features such as dual SRS airbags, ABS, parking sensors and side beams. At the beginning of the price, Daihatsu Sigra is the highest at Rp 160 million and the lowest at Rp 140 million. If you want to buy a used car, Daihatsu Sigra is offered for 84-104 million rupiah.

    4. Toyota Agya

    Toyota Agya is the only 5-seater LCGC car that is relatively expensive compared to similar cars. The reason is that this LCGC car is decorated with a more sporty design with 998 and 1197 cc capacity engines.

    This car has different prices depending on the type. The cheapest Toyota Agya price is Rp. 144,900.00 and the most expensive is Rp. 170,390,000.

    5. Daihatsu Ayla

    In terms of price and comfort, Daihatsu Ayla is one of the most economical LCGCs in its class. On average, this type of car can drive 14-15 km/l on city streets and 18-20 km/l on toll roads. Daihatsu Ayla is available with manual and automatic transmission which also affects the price of this car. The price of a new Daihatsu Ayla car is Rp 100 million, used cars can be even cheaper up to half of the new price.

    The price difference for various types of cars depends on the design and features. However, environmentally friendly concept cars may be the best choice for fuel-efficient vehicles, but the quality is still prime.

    Tips for choosing a LCGC car

    There are several things to consider before buying an LCGC car. It is important to pay special attention to this so as not to regret it later. LCGC cars are affordable and relatively young. The average new model of this type of car has been covered since 2013. So, first pay attention to the car parts that suit your needs.

    Here are some tips that can be considered before buying an LCGC car:

    1. Optimal Body Construction

    The appearance of LCGC cars should be adapted to your taste. LCGC cars are intended for sports car lovers as well as city car lovers. There is also this type of car with a minimalist design. Everything you can adjust to your budget and daily needs.

    2. Cabin area

    From the outside, also pay attention to the cabin space. Make sure the size of the LCGC car you choose suits your needs. Starting from passenger capacity to luggage, enough to support your daily operations.

    3. Machine performance

    Also, make sure you choose an LCGC car with the right engine specifications. Observe and compare the information first about the displacement and engine cylinder energy of several types of cars. This is because some car brands may have a more or less similar appearance, but are clearly different in terms of the energy they produce. You can also choose the car that offers the most energy and the best handling for your daily activities.

    4. Features

    Some LCGC cars are now also equipped with various interesting features. These include automatic mirrors, four-way electric windows, a pair of airbags, ABS and EDB brakes, a touchscreen head unit with USB and iPhone connections. These interesting features are included in certain car brand units, which may not have other interesting features offered by other brands as well.

    5. Price

    Starting from the engine specifications to the advanced features offered, LCGC cars usually have quite affordable prices. Reader friends can directly bring home an LCGC car for only Rp 110-180 million.

    Conclusion

    This is a short discussion about what LCGC cars are and to find out what their advantages and disadvantages are.. Not only knowing what LCGC cars are but also discussing their advantages, disadvantages, tips for buying them and knowing the types of cars in the market.

    Knowing what an LCGC car is for automotive lovers is very beneficial to know the capacity of this cheap and environmentally friendly vehicle to be owned as a suitable personal vehicle to buy.

  • Meaning of Social Science: Types and Examples

    Understanding of Social Science – Learning is the right and duty of every human being, regardless of age, children, teenagers, and the elderly, all have the same opportunity. The state even guarantees every individual to be able to study or obtain an education as stated in the 1945 Constitution article 31 paragraph 1 where the state guarantees every citizen the right to education.

    With education, individuals can develop their country. There is a lot of knowledge that can be learned according to each individual’s interests. One of the sciences that can be learned is social science. The definition of social science is the science that studies the relationship between humans and their environment or the interaction of humans with other individuals, humans with their groups, or groups with other groups.

    Human interaction with others will be interwoven with communication so that people can get to know each other. In addition, humans can also help each other thanks to the interaction so that a harmonious relationship is formed.

    However, sometimes conflicts also arise due to the incompatibility of his relationship with others. If the conflict cannot be overcome, it will disrupt the harmony. Basically, humans are social creatures who cannot live individually, they need the presence of others.

    Meaning of Social Science

    Social science tries to understand the difference as a valuable lesson to be able to unite the inequality.

    In everyday life, many differences are sure to be found. But back to human nature, that they will need the presence of other people in their daily lives. Living alone is impossible. In social science, the differences between individuals have solutions that can overcome them.

    With a solution, then individuals can live side by side with others even though conflict is sometimes unavoidable. Social science, if understood more deeply, contains a study of social problems that often occur in everyday life. The purpose of social science is to help increase insight or broader knowledge about social life.

     

     

    Types of Social Sciences

    After we know the meaning of social science, then what are the types of social science? Social science is actually the parent of several sciences that are taught both in schools and universities. Here are the types of social science.

    1. Anthropology

    One type of social science is anthropology. As for what is meant by anthropology is the science that studies humans and their culture.

    In general, anthropology studies humans in five subs, namely the biological evolution of humans, the diversity of human physical characteristics, the development and spread of human culture, the development and spread of language, and the fundamentals of humans and their cultures that exist throughout the world.

    Anthropology as a science tries to explain the cultural processes of existing societies and which develop from time to time. Without this knowledge, society will not know the various cultures that exist and are spread around the world.

    Studying anthropology includes the preservation of culture because we can know what culture exists and needs to be developed in human life today.

    2. Sociology

    The definition of sociology is a science that studies various phenomena of community life or population. In the beginning, sociology developed in Europe because scientists realized that there must be science that can explain and study the social changes that occur in society.

    The first scientist to create sociology was a French scientist named August Comte. By sociologists, August Comte is called the Father of Sociology. Sociology is a type of social science because it does not study certain (exact) knowledge because what is studied is the symptoms of society and the social changes that occur in its life.

    In looking at the symptoms of society, sociology does not stand as a speculative science, but is objective in looking at the symptoms. In addition, the symptoms of society are obtained from the results of observation, so sociology is a logical science. The knowledge learned in it is also extensive.

    Based on the changes in social life that have occurred since the first humans existed until modern humans (homo sapiens) as they are today. As a scientific discipline, sociology does not look at problems normatively but must be neutral in looking at the problems that exist in society.

    3. Communication Science

    The interaction of individuals with each other is inseparable from communication. Humans need communication so that the desired message and meaning can be delivered well. Scientists have long studied how good communication can be communicated between individuals.

    The research carried out by these scientists gave birth to the science of communication. The definition of communication science is the science that studies individual communication processes, be it between individuals with individuals, individuals with groups, and groups with groups.

    Communication in everyday life is a fundamental social process. Social interaction in communication plays an important role. With the knowledge of communication, people understand how to convey good information so that it can be understood by the recipient of the information.

    In the process, communication continues to evolve. In the past, people used letters as a means of communication, but it required a long process.

    Now the media is more advanced by using technological sophistication so that it is faster and more efficient compared to letters such as using mobile phones, email, and so on. Human behavior in communicating is the main object studied in communication science.

    4. Economy

    In social life, humans cannot escape from what is called economy. Why is economics grouped into the social sciences? This is because in the economic world, human behavior is the main subject of study.

    Economics explains how people behave in using available economic resources to fulfill their needs or desires in their lives. In the economic world, there are three economic actors, namely households, business actors, and the government. the three economic actors in carrying out their activities are not separated from their decisions and carrying out their respective roles.

    The decisions taken by all three affect how they behave. In the economic wheel, all three interact with each other. Households are consumers who try to fulfill their needs in consuming goods or services.

    Businesses run by individuals or groups will produce goods or services to earn a profit. While the government’s role in the economy is as a public policy maker. Decisions taken by the government should pay attention to the well-being of households and businesses.

    5. Knowledge of Education

    In the world of education, the interaction between educators and students is important and should be studied. For those who work in the world of education, social science is important to have.

    An educator must understand the characteristics and behavior of his students so that he is able to apply appropriate learning methods in order to channel the knowledge he possesses. Good communication skills are required as an educator.

    In addition, with education, people can change their lives both for themselves and for others. Therefore, education actually boils down to social life. For example, people who pursue education at a higher level such as a university will later have the opportunity to become an agent of change for the problems that occur in society.

    It is hoped that they will be able to solve existing problems so that people will have a more independent and prosperous life. That is the importance of education so that it is able to change the lives around it for the better.

    6. Geography

    Geography is the science that studies the earth and its contents. In it, geography also studies a variety of natural phenomena that occur around it. At first glance geography seems to have nothing to do with social science, but make no mistake.

    Geography is related to social science. In geography, humans and their environment are the center of study. This science also learns about humans which is called human geography. In its discussion, human geography studies how individuals adapt to their environment, with fellow humans, and how their role in the world is.

    In addition, in general, geography studies the wealth of nature available. So that by knowing the wealth of nature that is owned, later humans can manage and utilize it for the prosperity and benefit of other people. Certainly fairly and evenly.

    7. History

    The development of events that have happened to humans since they first existed until now continues to be studied. The science that studies these events is called the science of history. Chronologically, the science of history tries to string together various events that happened in the past so that they become what they are today.

    The science of history also studies the chronology of how the process of human behavior occurs sequentially based on existing facts so that history is not a superstitious science. The truth in history is an important thing, because people can learn it and anticipate bad history so that it does not happen again in their lives now.

    History as a science does not only study what, when, where, and how events happened. The science of history is more than that, in it learning the facts, the pattern of events, the elements of the formation of events, and so on that happen to humans historically. Therefore, history and social science cannot be separated because they are interlinked with each other.

    8. Political Science

    Politics is a science that cannot be separated from social science. The main focus in the study of political science is learning how power works in the life of the community in the state. The power exercised can be between citizens of one country and another, citizens with their country, and countries with other countries.

    The main study is how the country can obtain, defend, and use its power in accordance with the norms that apply in the country. Indirectly, social science also plays a role in it.

    The power exercised in politics must not conflict with the social life of the community so as not to disturb peace and order in the community. Without social science, political science is difficult to accommodate the interests of the general public.

    9. Law

    In the world of law, the social life of the community cannot be ignored. For those studying law, the social process is one of the topics studied. Humans are social creatures and every behavior and action must be regulated and directed.

    The existence of laws, regulations, and policies taken by competent institutions is one way to control human social behavior. There are clear laws that can regulate human life and provide clarity on what humans can and cannot do.

    Imagine if there is no law in life, people can act as they please without thinking about the consequences of what they do. The absence of punishment makes bad behavior that humans may do uncontrollable.

    In addition, in the world of law policy making and rules should use a social approach to society. There needs to be a fair and equal application of rules for each individual to behave in accordance with existing norms and culture. In fact, law is actually born from various existing social conditions.

    10. Social Psychology

    Psychology and social are two close things that cannot be separated from each other. Psychology tries to explain the process of manifestation from the mental or human soul that gives birth to behavior. Humans are the main study material of psychology.

    As social creatures, humans have many behaviors and behaviors that differ from one to another. On this side, psychology examines the mental, mind, and behavior. How individuals relate to others is explained in psychology.

    In general, what is studied in psychology is very broad. Therefore, it is necessary to deepen one field that is studied comprehensively. One of them is social psychology. As a field, social psychology explains various phenomena that occur in humans as social beings.

    In it, this field also highlights a variety of social events that are negative or referred to as social pathology. Examples of social pathology in everyday life are drug abuse, bullying, hoax news, prostitution, and so on.

    The benefits that can be obtained by studying social psychology is that people understand and anticipate social problems that may occur, are able to organize alternative solutions and turn them into a situation that is beneficial for everyone.

    Examples of Social Science in Everyday Life

    After understanding the meaning of social science and its types, then what are the examples of social science that we can find in everyday life? First, in the basic law of 1945, article 33 explains about the economy. It is mentioned that the economic wheel in Indonesia is based on the principles of economic democracy.

    This means that the economy is structured with attention to the well-being of the people, not just to benefit a few parties. In addition, natural resources are only entitled to be managed by the government with the aim of no private exploitation that will later enrich only one group. The second example of social science is in the field of psychology.

    Social phenomena such as crime, prostitution, and bullying in society often appear because of the conditions that trigger them to do so. General problems that are commonly encountered are caused by economic factors. Poverty triggers society to commit social pathology.

    Demands to meet economic needs with a quick time and a large amount make some people unable to think long term. The shortcut taken for some cases is to commit crimes such as stealing, being thugs, and opening prostitution services. This phenomenon is actually still found in the field, but this problem seems to have no end and continues to grow day by day.

    Also read the related article “Understanding Social Science”  :

    • Understanding Social Change
    • Meaning of Social Integration
    • Examples of Social Problems in Indonesia
    • Understanding Social Interaction
    • Meaning of Social Board
    • Understanding Social Structure
    • List of Tribes in Indonesia
    • Understanding Social Differentiation

    Conclusion

    That is the meaning of social science, types, and examples in everyday life. Studying various social sciences is something of important value considering that we also need it to understand human behavior socially.

    Moreover, the development of life is more and more advanced. The rapid flow of information that continues to occur makes us have to understand various phenomena with a social science perspective. Knowing the meaning of social science alone is not enough, by understanding and deepening it will make us able to adapt to various kinds of social changes that occur in everyday life.

  • Definition of Mitosis, Stages of Mitotic Division, and Characteristics

    Definition of Mitosis, Stages of Mitotic Division, and Characteristics

    Definition of Mitosis – Does anyone feel that her face looks like her mother? Or look like your father? Or even not similar to both but more like grandfather or grandmother? How can there be similarities? Yes, there are still family blood ties. Yes, but what is the story of the similarity process?

    Every child or individual must have characteristics or traits that are similar, even the same as their parents. This is because of the inheritance of characteristics or traits from parents to their children.

    The inheritance of traits from parents to their descendants is called heredity.

    Have you ever imagined how many cells there are in our body? Millions? or even trillions? How is it possible that we have trillions of cells when we used to come from only two cells, namely the mother’s ovum cell and the father’s sperm cell?

    Turns out, cells have the ability to clone! Yes, the cells in our body are capable of doubling themselves so that we can develop, grow, even heal wounds on ourselves!

    So if you have a broken heart, just calm down, your body will heal the wound by itself

    It is DNA that is the gateway to heredity. The daughter cells resulting from mitosis and meiosis will have DNA in which there is genetic material from the parent cell, it may be exactly the same or a combination of both characteristics of the parent cell.

    If a dividing cell is stained and examined under a microscope, dark colored chromosomes will be seen in the nucleus. Each consists of a central thread, the chromonema, which contains small swelling chromomeres that are dark in color like beads.

    Some argue that the chromomeres contain genes, because early experiments clearly proved that the unit of heredity is located in the chromosomes in a linear arrangement. But the relationship between chromomeres and genes is irregular, some chromomeres have several genes and some genes are found between chromomeres.

    Each chromosome, at a certain place along its body, has a clear round circular zone called a kinetochore that regulates the movement of chromosomes during cell division. Because before cell division occurs, the chromosomes thicken and become shorter, so the kinetochores become clearer and look like constrictions.

    The process of inheritance of traits cannot be separated from the role of two types of cell division events, namely mitosis and meiosis.

    A. Definition of Mitosis

    Mitotic Division is a cell division event that produces two daughter cells with the same number of chromosomes as the parent cell. The term mitosis in a narrow sense concerns the division of the nucleus into 2 daughter nuclei and the term cytokinesis is used for the division of the cytoplasm that produces daughter cells that each contain a daughter nucleus.

    You know, all cell activity is organized from the nucleus, more specifically by DNA. Therefore, the event of cell division also occurs in the nucleus. The process of cell division does not mean that it duplicates all parts of itself. However, what actually happens is that only DNA is duplicated.

    Nuclear fission and cytoplasmic fission although almost always well integrated, are 2 separate and distinct processes. Mitotic division only occurs in eukaryotic cells, while prokaryotic cells cannot do it.

    Why? The reason is that prokaryotic cells do not have a nucleus (cell core), cell core membrane, and mitochondria. Whereas in mitosis the organelles are involved.
    In other words, the maker’s kitchen is not complete.

    Where does mitosis occur? In animals and humans, the process of mitosis occurs in all body cells (somatic), except for sex cells (gametes). In animals, an aster is formed and a groove is formed at the equator on the cell membrane at the time of telophase until the two daughter cells become separated.

    While in plants, mitosis occurs in the meristem network, such as the tip of the root and the tip of the stem bud. Mitotic division functions for the growth of body cells, replacing damaged body cells (regeneration), and maintaining the number of chromosomes. Mitotic division consists of nuclear division and cytoplasmic division.

    Mitotic division begins with the division of the nucleus. Therefore, when we see a group of cells that are dividing, we may find one or several cells that have two nuclei. This means that the cell has finished dividing the nucleus but not yet dividing the cytoplasm.

    In studying this cell division, we must know that each cell in the body has a different function. In the Cell Membrane Structure and Function Biochemistry Textbook by Andrew Johan you will better understand the function of each cell in the body.

     

    B. Mitotic process

    This process of mitosis produces two identical daughter cells, which have almost the same distribution of organelles and cell components. Mitosis and cytokinesis is the mitosis phase (M phase) in the cell cycle, where the initial cell is divided into two daughter cells that have the same genetics as the initial cell.

    The main result of mitosis is the division of the genome of the initial cell into two daughter cells. The genome is made up of a number of chromosomes, which are closely coiled DNA complexes that contain vital genetic information for the proper functioning of the cell.

    Because each daughter cell must be genetically identical to the original cell, the original cell must duplicate each chromosome before mitosis. So he formed himself into 2 first.

    The process of DNA duplication occurs in the middle of interphase, which is the phase before the mitosis phase of the cell cycle. After duplication, each chromosome has an identical copy called a sister chromatid, which is attached to a region of the chromosome called the centromere. Sister chromatids themselves are not considered chromosomes.

    C. The difference between Mitosis and Meiosis

    Basically, cell division that occurs in every living being has two types, namely mitosis and meiosis. If viewed in general, the difference between mitosis and meiosis can be seen in the daughter cells produced. Mitotic cell division will form daughter cells that can divide again. Meanwhile, meiosis will form daughter cells that cannot divide again, even until fertilization. Some of the differences between mitosis and meiosis are as follows:

    1. Mitotic offspring cells will be the same as the parent cells, while meiosis offspring cells will produce offspring that are different from the parent.

    2. Mitosis can occur in every existing organism, but it is different with meiosis which can only occur in animals, fungi, humans, and animals.

    3. The number of chromosomes of mitosis offspring is the same as its parent, while the number of chromosomes of meiosis offspring and its parent is half different.

    In order to better understand the process of DNA duplication, DNA cloning, and various basic analyzes of DNA technology in biotechnology that are currently popular, Reader can read the book Fundamentals of Genetic Science by Zairin Thomy.

     

    D. Examples of Mitosis

    A type of cell division capable of producing 2 genetically identical daughter cells. That is, the two offspring cells formed have the same genetic makeup as the parent.

    Almost all living things undergo the same process of mitosis, except for prokaryotes (living things that do not have a true nucleus) such as bacteria, viruses and blue algae.

    Mitotic division occurs during embryo development and growth, in the replacement of worn-out cells such as blood cells, skin, intestinal lining and so on, and in wound healing.

    E. Purpose of Mitotic Division

    Mitotic division has three purposes, namely growth, repair, and reproduction. Explanation of the purpose of mitosis as follows.

    1. Growth

    All living things will definitely experience growth caused by the large number of cells that come together. Therefore, when the cells continue to increase, it will affect the living being itself.

    2. Improvements

    Not only is it meant to grow, but mitosis is meant for repair. In this purpose, repair will occur when the network in the living being is experiencing damage to the network.

    3. Reproduction

    Every living thing will definitely multiply or it can be said that it will reproduce. The reproduction process that occurs in living things definitely requires sex cells that meet each other. From that cell meeting, cell division will occur.

    F. Characteristics of Mitotic Division

    2. The number of daughter cells produced from mitosis is two

    3. The number of chromosomes in a child is the same as the number of chromosomes in the parents, namely 2n (diploid)

    4. The properties of daughter cells are the same as parent cells

    5. Occurs in body cells (somatic cells), for example in embryonic tissue, including root tip, stem tip, cambium circle.

    6. The purpose of mitosis is to multiply cells such as growth or to repair damaged cells.

    7. Go through the stages of division, interphase, prophase, metaphase, anaphase, and telophase, but in general these stages will return to form the cell cycle.

    G. Phases/Stages of Mitotic Division

    At this stage of mitosis, it consists of four stages, namely prophase, metaphase, anaphase, and telophase. Before entering the 4 stages of mitosis, the cell will pass through the interphase stage first. The full explanation is below.

    Interphase

    However, every time the fourth phase of this phase begins, there is a preliminary term called the preliminary phase or interphase. This interphase is also often referred to as preparation for cleavage.

    In the interphase, there is a process of preparation and accumulation of energy by the cell to do division. Well, what you need to know is that this process takes a very long time compared to other phases, lol.

    At this stage, the cell core (nucleus) and the cell core child (nucleus) will be clearly visible. However, the chromosomes in the cell are not even visible, why is that? This is because the chromosomes are still in the form of chromatin. Chromatin is a fine thread composed of several molecules, such as RNA, DNA, and Protein.

    Meanwhile, on the outside of the cell nucleus there are centrosomes. Centrosomes are cell organelles that have the function of maintaining the number of chromosomes, the number of chromosomes between the parent cell and daughter cells so that the number remains the same when cell division occurs.

    So, if in animal cells, each centrosome will contain a pair of centrioles shaped like a small cylindrical body

    The interphase stage is grouped into three, namely G1 phase (first gap), S phase (synthesis), and G2 phase (second gap).

    a. G1 phase

    The G1 phase is also called the phase of cell development and growth. This phase is marked by the development of cytoplasm (cell fluid), cell organelles, as well as the synthesis of materials that will be used in the next interphase level, which is the S phase.

    At this stage, the cells grow larger. Some cell growth, including
    Ada

    1. enlargement of nucleus size;
    2. increased cytoplasmic volume;
    3. DNA formation;
    4. formation of enzymes for DNA replication;
    5. the formation of proteins through the process of protein synthesis (transcription and translation) to drive nuclear division;
    6. spindle thread formation.

    Subphase G-1 is the longest process in interphase, which is around 12 – 24 hours.

    b. Phase S

    In the S phase, there is duplication or replication of DNA as genetic material that will be passed down to daughter cells, so that two copies of DNA will be produced later. At the synthesis level, there is DNA replication along with histone proteins whose strands are called chromatin threads.

    The replication process of this chromatin thread forms twins called chromatids. These two twin chromatids are attached to one centromere. The synthesis process at this level takes about 6 to 8 hours

    c. G2 phase

    The third phase, namely the G2 phase, DNA replication is complete. There is an increase in protein synthesis as the final stage of cell preparation to divide.

    In the secondary growth stage, cell organelles and also RNA are formed. This stage takes about 3 to 4 hours and is the last process before the cells are really ready to divide.

    Chromatin in the phases of the cell cycle:

    1. double stranded DNA
    2. Chromatin (single-stranded DNA with histone proteins)
    3. Chromatin at interphase (blue) and centromere (red)
    4. Compact chromatin during prophase
    5. Chromosomes in metaphase

    At the end of interphase, a cell has a nucleus with two nucleoli (nuclei). As explained earlier, inside the nucleus there are chromatids, which are chromatin threads that have been duplicated.

    In the book Encyclopedia of Biology Volume 5: DNA, RNA & Chromoson Genetics by James Bodick Dkk, Reader will learn and deepen everything about the DNA that exists and organizes the human body.

    Meanwhile, outside the nucleus, centrosomes are also duplicated and will later help the process of cell division in the mitosis phase. Further, after all preparations are completed, the cell will enter the mitosis phase which consists of four stages.

    1. Prophase Stage

    Come on, let’s go into the initial stage of cell division, which is the prophase stage. At the beginning of prophase, the centrosomes undergo replication, resulting in two centrosomes. Then, each centrosome will move towards the opposite poles of the cell nucleus.

    At almost the same time, microtubules begin to appear between the two centrosomes. These microtubules are long protein fibers that extend from the centriole in all directions.

    Over time, the microtubules will form similar coils of thread that we can call spindle threads. At this stage as well, the chromatin threads begin to thicken and form chromosomes. Well, this chromosome has two identical chromatids attached to the centromere (head of the chromosome).

    Well, each centromere has two kinetochores which are protein formations and eventually become the attachment point for the spindle threads. At the end of the prophase stage, the nucleus and nuclear membrane of the cell begin to disappear. In addition, the centrosomes have arrived at their respective poles.

    The spindle threads will stretch from one pole to the other. This spindle thread has the role of pulling chromosomes to the middle of the cell nucleus at the next stage.

    The conclusion in this phase is what happened

    1. Chromosomes have doubled alias become 2, then compact
    2. The nuclear membrane begins to break down into small parts (fragments)

    2. Metaphase stage

    At this stage, the nucleus and nuclear membrane of the cell become invisible. Each kinetochore at the centromere is connected to a centrosome by spindle threads. Well, later the chromatid pair moves to the center of the cell nucleus (equatorial plane) and the metaphase plate is formed.

    The position of chromosomes located in the middle of the cell nucleus means that the number of chromosomes can be counted accurately and the shape of chromosomes can also be clearly observed. In this phase, Chromosomes have doubled, then compacted. The nuclear membrane begins to break down into small parts (fragments)

    3. Anaphase stage

    At anaphase, chromatid separation marks this phase. Starting from the centromere which then forms a new chromosome. Each chromosome is pulled by spindle threads moving towards poles in different directions. The number of chromosomes that go to one pole will be exactly the same as the number of chromosomes that go to the other pole.

    So, at the end of anaphase, the chromosomes have almost reached their respective poles. In addition, cytokinesis also begins to occur. What is cytokinesis? Cytokinesis is the phase of division or separation of cytoplasm, organelles, and cellular membranes. This division starts from the edge of the cell (cell membrane) moving towards the center of the cell, so that it will produce two cells called daughter cells.

    So in this phase it is concluded that:

    1. Chromosomes move towards opposite poles.
    2. At the end of anaphase both poles of the cell have the same number of chromosomes

    4. Telophase stage

    Well, the next stage is telophase. At this stage we have entered the final stage of mitosis. At this stage, the chromosomes have arrived at their respective poles.

    The spindle threads begin to disappear and the cell’s nuclear membrane also begins to exist between the two separate sets of chromosomes.

    In this phase:
    Chromosomes gradually thin and change shape into chromatin threads again.

    1. The nuclear membrane begins to rejoin
    2. Two daughter cells are formed which are diploid

    The process of mitosis produces 2 daughter cells from 1 original cell. Because all cells in the body originate from the mitosis of a fertilized egg cell, each cell has the same type and number of chromosomes, and the same number and type of genes.

    The speed and frequency of cell division varies greatly in different tissues and in different animal species.

    At the stage of embryonic development the interval between cell divisions may only be around 30 minutes. In certain adult tissues, especially nerve cells, cell division is very rare.

    In other adult tissues such as the spinal cord which is where red blood cells are produced, cell division must occur frequently to provide the 10,000,000 red blood cells produced every second of the day and night by humans.

     

  • Understanding Mythology: Origins, Types and Benefits of Studying It

    Understanding Mythology: Origins, Types and Benefits of Studying It

    Meaning of Mythology – Reader may have read books or watched movies or series themed on the stories of gods from abroad. Films such as Thor, Percy Jackson and The Olympians, to God of Egypt , are a number of fictional films themed on Gods from various countries

    In these stories, the gods are described as strong figures with super powers. The power they have can be used for good, such as saving the world and helping others, or for evil things such as killing other gods and dominating the world.

    Meaning of Mythology

    The stories about the gods are indeed fictitious, made for the benefit of the entertainment industry. Even so, many of these stories take the background, starting from the names of the characters, their nature, and their strength, from various mythologies.

    The meaning of mythology, if referring to the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI), can be interpreted as ” the science of literary forms that contain conceptions and sacred fables about the lives of gods and ethereal beings in a culture. 

    In addition, another definition that is similar to the previous definition, and can be found in KBBI regarding the meaning of mythology is ” science about the existence of gods and heroes in the past that has an interpretation and meaning about the events of human origin. 

    So, Reader can conclude, that the understanding of mythology is not far from the science that studies stories about figures in the past, be it gods, spirits, or heroes, along with the history they have.

    The Origin of the Word Mythology

    If we have already discussed the meaning of mythology based on terminology or the definition of terms, it feels incomplete if we do not look for the meaning of mythology based on etymology or based on the origin of the word.

    Like a number of other absorption words, the term mythology comes from the Latin language, namely ” mythologia “. The word mythologia itself is a combination of 2 words, namely ” mythos ” and ” logia “.

    The word ” mythos ” or ” myth ” has the meaning of “a story spread from mouth to mouth, from an unknown source”. While the word ” logia ” or ” logy ” can be translated into a number of words such as “theory”, “science”, “understanding”, to “doctrine”.

    Based on a number of historical records, the word mythology was first used by France in the early 15th century, namely ” mythologie “. It was only then that the word was replaced using the commonly used suffix in the English language, namely ” logy “, so that it became the word mythology that we know now, namely ” mythology “.

    The difference between Mythology and Myth

    The word mythology is often equated with the word myth. This is due to the similarity between the two words. In the previous explanation, Reader has also seen that the word mythology actually comes from the word myth.

    If you open the KBBI, the explanation of the meaning of the word myth also has the same definition as the word mythology, namely ” stories about gods and heroes in the past that have interpretations and meanings about the events of human origin. 

    The word myth also has another definition in KBBI that is again similar to the word mythology, namely “the story of a nation about the gods and heroes of the past, containing an interpretation of the origins of the universe, humans, and the nation, containing a deep meaning expressed in a magical way. 

    Although it has a number of similarities in its definition, the word myth is different from the word mythology. The word myth generally refers to a group of stories or fables in the past. While mythology is the science that studies the stories.

    Myths are usually fiction that cannot be proven true, so they tend to be considered a form of entertainment. Mythology as a science, learns the history of the stories, and is generally asked to provide valid evidence related to the truth of these stories.

    So, it can be said that a number of written works and films that have been mentioned in the beginning of the article, are part of the myths whose existence is also studied and researched by mythology.

    Types of Mythology

    There are various mythologies spread in various parts of the world. As already discussed, not all mythology is real, and is only considered a fictional story. However, there are also a number of myths whose truth can be proven by researchers.

    Broadly speaking, researchers divide the types of mythology into 3. These three types of mythology are pure myth , heroic saga , and folk tale . The following is a brief explanation of the 3 types of mythology.

    • Pure myth : Pure myth is science and religion in the primitive era, which tells about the understanding and understanding of society in ancient civilizations in a number of regions, about the universe, natural disasters, and even God.
    • Heroic saga : True to its name, heroic saga tells the story of the life of a person who does heroic deeds. These figures are known to the local community as heroes and saviors from the misfortunes they had experienced in the past.
    • Folk tale : Folk tale has a similar definition to myth, which is a local folk or ethnic story that is passed on from mouth to mouth. The story generally does not come from a clear source, so its truth cannot be proven.

    Mythology in Various Parts of the World

    Every country in different parts of the world has its own mythology. If we discuss all these mythologies in one article, it will take a lot of time. This is because mythology has a deep history behind its existence.

    Even so, there are some mythologies that have made their name known. Reader may often find a number of names or backgrounds from a story that takes inspiration from a mythology. Here are some mythologies that are widely known by people in various countries.

    1. Greek mythology

    Greek mythology is part of a religion in Greece in the past. This mythology contains stories of gods, monsters, mysterious creatures and animals, heroes, as well as a number of rituals that happened in ancient Greece.

    In his story, there are many figures involved in Greek mythology. Each character has their own background, character, and motive. The many figures in Greek mythology make the stories have branches, each with a different premise and end result.

    However, there are a number of figures who have a significant influence from stories in Greek mythology. Here are some of the characters, along with a little explanation about their characters.

    • Zeus : Zeus is the god of thunder and the sky, who is the strongest god figure and the leader of the Gods in Greek mythology. Zeus is known for his wisdom and power in leadership. However, Zeus also had an affair even though he was married.
    • Hera : Hera is the wife of the god Zeus, as well as the queen and leader of all the goddesses. Hera is known as a beautiful and gentle figure. However, Hera is known to be jealous of Zeus because the god has many mistresses.
    • Prometheus : Prometheus is one of the strongest monsters in Greek mythology, and is Zeus’s most trusted aide. Once upon a time Prometheus had a conflict with Zeus due to his behavior in dealing with ordinary humans, so Prometheus stole fire from Mount Olympus, and gave it to mankind to heal them.
    • Achilles : Achilles is the most prominent warrior figure in Greek mythology. Achilles gained the power of immortality after bathing in the River Styx. Even so, Achilles has a weakness in the heel, which is precisely the reason the immortal warrior died.
    • Medusa : Medusa is a creature in Greek mythology who is depicted as a beautiful woman with snake hair. But, Medusa is a figure that can turn men into stone if they are fascinated by her beauty.

    2. Nordic Mythology

    Originating from the Scandinavian region, Nordic mythology is also religious stories like Greek mythology. The stories found in Nordic mythology come from the Nordic people, or commonly referred to as “Vikings”.

    Nordic mythology also tells stories about gods, goddesses, and other creatures that inhabit 9 different worlds. At the end of the story of Nordic mythology, the world they live in is destroyed due to an event called “Ragnarok”.

    The figures found in Nordic mythology are also not inferior to Greek mythology. Almost all of them also have a role in their own destiny. Here are a number of figures who hold importance in Nordic mythology.

    • Odin : Odin in Nordic mythology is the most respected god figure, and serves as the leader of the gods. Odin is a strong character who likes to go on adventures and find interesting things. Odin is also known for his wisdom, but is also known to be a cunning figure and often belittles other figures.
    • Thor : Thor is the god of thunder, who is also the son of Odin. As his name suggests, Thor has the ability to control lightning, accompanied by his flagship hammer, Mjöllnir. Thor is known as a brave and fearless figure in any situation.
    • Loki : Loki is also the son of Odin, but comes from a different mother than Thor. This makes his status as the half-sister of the thunder god. Loki is a cunning god and often uses various means to get what he wants, just like his father.
    • Fenrir : Fenrir is a creature that has the form of a giant wolf. Fenrir is also known to be the son of Loki who was chained underground.
    • Jormungand : Jormungand is the brother of Fenrir, in the form of a giant snake. Jormungand himself according to the story of Nordic mythology, is the main enemy of Thor. The two have a number of battles, and end with Thor and Jormungand finishing each other off at Ragnarok.

    3. Roman mythology

    According to a number of experts, Roman mythology is taken from stories in Greek mythology. There are quite a lot of similarities that can be found by researchers, between Roman mythology and Greek mythology, especially in the background of the story, as well as characterization.

    Even so, there is a reason why Roman mythology seems to “import” from Greek mythology. One of them is the orientation of the Romans towards the family, so the majority of them think that the gods exist only to help the daily life of the Romans.

    Despite that, there are a number of gods in Roman mythology who also have a big role in the lives of the Romans. Here is a little explanation from the gods.

    • Jupiter : Jupiter is the strongest figure in Roman mythology. Jupiter has the ability to control lightning and the sky. Reader can see that the figure of Jupiter is a copy of the god Zeus in Greek mythology
    • Juno : Like Hera, the goddess in Greek mythology, Juno is the leader of the goddesses in Greek mythology. She has the title as the goddess of marriage and childbirth for the Romans at that time.
    • Mars : Mars is the god of war in Roman mythology, who is also a copy of Ares, the god of war in Greek mythology. It is said that the god Mars was more worshiped than Jupiter, because of the nature of the Romans who loved war at the time.
    • Saturn : Saturn is the deity that represents agriculture, freedom, and prosperity. Saturn is also the father of Jupiter. Saturn is a copy of the monster in Greek mythology, Cronus.
    • Janus : In Roman mythology, Janus is described as a figure that represents the beginning and end of everything. Janus is one of the few gods of Roman mythology that does not have a copy from Greek mythology.

    Benefits of Studying Mythology

    Every branch of knowledge exists for a reason. Each branch of science has a number of benefits that can be obtained by researchers if they study the field seriously. And of course there is also something that can be obtained in the field of mythology.

    Reader should have realized that there are many subjects in mythology whose truth is quite doubtful. However, that doesn’t mean Reader can’t get something from there. On the contrary, there are actually many things that can be found from the untruth.

    In western countries, many have applied curricula to study mythology, such as Nordic mythology, Roman mythology, and the most common, Greek mythology. There are several reasons why they teach their students about mythology. Here is the explanation.

    • Mythology as a historical source of the world’s oldest civilization . Long before the existence of writing or language, mythology was a source that could be used to find out about the life of past civilizations. Things like artifacts and paintings in caves, are some of the findings that can explain a little of the civilization of the past.
    • Mythology as the origin of religious beliefs . Some religions depict history from life in this world. Some evidence of related topics can be found in a number of mythologies in a number of locations and become a reference for learning the history of the existence of a religion.
    • Mythology as a source and reference of literature. As already shown, many sources of literature or other types of writing come from ancient mythology. The existence of mythology enriches the writer’s imagination and inspires them when writing.
    • Mythology as the origin of science and philosophy . Questions such as “how can fire be formed”, or “why is there day and night”, arise from human curiosity, and are further strengthened by the existence of myths of the past.

    In Indonesia itself, we have directly learned folk tales when we were still sitting at school. Reader must have had Indonesian lessons about folklore in various regions. This is indirectly our way of getting the benefits that have been mentioned.

    That is the explanation of the meaning of mythology, from us,

  • Definition of Observation Method and Examples

    Definition of Observation Method and Examples

    Definition of Observation Method and Examples – Every researcher certainly devotes his attention to something and observes the facts found in it. This is of course driven by a high sense of curiosity regarding the understanding of observed facts in more depth. In reality, a researcher must raise various questions. Observation of the facts, identification of the problem, and efforts to answer the formulation of the problem are based on theory. This is the essence of a research.

    Research can be referred to as a systematic effort to organize and investigate problems and answer questions that appear and are related to facts and phenomena. Therefore, research is very important because it is in the form of systematic, controlled, empirical and critical research about natural phenomena guided by theories and hypotheses about the relationship that is considered to exist between the phenomena.

    Based on the technique, data processing in a research is divided into two, namely quantitative research and qualitative research. One of the data processing techniques that is often used in research is the observation technique. This observation has an important role in the meaning of research as one of the scientific research methods that can be done in various ways. However, the need for reproducibility requires that observations by different observers can be compared.

    In a research, the observation method will be described as a method used in observing and describing the subject’s behavior. As the name suggests, this observation is a way of gathering relevant information and data by observing, so in this case observation is called a participatory study because the researcher must establish a relationship with the respondents and for this must immerse himself in the same arrangement with them.

    Only then can researchers use the observation method to record the required data. The observation method is used if the researcher wants to avoid mistakes that can be the result of bias during the evaluation and interpretation process. The use of this observation technique is usually used as a support in a research to observe the phenomenon that occurs in the research location.

    There are various techniques used in observation by a researcher according to the needs of the data they want to obtain. About what are the techniques that are often used for observation purposes in a research?

    In this article, we will discuss observation techniques as one example of data processing techniques. With the hope that it can be an additional insight and recommendation for you prospective data practitioners, researchers, and data enthusiasts . Don’t miss the following article, make sure to read carefully, stay tuned and keep scrolling on this article guys!

     

    Meaning of Observation

    Observational methods often complement data obtained from in-depth interviews and surveys. Observation is usually understood as an effort to obtain data in a “natural” way. The simplest definition of the observation method is to see and listen to events or actions performed by the people being observed, then record the results of their observations with notes or other aids.

    Observation also means observing, witnessing, paying attention as a method of collecting research data. This article will discuss the observation method in social research. We have defined simply what observation is in the first paragraph. Next, we will comment in more depth about how to conduct observations and the problems that researchers usually face.

    Not infrequently, the observation method is misunderstood. Observation is observing by looking and listening. However, observation as a research method has certain characteristics and techniques. Perhaps some readers have heard the term participant observation. We will comment on the meaning of observation according to experts and the types of observation before discussing problems in the observation method.

    Quoted from the book Evaluation of Learning: Basic Concepts, Principles, Techniques, and Procedures (2020) by Muhammad Ilyas Ismail, observation is one of the data collection techniques that is more specific than other techniques. Some of the meanings of observation according to experts are as follows:

    1. Gibson RL and Mitchell MH

    Observation is a technique used as a degree selection to determine a decision and conclusion about the person being observed.

    2. Larry Christensen

    Observation is a way to get important information about people, because what is said does not necessarily correspond to what is done.

    3. Creswell

    Observation is the process of obtaining data from the first hand, by observing people and the location of the research.

    4. Patton

    Observation is a method that is accurate and specific to collect data and find information about all activities that are the object of research.

    5. Sutrisno Hadi

    Observation is a very complex process, consisting of various processes, both biological and psychological, which prioritize memory and observation processes.

    6. Eko Putro Widyoko

    Observation is the systematic observation and recording of the elements that appear in a symptom on the object of research.

    7. Sugiyono

    Quoted from the book Quantitative Approach Educational Research Methods (2014), observation is a complex process, a process made up of various biological and psychological processes.

    8. Riyanto

    In his book Education Research Methodology (2010), it is explained that observation is a data collection method that uses direct or indirect observation.

     

    Techniques in Observation

    1. Controlled Observation

    Controlled observation is done in a closed room. Researchers who have the authority to determine the place and time where and when observations will be made. He also decides who his participants are and under what conditions he will use the standard process.

    Participants were randomly selected for the research variable group. The researcher observes and records detailed and descriptive behavioral data and divides it into different categories. Sometimes researchers code actions according to an agreed scale by using a behavior list.

    Coding can include letters or numbers or spans to measure the intensity of behavior and describe its characteristics. The collected data is often transformed into statistics. In the controlled observation method, participants are informed by the researcher about the purpose of the research. This makes them aware that they are being observed. The researcher avoids direct contact during the observation method and generally uses a two-way mirror to observe and record details.

    2. Participatory Observation

    The participatory observation method is often considered a variant of the naturalistic observation method because it has similarities. The difference is that the researcher is no longer a remote observer because he has joined the participants and become part of his group.

    A researcher does this to gain deeper and deeper insight into their lives. The researcher interacts with other members of the group freely, participates in their activities, learns their behavior and acquires a different way of life. Participant observation can be open or hidden.

    • Overt (open), when the researcher asks permission from a group to mingle. He does it by revealing his true purpose and original identity to the group he wants to associate with.
    • Covert , if the researcher does not show the true identity or meaning to the group he wants to follow. He kept the two a secret and assumed a false role and identity to enter and blend into the group. He usually acts as if he is a genuine member of the group

    3. Naturalistic Observation

    Social scientists and psychologists generally use naturalistic observation methods. The process involves observing and learning the spontaneous behavior of the participants in an open or natural environment. The researcher’s role is to find and record anything that can be seen and observed in its original habitat.

    This technique involves observing and learning the spontaneous behavior of participants in their natural environment. Researchers simply record what they see in whatever way they can. In unstructured observation, the researcher records all relevant behaviors without a system. There may be too much to record and the recorded behavior is not necessarily the most important, so this approach is usually used as a pilot study to see what type of behavior will be recorded. Compared to controlled observation, this is like the difference between studying wild animals in a zoo and studying them in their natural habitat.

    4. Structured Observation

    Structured observation consists of a careful definition of categories in which information will be recorded, standardization of observation conditions, and is mostly used in studies designed to provide systematic descriptions or to test causal hypotheses.

    The use of structured observation techniques assumes that the investigator knows what aspects of the situation under study are relevant to the purpose of his research and is therefore in a position to develop a specific plan for making and recording observations before he actually begins data collection.

    Structured observations can be used in natural field settings or laboratory settings. Structured observation, so far used mainly in research that begins with a relatively specific formulation, usually allows much less freedom of choice with regard to the content of the observation than is allowed in unstructured observation.

    Because the situation and the problem are already explicit, the observer is in a position to determine in advance the categories that will be analyzed in the situation. The categories are clearly defined to provide reliable data about the questions to be asked.

    Example of Observation Method

    Basically, there are two types of observation methods in research; participatory and non-participatory. The main motivation behind this distinction is the term called reactivity level. Reactivity greatly determines the quality of research data. We can understand reactivity as how reactive the behavior of the people being studied or being observed. The more reactive, the lower the quality of the data produced from observation. Reactivity can also be seen as a source of error.

    For example, we will observe the green community in Yogyakarta. In a natural context (without research), the facial expressions of some community members look gloomy when carrying out planting activities in the garden. On another day, when a researcher from abroad came to observe, the facial expressions of the members looked very enthusiastic. Facial expression that looks enthusiastic is a form of reactivity because it is done with full awareness that he is under observation. In other words, not “natural”.

    The quality of observation data that is not “natural” can be said to be weak or even an error. The degree to which the data obtained will be reactive should be thought about first by the researcher before going into the field. After assessing the potential for reactivity, the researcher decides whether to choose a participatory or non-participatory observation method.

    1. Participatory Observation Method

    Participatory observation method can be described as an observation method where the researcher positions himself as a participant like other people who are being observed. In positioning oneself as a participant, the researcher still has to keep a distance so that the element of objectivity remains awake.

    2. Non-Participatory Observation Method

    The non-participatory observation method is understood as an observation method where the researcher positions himself as an outsider from the group he is researching. This method often gives a considerable distance between the researcher and the object being studied because the observation is done from the outside. At an extreme level, the non-participatory method can be seen as a method often practiced by spies in observing a case.

    Continuing the issue of reactivity that was mentioned at the beginning, according to sociologist Martyn Hammersley in his writing in The Blackwell Encyclopedia of Sociology (2007) entitled “Observation”, the problem faced by the observation method is not only the issue of reactivity. Some other issues faced by researchers include; the problem of obtaining access, sampling, variation of the data produced, and ethical problems.

     

    How to Get Quality Observational Data

    Here are some other issues that must be considered so that the observational data obtained is of high quality, so that the research results are also high quality.

    • The problem of gaining access can consist of various forms, depending on the role the researcher will play and the results of the research object. When research is conducted openly, meaning the researcher introduces himself and his research, access to observe will depend on the negotiation process. In the negotiation process, an agreement related to the research must be reached in advance so that no party is harmed later. Consent to observe may also depend on the researcher’s personal and social characteristics and qualities.
    • Sampling can also involve observation. For example, researchers observe the situation of the village or community being studied, for example. Preliminary observations for this sampling can help determine who will be the informant, when they can be found or contacted, and so on. There are several strategies that can be applied here, for example, whether the researcher will focus his attention on the place under study or the behavior of the people. How long to observe should also be determined from the beginning.
    • The variation of the data produced depends on whether the observation is done in a structured or unstructured way. Structured observation follows the detailed planning design made before the observation is carried out. In other words, the researcher observes according to the observation guide. Unstructured observation means that observation is done flexibly. The data produced from unstructured observation is usually more diverse because it involves several research instruments that are used as needed, for example, diaries, field notes, voice recorders, photo recorders, video recorders, and so on.
    • Ethical problems should be explained first in the beginning so that the researcher does not stumble upon ethical problems that can lower his reputation as a researcher. Observation can be done in closed or open. Ethical procedures generally require open observation where the identity of the researcher and the research is known to the person being observed. On the other hand, closed observation is often rejected because it is usually shrouded in lies, for example hiding the original identity of the researcher and using a false identity. Research subjects also have the potential to have their privacy disturbed. However, the choice of whether to apply open or closed observation depends on the level. Observations that are too open are also prone to error.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of the Observation Method

    Here is an explanation of the advantages and disadvantages of the observation method:

    1. Gain Observation

    The advantages of direct observation or observation in the data collection process, namely:

    • Observation is very easy to implement.
    • The direct observation method is able to answer or satisfy a person’s curiosity, so that in the end the process that has gone through gives its own meaning or value. With the method of direct observation can be evidence and the absence of manipulation.
    • Observation can make a person more motivated and also have a great sense of curiosity. This method can be used as a research tool.

    2. Lack of Observation

    Some shortcomings of the observation method, namely:

    • Observers need time to wait for certain actions.
    • There are some data that cannot be done with observation, for example someone’s personal secret.
    • The tendency of a person being observed to behave or behave in accordance with what the observer expects.

     

  • Meaning of Perfect Metamorphosis and Animal Examples

    Meaning of Perfect Metamorphosis and Animal Examples

    The Meaning of Perfect Metamorphosis and Examples of Animals – The animals that exist on this planet are very numerous or even reach hundreds, ranging from small animals to large animals. The number of animals in the world is called biodiversity.

    Every animal in this world will surely breed, so the development of animals will continue to happen. Reproduction in each animal greatly affects the survival of the animal. The reproduction of each animal’s life, starting from the embryo, the process of birth, the process of becoming an adult, breeding, and experiencing death.

    Reproduction in animals occurs because of the sexual process between male and female animals. In this process, what is called the fertilization process will occur. Fertilization is the fusion of the nucleus of the sperm cell and the nucleus of the egg cell. Fertilization in animals can be done in two ways, namely internal and external fertilization.

    In addition, animals that undergo reproduction cannot be separated from what is called metamorphosis. Reader already know what metamorphosis is? This article will discuss what metamorphosis is, its types, and examples of metamorphosed animals. So happy reading this article, Reader.

    Meaning of Metamorphosis

    Before discussing further about metamorphosis, it would be good to first know what metamorphosis is. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) metamorphosis is a change in shape or arrangement that undergoes a change in shape (for example from a caterpillar to a butterfly).

    Meanwhile, according to language, metamorphosis comes from the Greek language, namely Greek . While based on the word, metamorphosis is divided into three parts, namely the first, “meta” which means “between, after, and around”. Then secondly, “morphe” which means “form” and thirdly, the word “osis” which means “part of”. In short, metamorphosis is a change in shape that occurs in animals during postembryonic development.

    When animals are undergoing metamorphosis, some animals experience changes in body shape that are almost identical. However, there are some animals that experience very different body shape changes.

    Animals that undergo almost the same shape change, such as cockroaches, cats, goats, and the like. While animals that experience different body shape changes can be seen in butterflies, mosquitoes, frogs, and the like.

    Types of Metamorphosis

    After discussing the meaning of metamorphosis, it is now time to discuss the types of metamorphosis that occur in animals. Metamorphosis is divided into two types, firstly perfect metamorphosis and secondly, imperfect metamorphosis.

    1. Perfect Metamorphosis

    A perfect metamorphosis is a metamorphosis that in its development towards adulthood experiences a change in body shape, appearance and different behavior. This different shape change starts from the egg phase. After the egg phase has been passed, the next phase is the larval phase. After the larval phase will produce the pupa phase. The last phase of complete metamorphosis is the imago or adult phase.

    Below will be explained the stages that occur in perfect metamorphosis.

    a. Egg phase

    The egg phase is the first phase of reproduction in animals. In this phase, the eggs produced by the female come from the results of fertilization that occurs in male animals. Egg cells that meet sperm cells will result in cleavage. In this splitting process, the time required varies depending on the type of animal.

    From the results of this cleavage will produce quite a lot of eggs. The eggs are then laid by the female in her habitat. For example butterflies, these animals will lay their eggs on the surface of leaves. While mosquitoes will lay their eggs on the surface of calm water.

    Animal parents lay their eggs in accordance with their habitat because after experiencing a change in appearance, they can immediately find food. Young animals that easily find food experience very rapid growth.

    b. Larval phase

    After passing through the egg phase, the next stage that occurs in complete metamorphosis is the larval phase. This larval phase is the phase in which young animals have started to be active in search of food. The food that is obtained is very easy because the parent has already prepared if the child grows there is no need to bother to find food

    In other words, the mother of each animal is very kind because she does not want her child to have difficulty finding food. In this larval phase, some animals have an external skeleton (exoskeleton). An animal’s exoskeleton can be interpreted as an insect or other animal that undergoes skin changes or ecdysis.

    The skin changes that occur in the larvae will result in the larvae experiencing a change in size to become larger. This skin change can occur several times depending on the type of animal. In addition, this skin change will stop when the larvae have started to stop eating and prepare themselves to go to the next phase.

    c. Pupa phase

    The pupa phase can be said to be a transitional phase because of the change in form from a larva to a larger animal form. A bigger physical change makes the animal have an outer skeleton that can protect the body and the outer skeleton is called a cocoon. Even though it is protected by a cocoon, the pupa’s body will still carry out the formation of metabolism and carry out the formation of animals into adult animals.

    At the beginning of becoming a pupa, the animal already stores food reserves when it becomes a larva. Although in the larval phase food reserves are stored, but to survive the pupa needs food intake. Therefore, in the pupa phase, almost every animal that is perfectly metamorphosed will begin to be active again in search of food.

    In the pupa phase, the time required varies greatly depending on the type of animal and the length of time in this process. In the pupa process, the animal will prepare itself to go to the adult phase or the imago phase.

    d. Imago phase

    At the specified time, the pupa will come out of its shell. The pupa that comes out of its shell will have a new animal form and indicates that the animal that has undergone complete metamorphosis has grown into an adult. In this phase, the animal has to get used to facing other predators.

    In the imago phase, the animal already has a perfect shape, so that when looking for food and looking for habitat is no longer the same as in the larval phase. In addition, during this phase, animals will perform the reproduction phase or perform mating between male and female animals.

    Thus, the imago phase can be said to be the phase of an animal becoming an adult and needing to marry so that offspring will continue to exist or the perfect metamorphosis cycle will repeat itself.

    2. Imperfect Metamorphosis 

    Imperfect metamorphosis is a metamorphosis that in the development towards adulthood experiences changes in body shape, appearance and behavior that are almost the same or not very different.

    If in perfect metamorphosis there are different stages, it is different with imperfect metamorphosis which only passes through almost the same stages. The stages start from the animal laying eggs, then becoming a nymph, then this nymph will grow into an adult (imago). Incomplete metamorphosis is known as hemimetabola.

    Below will be explained the stages that occur in incomplete metamorphosis.

    a. Egg phase 

    This egg phase is the same phase as animals with perfect metamorphosis. Eggs produced from mating between male and female animals will be placed in their original habitat. Not only are they placed in their original habitat, but the parent will ensure whether the eggs are safe from predatory attacks or not. If it is not safe from predatory attacks, then the parent will look for a new place.

    This egg phase consists of embryos that are protected by the shelled egg structure. The time required for this egg phase is very diverse and depends on the type of animal and the time it takes to change into a nymph.

    b. Nymph phase

    The second phase of incomplete metamorphosis is the nymphal phase. This nymph phase is different from the larval phase which is in complete metamorphosis. The larval phase of a young animal will be different from that of an adult animal. Meanwhile, the nymph phase of the young animal will be the same as the adult animal, only the size is different.

    The size of young animals during incomplete metamorphosis is smaller, then when they reach adult size, the size of the animal will increase. Although the size is different, but its existence does not change. Things that change in incompletely metamorphosed animals are only parts of the body and reproductive organs.

    The change in body size in nymphs during adulthood goes through what is called skin change or ecdysis. Thus, the nymph phase is almost the same as the larval phase (perfect metamorphosis) except that it does not undergo a very different physical change.

    c. Imago phase

    The imago phase indicates that animals with incomplete metamorphosis have passed the nymph phase. If you look carefully, then the body or being (seen from the outside) from the nymph phase to the imago only undergoes a change in body size.

    The imago phase is the adult phase that occurs in animals with complete and incomplete metamorphosis. In the imago phase, all body organs and reproductive organs have matured. Reproductive organs that have matured, animals can reproduce and repeat the cycle of imperfect metamorphosis.

    So, it can be said that animals with perfect metamorphosis will experience a very different physical change (outer appearance) from young age to adulthood. While animals with incomplete metamorphosis, body changes (seen from the outside) from young age to adulthood, the difference is not so visible.

     

    Examples of Animals with Perfect Metamorphosis

    In order to make it easier to understand perfect metamorphosis, examples of animals that undergo perfect metamorphosis will be explained below.

    1. Butterflies

    Who is not familiar with butterflies. We often find these animals on flowers that have nectar. Butterflies often land on flowers because flower nectar is the main food of butterflies.

    Butterflies become animals that belong to perfect metamorphosis because the changes in existence from young animals to adults are very different. For more clarity, let’s look at the picture below.

    Based on the picture above, the metamorphosis of a butterfly starts from the egg that comes from the mating of a male butterfly with a female butterfly. Later, the eggs turn into caterpillars that we usually find on leaves. Then, the caterpillar turns into a cocoon or pupa with a shell to protect the body. After some time, the cocoon will turn into a young butterfly and a few days later will turn into an adult butterfly.

    2. Mosquitoes

    The next example of an animal that undergoes complete metamorphosis is a mosquito. We often find these animals at night and sometimes mosquitoes disturb someone’s sleep, either because of their sound or because of their bite.

    Although mosquitoes love to fly, the mother mosquito will lay her eggs on the surface of calm water. Therefore, we should diligently clean the bathtub so that there are no mosquito eggs.

    Based on the picture above, eggs become the initial phase of complete metamorphosis in mosquitoes. After the egg hatches it will turn into a larva. This larva will adapt to find food so that it can extend its life to the pupa phase. After the larval phase is over, the next is the pupa phase. The last phase of metamorphosis in mosquitoes is the mosquito becoming an adult.

    3. Frog

    The rainy season is a season that frogs like very much. This is because in this season a lot of water comes down to the surface, so the frogs will be free to jump around.

    Frogs belong to the category of animals that undergo complete metamorphosis. This can be seen in the shape of the tadpole which is very different from the shape of the frog when it is an adult. That difference is what causes the frog to become a perfectly metamorphosed animal.

    Based on the picture above, the egg becomes the initial phase of the complete metamorphosis of the frog. Then continue with the egg that turns into a legless tadpole. After developing, tadpoles have two legs. The tadpole’s legs, which are increasing in number, are accompanied by the tadpole’s body which also undergoes changes, until it becomes a young frog. Young frogs develop into adult frogs that then reproduce and produce frog eggs.

     

    Examples of Imperfect Metamorphosis Animals

    After discussing, examples of animals with perfect metamorphosis, then what will be discussed next are examples of animals with imperfect metamorphosis.

    1. Locust

    Grasshoppers become part of the animal that metamorphoses incompletely because the change from nymph to adult grasshopper does not undergo a significant physical change. The difference between young grasshoppers and adult grasshoppers is only limited to body size.

    From the picture above, grasshoppers are incompletely metamorphosed, grasshoppers start from eggs that come from the parent or female grasshopper. After the eggs hatch, they turn into nymphs or young grasshoppers. Each time a young grasshopper develops into an adult, there is no significant physical change except for the size of the grasshopper’s body.

    2. Cockroaches

    Cockroaches belong to the type of animals that like to live in humid places, such as bathrooms. Although this animal is small, it can fly. In fact, for some people, this animal is very scary especially when flying, are you one of them?

    Cockroaches become animals that metamorphose imperfectly because their body shape from youth to adulthood only changes in size. In other words, there is no change from a young cockroach to an adult.

    From the picture above, the cockroach’s incomplete metamorphosis starts from the egg. Then turn into a nymph or a young cockroach. After the young cockroach develops, it will become an adult cockroach that has the same body as the young cockroach.

    • Alternative Energy Sources
    • Glass House Effect
    • Source of Kinetic Energy
    • Heat Energy Source
    • Mineral Natural Resources
    • Acid rain
    • Rainfall Process
    • Mosquito Life Cycle
    • Frog Life Cycle
    • Tropical climate

    Conclusion

    Metamorphosis is part of the process of growth or development of animals. The difference between perfect metamorphosis and imperfect metamorphosis lies in the change in the animal’s appearance. If an animal undergoes a significant physical change, then the animal enters a complete metamorphosis. While animals that do not experience significant changes, then those animals are included in animals with incomplete metamorphosis.

  • Understanding Mercantilism, History, & Economic Theory

    Understanding Mercantilism, History, & Economic Theory

    Mercantilism is an economic theory that believes that the prosperity of a country is only determined by the amount of capital or assets stored in that country and the amount of international trade carried out by that country. Mercantilism also includes national economic policies that aim to accumulate foreign exchange reserves through a positive trade balance, especially in manufactured goods. For those of you who are one of the business people or move in the economic field, understanding the economics of mercantilism is important.

    Well, discussing mercantilism is closely related to the country’s capital or wealth, which is clearly explained by the amount of capital (precious metals, especially gold and other commodities) owned by the country. In addition, the wealth increases exports to obtain a balance of trade with other countries by reducing imports.

    It is always evaluated positively. Mercantilism teaches that in this case the government should achieve its national goals by protecting the economy, encouraging exports and reducing imports (generally by imposing high tariffs). Economic policy in this sense is called mercantilism economic system. Then what is the meaning, history, and impact of mercantilism theory in the economy of a country? Here is the full explanation:

    Meaning of Mercantilism

    The term Mercantilism comes from the English word Merchant which means merchant. This means that in the understanding of the theory of mercantilism, if every country wants to progress, it must trade with other countries. As a result, the source of national wealth can be obtained from foreign trade surplus in the form of gold or silver. With contact with other countries, there will also be a time policy that encourages export activities and also limits imports so that international trade runs healthy.

    Mercantilism is an economic theory that states that the prosperity of a country is determined by the amount of investment or assets it owns and the size of its foreign trade. The concept of mercantilism was explained by prominent thinkers such as the French philosopher Jean Bodin. Jean Bodin discusses the theory of money and prices increase due to import taxes from abroad and the taxes that need to be issued. As one of the big economic systems, many scientists and experts think about the practical theory of mercantilism.

    One of them is Thomas Mann who is a British merchant and discusses the theory of trade surplus that income from trade surplus or higher can make the country economically prosperous. Jean-Baptiste Colbert, a French civil servant and Minister of Economy and Finance, spoke about how important the position of a merchant is and how merchants and rulers or governments can work together to advance the country’s economy. Sir William Petty was an English economist, scientist and philosopher who discussed economic theory and political arithmetic, labor theory and currency theory.

    In addition, David Hume, who was born in Scotland, discusses the theory of prices, which states that prices are affected by the quantity and amount of goods. Mercantilism means that the state plays an active role in the economy and directly intervenes in the functioning of the economy. Before economic thinkers discuss mercantilism, we must first know what mercantilism is. As mentioned earlier, mercantilism is a theory that the well-being of a country is determined by the amount of assets owned by the country or the capital owned by the country, and the amount of foreign trade is also very important.

    According to this merchant’s understanding, all countries want to progress, one of which is doing foreign trade that can increase their income and the money produced will be a trade surplus. Save a lot of money and then keep the money that is used in the production of goods and then exported. In addition, some thinkers, such as the French scientist Jean Bodin (1530-1596), discuss mercantilism which systematically or in detail discusses the theory of money and price.

    Then Thomas Mun (1571-1641) considered that a prosperous merchant from England who discussed his foreign trade experience and the problems that often arise in foreign trade. Jean-Baptiste Colbert (1691-1683), a French civil servant who served as Minister of Economy and Finance, discussed his policy of national strength and success working with entrepreneurs to increase personal wealth.

    Sir William Petty (1623-1687), an English economist, scientist and philosopher also discussed the importance of labor, not land resources, to improve the domestic economy of a country in relation to the practice of mercantilism. Scottish born and Adam Smith’s friend, David Hume (1711-1776), in a book called Trade Balance, explains that prices are partly influenced by the amount of money and commodities in circulation.

    Theory of Mercantilism

    Today, all European economists from 1500 to 1750 are considered mercantilists, but the term mercantilism was not known at that time. The term was first introduced by Victor de Riqueti and Marquis de Mirabeau in 1763 and popularized by Adam Smith in 1776. The term mercantilism was first introduced in 1763 by Victor de Riqueti and in 1776 by Marquis Mirabeau Smith.

    According to history, Adam Smith first mentioned the contribution of mercantilism to the economy in his book The Wealth of Nations. The word mercantilism itself comes from the Latin word Mercari which means barter. This is rooted in the word brand, which means product. The term mercantilism was initially only used by critics such as Mirabeau and Smith, but was later used and adopted by historians.

    The background of the emergence of the theory of mercantilism is often seen in the politics that cause war and also in the background of the expansion of colonial territories. Mercantilist economic theory in its current application varies greatly from writer to writer and has evolved over time. The policies in the mercantilist economic system include:

    • Establishment of colonies abroad
    • High tariffs are imposed on finished products
    • Optimizing the use of domestic resources
    • Export of gold and silver, including payment methods, is prohibited
    • Colonies are prohibited from doing business with other countries
    • Dominating the market in the main ports
    • Limiting wages
    • Issuing export subsidies
    • Prohibition of foreign ship trade
    • Promotion of the manufacturing industry through research and direct subsidies
    • Limiting domestic consumption through non-tariff barriers to trade

    The main purpose of the concept or theory of mercantilism is to build a nation, especially in times of continuous war, where nations must find ways to strengthen their economy and weaken foreign enemies.

    History of Mercantilism

    The theoretical concept of mercantilism first appeared around the 18th century with an economic understanding that shows the well-being of a country. The teachings of mercantilism were dominantly taught in European schools from the early 16th century to the 18th century, the era of the rapid economic growth of mercantilism. At that time, national consciousness was quite high in the community. The emergence of mercantilism as an economic system has made the intervention of a country to organize its economy even bigger.

    The emergence of mercantilism is due to the high national consciousness of the people since the birth of the first independent modern countries in Europe, such as Germany, France, England, Italy, and the Netherlands. In order to be able to defend the sovereignty, independence and well-being of its people, the country must have a stable and strong economic condition in order to survive.

    The policy that emerged during mercantilism was to ignore the agricultural sector which resulted in various criticisms. The basis of the concept of mercantilism is the balance of trade, the flow mechanism of precious metals, the theory of the quantity of money and protection against it. From the three principles of economic thought, it became centered on the doctrine of mercantilism, which is the result of a trade balance that should be profitable.

    Based on the doctrine of mercantilism, the foreign exchange earnings of a country will be determined from the following points:

    • Export goods
    • export services
    • precious metal exports
    • Capital import which is not only in the form of investment from abroad, but also in the form of profit from investment abroad and other forms of loans

    Meanwhile, foreign exchange spending forms such as import of goods, import of services, import of precious metals, and export of capital.

    The beginning of this theoretical thinking concept is to consider that a country that wants to become a developed country needs to establish trade cooperation with other countries. With the concept of foreign trade in mind, create a merchant group that has an important position.

    As a result, the cooperation between merchants and power becomes more massive, so that both support each other and have more privileges such as monopoly, protection, or other forms of privilege. In the 17th century AD to the 18th century AD was the period called commercial capitalism or merchant capitalism in Europe. When the economic era of mercantilism developed, several European countries that adhered to the theory of mercantilism were England, France, Portugal, the Netherlands, and Spain.

    It was during that period that the development of mercantilism’s economic thought developed rapidly, starting from both quality and quantity. This era became a period where each individual became an economist for themselves.

    Characteristics of Mercantilism Economic System

    When entering the renaissance era and the development of mercantilism in Europe, precious metals became a measuring tool for prosperity, wealth, and power for a country. This means that the more precious metals an imperialist country owns, the richer and more powerful that country becomes. Here are the characteristics of a mercantilism economic system:

    1. The state is the only form of ruler of an economy
    2. Get as much precious metal as possible and that becomes the main thing
    3. Focus on a surplus trade balance which is a form of obtaining large profits from foreign trade
    4. There are policies that can support the sustainability of the economic mercantilism system such as:
      • Make colonial countries outside their sovereign countries
      • Prohibiting blood or colonial countries from doing trade with other countries, especially rival or rival countries
      • There is a market monopoly that maximizes the role of the main ports as part of the main activity of the economy
      • Forbids colonial countries to export gold and silver, even as a means of payment
      • Prohibits trade commodities to be carried in foreign ships
      • Making export subsidies, ie subsidies whose cost burden is borne by the government on companies when exporting goods abroad. The purpose of this policy is for the exporting party to be able to sell its goods abroad at a cheaper price, so that economic conditions become competitive
      • Carry out promotions in various manufacturing industries through research or directly subsidized research by the government which is useful to increase production results
      • Limiting the wages of workers whose purpose is to suppress the production of the country and companies so that the acquisition of profits becomes more maximal
      • Maximizing the use of domestic resources that aims to reduce the cost of importing goods because imports can increase a country’s production
      • Limiting domestic consumption through non-tariff trade barriers, where the country tries to prevent the entry of imported goods through various policies where the policy is not an import customs tariff

    Impact of Mercantilism

    This mercantilist theory was widely taught in all European schools in the early modern period (18th and 19th centuries) when national consciousness began to develop. This event first triggered the intervention of the state that regulated the economy, and finally the capitalist system was born in this era. Market needs taught by the theory of mercantilism eventually caused many wars between European countries.

    Finally the era of European imperialism has begun. Mercantilist economic theory began to disappear in the second half of the 18th century with the emergence of a new economic theory by Adam Smith. There are several countries that use this theory. France was one of the most important economies in Europe at the time. Louis XIV of France thought that the country should rule in the economic field, as in the case of diplomacy.

    In addition, the interests of the country are prioritized above the merchants and others, as indicated by the King. The purpose of mercantilist economic policies was to build a canyon, especially during times of intense war, and countries had to find ways to strengthen their economies and weaken foreign enemies.

    Well, that’s the explanation of mercantilism, starting from the meaning, history, purpose, impact, and explanation of the complete economic theory. Learning about economic theory certainly requires a lot of references because of the wide scope of scientific research. To start learning it, Reader can start from basic reference sources, such as an introduction to economics, and the application of economic theory in general. Reader can visit the Sinaumedia book collection at www.Sinaumedia.com or www.ebooksSinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations about economic theory: Happy learning. #SahabatTanpabatas.

    This book tries to explain economic theory and concepts in a more practical and simple language and perspective. Therefore, application examples, summaries, and brief explanations are also provided for the reader’s understanding. The author hopes that this book can help readers understand and understand economic principles in a more systematic and practical way.

    This book is divided into nine chapters and provides new teaching methods for the development of Indonesian financial management. This learning system is designed to increase the reader’s interest and make the text easier to read and understand. Each chapter contains several features of this book called educational innovation, such as general learning objectives, specific learning objectives, chapter descriptions, and the previous and next chapters.

    Accompanied by essays in the form of descriptive questions and multiple choice tasks, presented comprehensively as important points to ensure the reader understands the contents of the book. Case studies. Presenting the phenomenon of facts that exist in Indonesia. Readers are expected to be able to solve existing problems related to public sector organizations. Think critically. The text of this book presents many examples and issues related to financial governance to improve critical thinking skills.

    This book is suitable not only for business people but also for policy makers. The content is very informative and inspiring and therefore expands our insight into the previously unknown economic and political dynamics of the Gulf countries. This book is easy to read because it is presented in a fluent and quite complete language and is supported by up-to-date data. This will help the reader to fully understand the development of the Gulf countries.

     

  • Understanding Brands: History, Functions, and Types

    Understanding Brands: History, Functions, and Types

    Meaning of brand – Reader, this time we will discuss the meaning of brand, history, up to the stage of brand development. We need to know first, the meaning of brand is related to a symbol consisting of a name, term, image, logo, icon, design, or a combination of all of them, which is intended to identify, define, or provide a product or service.

    That all serves to distinguish one seller’s identity from another seller.

    Brand Meaning

    According to Law Number 20 of 2016 on Trademarks and Geographical Indications, a trademark is a sign with special characteristics in the form of a picture, name, word, letter, number, color pattern, or a combination of these elements. that there is That is in goods or services used for commercial activities.

    A brand is a distinguishing mark of trading activities with similar goods or services, as well as a guarantee of quality when compared with similar goods or services belonging to other parties.

    Thus, the brand includes the company’s commitment to consistently provide special features, benefits, and services to buyers.

    Brands or trademarks are included in intellectual property rights, because this is what distinguishes a product/service that is unique and different from other products that may be of the same type. These branding elements include expressions, designs, and symbols that can be recognized.

    In order for a brand to be legally protected, the brand must be registered. The purpose is to prevent the parties from using the brand that has been created. It turns out that not all brands can be registered.

    So, for Reader who are developing a brand , it is best to first understand the meaning of brand and avoid the following points when creating and registering a brand.

    1. The brand does not conflict with ideology, standards, and national laws.
    2. Does not contain misleading information about the type, size, origin, type and purpose of registration.
    3. It is not allowed to use the name of protected plant varieties.
    4. Avoid writing information that does not match the quality or benefits of the goods/services produced.
    5. Labels without characters also cannot be registered.
      Avoid using generic names or symbols

    Brand Development History

    Branding has basically been going on for centuries. The word ” brand ” in English comes from the linguistic word ” brand ” which means “to burn” and refers to livestock identification.

    At that time, breeders used a special stamp to mark or mark their livestock and distinguish them from other livestock. With the stamp, it will be easier for consumers to identify quality cows provided by leading livestock companies.

    Some historical evidence also shows that signs/symbols have been used for thousands of years. For example, writing and making pictures on the walls of ancient Egyptian tombs that show pets have existed since 2000 years before Christ.

    In ancient Roman times, shops had pictures, such as shoes or beef to identify their products. Other examples include identity marks on ancient Chinese porcelain and ancient Greek and Greek antiquities.

    In the Middle Ages, some enterprises, such as bread producers, and silversmiths were run by trade unions that provided some kind of quality certification mark.

    The signs were then used as legal entities in several countries, such as England and Germany in the 15th century.

    The growth of new retail enterprises, such as department stores and grocery stores, has triggered an increase in consumer spending. The increase in industrialization and urbanization was accompanied by the increase in the standard of living in America, which then changed the lifestyle from self-producing to consuming most goods. Until the beginning of the 20th century, trademark law appeared .

    The role of the brand is of course to identify a specific designer or manufacturer, for example Mercedes Benz, Singer, Heinze, and Ford. In the late 19th and early 20th centuries manufacturers used brands to identify specific products.

    The Meaning of Brands According to Some Figures

    1. According to Kotler and Armstrong

    A brand is a name, term, sign, symbol or design, or a combination of all of them, which is intended to identify the goods or services of one seller or group of sellers and to distinguish them from competing products.

    2. According to Tjiptono

    A brand is a symbol, legal instrument (property), company, abbreviation, risk mitigation, positioning , personality, value chain, vision, added value, identity, image, relationship, and evolving entity.

    3. According to Simamora

    A brand is a name, sign, symbol, design, or combination of all that is intended to identify the goods or services of one seller among the goods and services of other sellers.

    4. According to Rangkuti

    A brand is a specific name and symbol (such as a logo, stamp, or packaging) intended to identify goods and services from a particular seller or group of sellers.

    5. According to Alma

    A brand is a sign or symbol that gives the identity of a certain item or service, which can be in the form of words, pictures, or a combination of both.

    Brand Parts

    According to Kotler and Keller (2009), a brand usually consists of several parts, namely:

    1. The brand name is part of the brand and is pronounced.
    2. Part of the brand that can be recognized but not pronounced, such as symbols, designs, fonts , or distinctive colors.
    3. A trademark is a part of a brand that is protected by law because of its ability to create something special.
    4. Copyright is a legally protected privilege to produce, publish, and sell written works, musical works, or works of art.

    Brand Functions and Benefits

    A brand serves to provide an identity for goods or services and functions to ensure the quality of articles and combinations for consumers.

    A brand also acts as a recruitment of goods or combined products produced by a person or legal entity with products or services performed by a person or other moral entity.

    Here are some brand functions.

    1. Power Indicator Function

    Signs are used to show that a product is legal from a business unit and also serves to give a sign that this product is done professionally.

    2. Quality Indicator Function

    A brand is a guarantee of quality, especially for products that have a good reputation.

    3. Suggestion Function

    The brand gives the impression that it will become a product collector.

    According to Tjiptono the benefits of a brand are as follows.

    • Identification is intended to facilitate the processing or tracking of products for companies, especially in the organization of inventory and accounting records.
    • A form of legal protection for the unique features or aspects of a product. Trademarks can be protected by registered trademarks, manufacturing processes can be protected by patents, and packaging can be protected by copyright and design. These intellectual property rights ensure that companies can safely invest in the brands they develop to reap the benefits of this valuable research.
    • Signal quality levels for satisfied customers, so they can easily choose and buy again later.
      Brand loyalty translates into the company’s ability to predict and secure demand and create entry barriers that make it difficult for other companies to enter the market.
    • How to create unique associations and meanings that differentiate a product from its competitors.
    • A source of competitive advantage, especially through legal protection, customer loyalty and a unique image formed in the minds of consumers.
    • A source of financial gain, especially for future income.

    Brand Type

    According to Law No. 15 of 2001 regarding brands, in general, brands are divided into three categories, namely:

    1. A brand is a brand used on goods sold by one or more people or legal entities to distinguish them from other similar goods.
    2. A service brand is a brand used for services marketed by one or more people with or by a legal entity to distinguish them from other similar services.
    3. Collective Brands are Brands used on goods and/or services with the same characteristics that are marketed together by more than one person or legal entity to distinguish them from other similar goods and/or services.

    Based on their form, trademarks are divided into several categories, specifically as follows:

    1. Brand Painting. This form is able to distinguish the design form or image of goods or services from other similar goods or services. For example, the Flying Horse brand image, is a drawing or picture of a horse with flying wings.
    2. Kata Brand. This mark is able to distinguish with the sound of words a product or service from other similar products or services. Examples: Pepsodent for toothpaste, Ultraflu for colds, Toyota for cars.
    3. Brand letters or numbers. This form has the power to distinguish in the form of letters or numbers between a good or service with other similar goods or services. For example, ABC for ketchup and syrup, 555 for books.
    4. Brand Name. This form has the power to distinguish the form of a name of goods or services from other similar goods or services. For example: Louis Vuitton for bags, Vinesia for wallets.
    5. Brand Combination of signs. This form is capable of distinguishing in the form of images/pictures and words between goods or services with other goods or services of the same nature. Example: Jamu Bu Meneer is a combination of the image of a woman and the words of Mrs. Meneer.

    According to Harahap (1996), based on its level, brands are divided into three levels, as follows.

    A. Normal Brand

    Normal brands are brands that do not have a high reputation. This casual brand is considered to have no symbolic influence from the art of living, both in terms of use and technology. Companies or consumers consider the brand to be of poor quality.

    Brands are seen as lacking in charisma that is capable of creating a sense of intimacy and mystical power that is suggestive to the public and consumers and is not capable of forming a market and consumer class.

    B. Famous Brands

    This type of brand is very famous because its logo has the power to attract attention. Such a brand has an extraordinary and enchanting power, so that all types of products under this brand immediately create familiarity and a psychological bond with consumers.

    C. Most Popular Brands

    The highest level of branding is the most popular brand. The level of the most popular brands is higher than the common brands, so all kinds of products under this brand immediately create a legendary touch.

    Because of this definition, for those who try it, it is likely to get stuck with the overlapping formulas of popular brands.

    Stages of Brand Development

    According to Rangkuti, a brand usually goes through several stages or stages of development, particularly as follows.

    1. Unbranded Products

    At this stage the product is managed as a commodity so branding is not required. This condition is very beneficial if demand is greater than supply , which often happens in monopoly economic situations. For example, cheap rice, fuel, generic drugs, etc.

    2. Brand As Reference

    At this level, there is some competition, although the level is not too tight. This competition encourages manufacturers to differentiate their products.

    The purpose is that the products produced by the company are different from the products of other companies. For example, sneakers, work shoes, notebooks, sketchbooks, etc.

    3. Brand as Personality

    At this point, distinguishing brands based on functional attributes becomes increasingly difficult, and increasingly difficult to do. Because most companies do the same activities.

    To differentiate manufactured products from competing products, companies add personality value to each brand. For example, health bath soap, baby soap, etc.

    4. Brands as Icons

    At this stage, the brand belongs to the customer. Customers have a deeper knowledge of the brands they use.

    In general, brands that enter this level are already international and customers who use this brand can express themselves or express their identity, for example Marlboro Cigarettes.

    5. Brands as Enterprises

    Advertising at this level has a very complex identity and is more interactive, so customers can easily contact the brand.

    Because the company brand is a representation of the company so the brand is the same as the company. All managers and employees have the same perception of their brand.

    Communication outside the company has been integrated into the entire operational line, so that information flows smoothly from management to customers and vice versa, from customers to management.

    An example is Microsoft software, where customers can communicate directly at any time via the internet with the company, and in turn, the company can inform customers about its products at any time.

    6. Brand as Moral Policy

    Currently, there are only a few companies that are at this stage, namely companies that have run their business transparently, starting from the raw materials used, the production process and transportation, to the products, services, and after-sales.

    Customer service Information is communicated in a transparent, unambiguous manner, and nothing is hidden from a business, social or political moral point of view. The Body Shop and Benetton ads are examples.

    That’s a comment on the meaning of brand and matters related to brand. 

  • Meaning of Sublimation, Process, and Examples in Everyday Life

    Meaning of Sublimation, Process, and Examples in Everyday Life

    Reader, do you know what sublimation is ? In our daily life there are many things with various forms and shapes. Starting from liquid, solid or gas. The form of this thing can change into another form. For example, a solid can turn into a liquid or vice versa.

    As we know, there are many kinds of events that change the existence of things. There is freezing, melting, evaporating, condensing, sublimating. Well, this article will discuss more about sublimation.

    What is sublimation? and what are examples of events that happen everyday? Before we discuss about sublimation, we need to know the explanation about solid, liquid and gas.

    Solids, Liquids and Gases

    Solids are things that have a fixed nature, shape and volume. Examples of solid objects are lilies, tables, mattresses, chairs, stones and others.

    A liquid is a thing whose properties and shape change according to its container, the volume is constant and flows from a higher place to a lower place. Examples of liquids are water and oil

    Gases are things whose nature, shape and volume are always changing. Gases also occupy space. Examples of gaseous substances are air, gas, and wind.

    Meaning of Sublimation

    Sublimation is a form of change in the form of a solid substance into a gaseous substance without going through the liquid process. In the process of sublimation requires heat energy or heat. According to Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia (KBBI) , sublimate comes from the word sublime which has the meaning of changing a solid substance into vapor.

    Sublimation is one form of physical change, because in the process of sublimation it is not accompanied by the formation of new substances. In addition, this sublimation process can be seen or observed with the direct eye or the naked eye from just its physical appearance or external appearance.

    Sublimation Process

    As explained earlier about the meaning of sublimation, sublimation is a change in the form or existence of a substance from a solid to a gas. The process of sublimation is to make molecules that are close to each other become distant and irregular.

    The process of sublimation is the result of the vapor pressure and temperature relationship. Just take an example of camphor, camphor or solid room fragrance. The camphor changes its form from a solid to a gaseous form whose molecules are distant from each other and irregular. Therefore, those things can emit a fragrance that makes the room fragrant.

    Solids are things that have close molecular distances with strong attraction. Meanwhile, gases have a shape like air where the molecular distance is far apart and irregular, the attraction of gases tends to be weak. Gas can be said to be a fairly light substance and its properties are almost the same as air.

    Examples of the Sublimation Process in Everyday Life

    There are many examples of sublimating events in our daily lives. Among them are camphor, dry ice to ice cubes that are kept at room temperature. Solid things that can sublimate include arsenic, water, iodine and solid carbon dioxide (dry ice). To know an example of the sublimation process, the following is a complete explanation.

    1. Kapur Barus or Camphor

    Lime that is placed around the house is usually useful to get rid of odors or even insects. Lime or camphor that if left in the wardrobe that we use will surely shrink and wear out over time.

    This is because camphor or camphor receives heat from the cabinet environment. In addition, because camphor is made from a chemical substance called naphthalene. Naphthalene is a substance that sublimates easily because it is bound by a relatively weak van der waals force.

    2. Dry Ice or Dry Ice

    Dry ice or dry ice if left in the open air will undergo a process of sublimation. The carbon dioxide or CO2 content in dry ice does not melt when heated, but instead directly changes into a gas. Dry ice sublimes at a temperature of -78 degrees Celsius under normal atmospheric pressure of 1 atm.

    3. Iodine

    Solid iodine when heated will sublimate and become gaseous iodine. Iodine gas can turn back into solid iodine after going through the cooling process.

    4. Melting Snow

    Snow is formed from complex crystals with large surface areas. The larger the surface area of ​​the snow exposed to air, the more molecules can sublimate.

    5. Ice Cubes Fresh Out of the Fridge

    Ice cubes are synonymous with the change of existence from a solid to a liquid or called melting. However, not only that, when ice cubes that have just been taken out of the fridge and placed in room temperature will emit a lot of smoke. This can happen because the ice not only melts but experiences a sublimation event.

    6. Sublimation Printer

    Nowadays, inkjet printers have been replaced by sublimation printers. Printing on the print uses heat to unite the ink and fabric into one. The advantage of the print from this printer is that it can be used immediately because the print can dry quickly.

    In addition, the use of printers with sublimation techniques is also used in the process of printing synthetic fabrics such as polyester, making T-shirts, flags and banners. By using this printing machine, the advantage is that the color is more brilliant because the coloring material is bound with synthetic fibers.

    An example of sublimation is when the process is done through this printer that uses a special film, when heated, the pigments in the film will sublimate and be captured again on paper.

    Once the pigment solidifies, it will create an image on paper. Because of the sublimation process, this printer is much more comfortable and less messy to use when compared to other types of printers.

    7. Freeze-drying

    Sublimation techniques are also often used in the culinary world or the food industry, namely freeze drying. This technique can maintain the quality of food because it uses a very low temperature.

    The drying of frozen food involves the sublimation of water from the food in a frozen state when a high-pressure vacuum is applied. In addition, this technique is also often used to preserve food brought by astronauts into outer space in order to maintain the quality of the food.

    8. Room freshener

    Room fresheners not only have a liquid form that is sprayed but there are also room fresheners that have a solid form. Air freshener is a solid that is placed at room temperature, which over time will undergo a sublimation process or turn into a gas alias into a fragrant aroma while its size will shrink or shrink.

    9. Arsenic Solids

    Arsenic solids if heated can go through the process of sublimation. this heating process will directly change from the solid phase to the gas phase, without melting or experiencing the melting phase.

    Arsenic solids can sublimate at a temperature of 616 degrees Celsius. Arsenic does not melt and directly sublimates because it has a melting point that is at 817 degrees Celsius. Which means arsenic can sublimate first without having time to melt.

    10. Glass On Scouring Tools

    For women, it’s definitely quite often to use this one hairdressing tool, the catok tool has a material made of glass which is a heat transfer material which will erode over time due to heat from electricity and become hot gas.

    11. Coal

    Coal is a black solid used for combustion. Burning coal will become carbon dioxide gas or smoke.

    12. Fireworks

    Fireworks are very identical and many are bought at the turn of the year. Fireworks have materials in the form of solids inside which when burned will produce beautiful shapes and colors. Fireworks that are lit will then explode and become carbon dioxide gas.

    13. Wick on the Candle

    The wick on a candle that burns over time will get shorter and turn into gas as the length of the candle burns.

    The Process of Changing the Form of Other Things

    Not only sublimation, there is a change in the form of other things that you must know, Reader. The following is the process of changing the form of things other than sublimation:

    1. Crystallize

    Crystallization is a change in the form of matter from a gas to a solid. The process that causes crystallization is the release of heat energy from an object.

    For example, the process of crystallization turns water vapor in the air into snow. There is also the change of air in the refrigerator into ice flowers.

    2. Freezing

    Freezing is the process of changing from a liquid to a solid. The process that is done to allow the freezing process to occur is to change the form of a liquid object by cooling it to the freezing point and then it will change into a solid object.

    An example of a change in the form of an object by means of freezing is when water is put in the freezer and it will become ice cubes or freeze.

    3. Melting

    Melting is the process of changing from a solid to a liquid. The action or action done to change things into liquid is to heat or raise the temperature of the solid thing.

    For example, when the ice in the freezer is placed in an open area or under the hot sun for a long time, then the ice cubes will turn into liquid. Ice that was initially a solid thing then turned into a liquid thing.

    4. Yawning

    Evaporation is the process of changing the state of matter from liquid to gas. The process that causes evaporation is by heating or raising the temperature of the liquid.

    For example, water that is heated over time will boil and then evaporate into smoke or gas. That already indicates that there is a change in existence from a liquid to a solid. Another example can also be seen when evaporation in the sea or river during the day will produce clouds.

    5. Condensing

    Condensation is the process of changing from a gas to a liquid. This is due to the display of heat energy experienced by the object.

    An example is when you put ice cubes and water on a glass, then the outside of the glass will become wet. In addition, the grass that is in the field in the morning, becomes wet even though there is no rain in the afternoon.

    Causes of Changes in the Form of Things

    The change that occurs in an object is certainly not without reason, that is why in the change of substance it can be recognized directly as well as using aids. Changes in the form of things can occur due to physical, chemical, and biological changes in the properties of the substances of those things.

    The following is an explanation of the causes of physical changes in solid, liquid, and gas:

    1. Physical Changes

    Physical change is a form of change in substance in an object that can be seen or observed directly with the eyes or with its physical appearance only and its external appearance. Physical changes do not change the chemical composition of a substance.

    This change does not change the material or form a new substance in an object. The special nature of this change is that the change can be observed from the outside or physically and can return to its original state as before the substance changed.

    An example of a chemical change is when iron is heated, then its size will get longer, this is called expansion. Then another example is ice that melts, the change in its form can return to its original state, which is to become a solid object by cooling it.

    2. Chemical Changes

    Chemical change is a form of change in the form of an object that occurs in the shape and size of a substance and produces a new, different substance. This change in form will produce different or new material types and properties from the original substance.

    A chemical reaction will create a substance or composition that changes into a new chemical formula. This change in chemical form is caused by the material reduction of the substance when it changes. Chemical changes can occur from the factors of combustion, cooling, heating, and decomposition.

    An example of this chemical change is wood that is burned then it will produce charcoal and gas or smoke. This change to charcoal and gas cannot be changed back to its original form, which is wood, because the change is chemical.

    3. Biological Changes

    Biological changes are changes that occur due to the influence of the activity of other living beings or decomposing microorganisms such as fungi, bacteria and other trace elements. Similar to chemical changes, biological changes also cause changes in things that cannot return to their original form before they change.

    Examples of biological changes that you can find in everyday life are like wood becoming weathered and disintegrating over time, fruits that start to rot. The time required in this weathering process is very long.

    The World According to Physics

    Closing

    As explained above, the change in the form of things is not only sublimation, but there are several others, such as evaporation, freezing, melting, crystallizing, and condensing. Every change in existence will definitely be around us. For example, water that freezes, until it becomes ice cubes.

     

  • Meaning of Condensation, Types, Until the Process Occurs

    Meaning of Condensation, Types, Until the Process Occurs

    Definition of Condensation – The nature of changes in the form of things is divided into two types, namely temporary changes and permanent changes. Temporary changes are said to be physical changes, while permanent changes are called chemical changes. Transient changes are usually shown through the process of freezing, melting, evaporating, condensing, sublimating and dissolving. If an object undergoes one of these processes, its existence will return to its original state.

    Meanwhile, changes in existence still occur if things undergo changes that cannot return to their original form. Permanent changes are usually shown by burning and decaying processes.

    On this occasion, we will discuss more about dew or condensation. Usually, when the night air is very cold, then in the morning dew will appear on the leaves. In fact, not a few people will play with the dew on the leaves. Dew itself is one of the nature of changes in existence.

    Condensation itself has another name, namely condensation. However, not many people know the condensation process. To find out, you can read this article, Reader.

    Meaning of Condensation or Condensation

    Condensation is a process of changing the form of matter into a more dense form, such as gas (or steam) into liquid, a change of substance that releases heat. Condensation is the opposite of evaporation which releases heat.

    In addition, this condensation occurs when the water vapor in the air passes through a surface that is colder than the dew point of the water vapor, then this water vapor will condense into water droplets or dew.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the meaning of the word condense is to become dew. Another meaning of condense is to become water droplets (about steam). As explained before, dew usually appears at night. This is the same as the definition of dew according to KBBI, which is water droplets that fall from the air (especially at night).

    Meaning of Condensation According to Experts

    In addition to the meaning of condensing or condensation according to KBBI, some experts also expressed the meaning of condensing or condensation. Some experts also say that condensing or condensation is difficult to separate from what is called precipitation. Here is the meaning of condensation according to experts, among others.

    1. Wibowo et al (2016)

    The definition of precipitation according to Wibowo is an event of water falling from the atmosphere to the earth’s surface. The form of the falling liquid can be snow, rain, fog and dew.

    2. Triatmodjo (2008)

    The definition of precipitation according to Triatmodjo is the descent of water from the atmosphere to the earth’s surface which can consist of dew, snow, hail, and rain. Precipitation for tropical regions, rain provides a large role or function. This is seen where it is usually not what is considered precipitation.

    3. Karnaningroem (1990)

    Karnaningroem said that the condensation process is a process of changing the form of gas into a liquid form due to the difference in temperature. The condensation temperature changes in accordance with the vapor pressure that occurs.

    4. According to Research

    According to researchers, the definition of precipitation is any product from the condensation of water in the atmosphere. It occurs when the atmosphere becomes saturated and the water then condenses and comes out of the solution (precipitated).

    5. Quoted in the Natural Science Textbook of Business and Management Expertise

    Condensation is the change of substance from gas to liquid. During the condensation process, the gas releases heat (heat energy), so it turns into a liquid.

    Type of Dew or Condensation

    It turns out that the dew itself has a type. As for the type of condensation which is divided into two types, namely exterior condensation and interior condensation:

    1. Exterior Condensation

    Exterior condensation is a condensation that occurs when moist air touches a cold surface such as glass.

    2. Interior Condensation

    Interior condensation is a condensation that occurs when there is too much air humidity in a closed room, so that when directly compared to the amount of warm air in the room it will cause warm air.

    Process of Condensation

    The process of condensation or condensation occurs when water vapor in the air passes through a surface that is much colder than a water vapor dew point, then this water vapor condenses into water droplets or dew. The process of cloud formation is the result of condensation.

    The rise of water vapor is due to sunlight condensing in the air. This is because the air above the earth’s surface is much lower than a water vapor dew point.

    The process of condensation that occurs is what causes clouds to form. Normally, for condensation to take place, the atmosphere needs to be completely saturated. In other words, a vapor pressure must reach a maximum. In addition to saturated clouds, the nature of water must have a surface on which water can condense.

    Meanwhile, in the atmosphere, condensation often occurs around dusty particles or other particles such as smoke or even microscopic bacteria.

    Impact of Condensation

    In general, condensation is one of the biggest causes of short circuits, because with condensation, it will create water dew inside the unit board which can cause bad contact on a device or worse cause a short circuit.

    For this reason, the recommended temperature for the temperature of the room where the medical equipment is located is 17°C-20°C, even for the control panel room on a large unit such as CT Scan or MRI of course requires special temperature monitoring even if it is equipped with room exhaust or cooler packets in units.

    A temperature change that is too drastic, for example from a very cold temperature of 16°C to a much warmer room temperature such as 23°C, will likely cause condensation. If this is allowed to continue, not only can it cause a short circuit, but it can cause the equipment to be easily damaged.

    Examples of Condensation in Everyday Life

    Here are some examples of condensation in everyday life.

    1. Condensation in the Morning

    Condensation in the morning when we see wet leaves or grass when at night there is no rain or dew drops that appear on the wall of the glass if the glass is filled with cold water. Condensation in the tent occurs due to the presence of water in the form of steam as a result of the breathing process.

    The tighter the conditions of the tent, the more severe the possibility of condensation will occur due to respiratory vapors trapped in the tent walls. The formation of water droplets through condensation from water vapor in the clouds. These water droplets will then fall in the form of rain.

    2. Drop in Temperature at Night

    At night and in the morning, the temperature tends to cool down. Earth’s air contains water vapor in it. The more water vapor content, the more humid the air. This causes water vapor that is trapped in the air to condense or condense, producing dew drops.

    3. Cloud and Rain Formation Process

    According to the US Geological Survey , clouds form in the atmosphere because air containing water vapor rises and cools. Water vapor in the form of gas rises to the atmosphere due to evaporation. Height in the atmosphere causes less pressure, indirectly lowering air temperature.

    As a result, the temperature of the air at the top of the atmosphere is colder than the temperature of the earth’s surface. When the water vapor reaches the top of the atmosphere, the water vapor then cools, turns into water droplets and forms clouds.

    4. Water Drops on Cold Drinks

    Cold drinks have a lower temperature than room temperature. When placed at room temperature, the water vapor in the air around the cold drink will condense and condense. Condensed water vapor turns into liquid water.

    This is the reason why canned drinks or cold drinks in glasses always drip water. Not because the packaging of the cold drink leaked, but because the water vapor around it condensed.

    5. Fog on Glasses

    Misty glasses are the use of glasses when eating warm food and drinks. This is because hot water vapor from food and drink rises towards the face and meets the colder air. So, the water vapor condenses, forming small droplets of water vapor. The water vapor drops then stick to the glasses and make them foggy.

    6. Fog on the Car Window

    A foggy car window is an example of an everyday occurrence that shows condensation. According to Sciencing, the air inside the car is warmer and contains a lot of water vapor from the breath of its passengers.

    While the car glass temperature is colder because it is affected by the open air. The water vapor that is close to the car glass then condenses, becoming a fog that covers the car glass.

    7. Heated Sugarcane Drip Liquid

    8. Dew on Foliage

    Drops of water (dew) on the leaves in the morning. Although there was no rain the night before, in the morning there were water drops on the plants outside. The occurrence of dew in the morning helps the process of distillation (distillation) of certain substances.

    9. Gases that Become Dew

    The vaporized gas is flowed into a cold container, so that the gas turns into dew which then becomes alcohol water.

    10. Drops of Water on the Pot

    There are water droplets on the lid of the pot because the pot is hot.

    11. Dew on Bathroom Glass

    Bathroom glass will be watery if exposed to hot water vapor.

    Changes in Appearance Other than Condensation

    Basically, the changes that happen around us are not only condensation, but there is still much more. For more details, it will be explained in the discussion below.

    Melting

    In addition to condensation, there is also a change in the form of other objects, including melting. Melting is a change in the state of a solid to a liquid due to a hot temperature. Some events around you can show this event (melting). One of them is ice that melts when left at room temperature or warm temperature

    Here is an example of melting namely:

    1. Heated ice cubes or ice cream that is left continuously in an open space will melt over time.
    2. A candle that is lit will eventually melt because it is heated.

    Yawning

    The next change in the form of matter is the change in the form of evaporation. Evaporation is the change of form of a liquid into a gas. This event is easy to find when there is cooking activity. When the water is heated on the stove in a few seconds, the water will boil.

    The boiling event is an example of the occurrence of evaporation or change from a liquid to a gas at the same time, there is a reduction in the volume of water.

    Here are examples of yawning among others

    1. Evaporation on clothes that have been dried in the sun.
    2. Gasoline that is left open will eventually run out because it turns into gas.

    Sublime

    Sublimation is a change in the state of a gas to a solid. The “disappearance” of Barus camphor placed in the cupboard is often used as an example of sublimation. An example of this event occurs when it is cooled to a certain temperature.

    Here is an example of sublimation:

    1. Camphor that is placed in the wardrobe for a long time will run out.
    2. Air fresheners that last for a long time run out of air.

    Freezing

    The change from solid to liquid is called freezing. In this case, the liquid object is cooled to its freezing point, then it will change into a solid object. In this event, the substance releases heat energy.

    Here is an example of freezing:

    1. Water that is put in the refrigerator, over time will turn into ice.
    2. Gelatin powder that is dissolved in hot water will harden over time if left to cool.

    Crystallize

    Crystallization is a change in form from a gas to a solid. In this event, the substance releases heat energy.

    Here is an example of crystallisation:

    1. The vapor in the air turns into snow.
    2. Ice flowers attached to the wall of the freezer.

    Snow Formation. An example of crystallization events in everyday life is the formation of snow and ice directly from water vapor in saturated clouds without having to turn into liquid water first.

    That is, solid snow is formed directly from water vapor which is a gas. The process of snow formation by crystallization occurs at low temperatures, which is around minus 12 to minus 15°C.

    Frost, during the winter, is often seen ice formed on the roof of the house and plant leaves. The ice is frost formed through a crystallization event. Where the ambient temperature is very cold, so water vapor (gas phase) immediately crystallizes and turns into ice (solid phase) on the surface of things. Water vapor freezes without melting first.

    Black soot on vehicle exhaust. An example of the next crystallizing event is the presence of black soot on the muffler. Not only on exhausts, black soot is also often seen in fireplaces or machines that use fossil fuels such as petroleum, coal and natural gas.

    Black soot is black carbon. According to the Climate and Clean Air Coalition, black carbon or black soot is the result of incomplete combustion of fossil fuels and biomass. Black carbon is formed as a result of combustion gas that crystallizes and turns into black particles and forms soot in the exhaust of motor vehicles.

    Dry ice is often used as a cooling agent, making various foods, also making fog and smoke effects in a show. The formation of dry ice is an example of a crystallization or deposition event. According to Encyclopedia Britannica, dry ice is made from carbon dioxide gas that is compressed and turns solid at a temperature of around minus 57 degrees Celsius.

    Conclusion

    When we see dew, we will certainly be very happy, especially since dew is believed to have many benefits, especially for eye health. Because of this, not a few people have dew in their eyes in the morning, are you one of them? Dew itself has several types, namely interior and exterior condensation.

     

  • The Meaning of Plant Grafting together with the Ways and Benefits

    The Meaning of Plant Grafting together with the Ways and Benefits

    In the process of obtaining quality fruit, it is necessary to do some efforts that we are familiar with by grafting plants. Plant grafting is a method of artificial vegetative propagation. The breeding method aims to obtain results that are more or less the same as the parent, or even better.

    Meaning of Plant Grafting

    The process of grafting plants is a fairly simple and easy breeding process. The process of grafting plants can even be done by people who don’t understand much about plantations, but on the condition that the person understands the steps involved in grafting.

    Grafting is one of the fastest solutions to grow roots on plant stems. Therefore, most of the grafting process uses twigs that are not too large. Grafting has the main purpose of producing fruit more quickly with the growth of the plant not being too large.

    F. Rahardi in his book entitled In order for plants to bear fruit quickly revealed that grafting can only be applied to dicotyledonous or dicotyledonous types of seed plants. In order to get high-quality results, the branches or twigs that will be used in grafting must not be too old or too young.

    Steps to Plant Grafting

    Well, before doing the grafting process, there are some things that are done and observed.

    1. Choose the parent plant to be grafted.

    This selection is the most important step. The good and bad result of grafting is determined from the selection of the parent plant. Therefore, before grafting it is expected to ensure that the parent plant that will be used in grafting has good quality.

    2. Choose twigs or plant stems that are straight.

    There are several conditions that need to be observed before choosing a stem for grafting, namely that the stem is not too old or too young. In addition, the selected plant stems should be straight and get enough sunlight. The selection of the plant stem here has the purpose so that the photosynthesis process in the plant can run well and can accelerate root growth on the grafted plant stem.

    3. Peel the skin on the plant stem

    The first step to be done in this stage is to peel the bark 5 cm long. The trunk or twig or branch to be used must be peeled off the skin. Make sure the stem of the plant is clean of the attached bark.

    4. Clean the cambium on the plant stem

    The cambium on the stem or twig or branch of the plant should be cleaned around it with a knife first. The easiest technique to clean the cambium content on the plant stem is to feel the part of the plant stem. If the plant stem feels rough, then it can be confirmed that the plant stem is clean from the cambium.

    5. Leave the plant stem for 1 day.

    This step needs to be done so that the stems of the plants that have been peeled can dry and be resistant to diseases and fungi. At this stage, what needs to be ensured is the cambium content on the plant stem, hopefully the plant stem is clean and there is no cambium attached. This step will be beneficial so that the grafting results can grow well in producing high-quality and high-quality seeds.

    6. Covering the plant stem

    The next step is to wrap the plant stem with plastic or use coconut coir. Packaging can be done by first tying the bottom of the plant stem that has been peeled off. After making a rope at the bottom of the plant stem, the next thing is to fill the plant stem with soil. Land use is expected to be fertile land. Finally, wrap the top with plastic or coconut coir until it resembles a capsule.

    7. Watering plants routinely and regularly.

    The process of transplanting plants requires patience and diligence. Things that can be done so that the grafting process can be faster and the graft can immediately produce roots, which is to do routine and regular watering. It is not allowed to let the soil in it experience dryness due to lack of water intake. Besides. The thing that can be done to make the soil more fertile is adding fertilizer.

    8. Wait until the roots grow.

    Well, the signs that the grafting process has been successful is that the plant stem produces brown roots growing out of the wrapper. Once the roots have come out, it can be confirmed that the stem of the grafted plant can be cut and then sown.

    Benefits of grafting plants

    As mentioned above, the process of grafting plants is a quick way to produce beautiful fruits and flowers. Plus, combining two plants into one will make the plant stronger and resistant to various diseases and fungi. But, behind the superiority of grafting plants, grafting also has disadvantages that need to be noted.

    Here are some advantages and disadvantages of the grafting process.

    Advantages:

    Proportionate height

    The grafted plant will have a lower height than its parent. Plants that are tall but can already bear fruit or flower make plants easier to treat and not messy.

    Fruiting or flowering fresh and lush

    Grafted plants will be faster to bear fruit or flower. In addition, because the grafting process comes from a quality parent, the fruit or flower produced will also be better when compared to the parent.

    Quality like parent

    The process of grafting plants will not reduce the quality of the parent, in fact the grafted plant will have the same or even better quality than the parent.

    Disadvantages:

    The parent is broken.

    The grafting process will not actually reduce the quality of the parent, but what needs to be noted is excessive peeling on the stem of the parent plant. As a result of being peeled more than used, it can make the parent damaged and even die.

    Prone to death.

    After the graft takes out the roots and is ready to cut and sow. The thing to pay attention to is maintenance. Grafted plants must be given special care and cannot be neglected. Newly sown grafted plants are not as strong as plants sown from seeds, therefore, special and diligent care must be taken so that the plants can grow optimally.

    Well, knowledge about the advantages and disadvantages of grafting plants is very necessary, considering that there are many things that need to be observed so that plants can grow lushly and develop well. It’s like taking care of a child, plants that are still small and just growing need special attention, which is certainly different from plants that have grown. Therefore, the key to successful grafting is the perseverance of the owner.

    The difference between layering and grafting

    In fact, there are many and varied ways of grafting. The naming of grafting is also different, from layering, grafting, to transplantation.

    Here are the differences in the ways of grafting plants.

    1. Layering

    Layering is a way of grafting plants by planting plant branches that are still connected to the parent plant to be used as roots and grow new plants. After the graft takes root, the stem of the plant is then cut to be sown.

    2. Grafting

    Grafting is a method of grafting that combines two different types of plants into one. Many people do Grafting to produce fruit or flowers that are fresher and more lush.

    3. Transplantation

    Transplantation is a method of grafting by moving plants from one place to another. In the process of transplanting, you will usually need new soil and pots.

    Once again, thoroughness in performing the method of grafting and treating grafted plants is the key to successful grafting. Therefore, the correct knowledge of the basic techniques of grafting is the best step before starting to graft plants

    Artificial Vegetative Reproduction

    Reproduction basically means making again. In the field of plants, reproduction can usually be interpreted as breeding or in other words extending the lineage, It should be noted that reproduction in plants can take place in two ways, namely Sexually (Generative) and Asexually (vegetative).

    • Sexual (Generative): This means that new plants that grow are the result of the Fertilization process. Fertilization itself can be interpreted as the fusion of male gamete cells and female gamete cells. Simply put, this process is common and common as a marriage process.
    • Vegetative means, new plants that are produced without going through the fertilization process. Vegetative itself can be divided into two types, namely natural vegetative and artificial vegetative.

    Natural vegetative can be done with special means or tools. Natural vegetative growth usually occurs in meristem cells. The natural way of vegetative reproduction is by: rhizome rooting, stolons, stem tubers, layered tubers, root tubers, buds and adventitious buds.

    While Artificial Vegetative is a breeding process that is successful due to getting help from outside parties, or humans. Artificial vegetation can also occur due to human engineering. Artificial vegetative reproduction has a specific purpose, such as to obtain superior seeds as desired.

    Interestingly, artificial vegetative reproduction is not only grafting. Here are five methods of artificial vegetative reproduction, namely grafting, sticking (oculation), connecting, cuttings, and bending down.

    The following are the methods of artificial vegetative reproduction:

    1. Grafting

    As discussed above, grafting is one of the fastest processes to multiply plants in artificial vegetative propagation. The end result of grafting is making the trunk or branch of a tree produce roots. Briefly, the grafting step is to peel off a little bark of the tree and then wrap it with coconut coir or plastic and sprinkle it with soil.

    Plants that can be grafted are only dicot plants or dicots. The most commonly grafted plants are oranges, guava, mango, rambutan, or durian.

    2. Steak

    Cuttings are one of the artificial vegetative propagation. Steps to cut the plant can be done by cutting on one part of the plant. Further, the cuttings of the plant can be directly planted on the plant stem that has been opened with a knife.

    Cuttings are one of the fastest and most common ways to propagate plants. Plants that are cut are usually ornamental plants and fruit plants, such as grapes, passion fruit, apples or peppers.

    3. Oculation

    Oculation is one of the methods often used to multiply plant seeds. Oculation can be done by sticking a piece of tree bark that has buds from the upper trunk on a slice of another tree bark. Usually, tree bark is taken from the lower trunk. This is meant for the plant to unite and become a new plant.

    Some people usually use inoculation as one of the techniques to improve plant quality in an artificial vegetative way. Just like other methods, artificial vegetative propagation by means of occulation aims to obtain superior quality plant seeds.

    4. Connecting

    Connecting plants is one way to multiply plants. This process itself can be done by combining the upper stem and lower stem of two similar plants. The purpose of the self-fertilization process is to combine the superior properties of two plants. It is hoped to obtain a plant that has superior properties.

    The joining technique is usually used for vegetable crops such as tomatoes and eggplants. In addition, it is also widely used for fruit crops such as coffee, cassava, or mango.

    5. Bend down

    Bending over is also one of the techniques used to multiply plants. The bending process uses a technique by bending the stem or branch into the ground to be piled with soil. However, the tip of the plant is still removed to the soil surface. In this breeding process, the tree trunks used must be old or mature trunks.

    The process of prostrate reproduction is usually applied to plants that have long and flexible stems or branches. The plants that are commonly used for breeding are bent over, namely betel nut. The way of bending down to make cambium on the plant stem does not need to be removed, because it has been removed by the soil naturally.

  • Understanding Memos: Purpose, Types, Features, Sections, and Writing Tips

    Understanding Memos: Purpose, Types, Features, Sections, and Writing Tips

    Meaning of Memo – Surely Reader is no stranger to what a memo is. If Reader thinks that a memo is usually written on a small note paper or sticky note and then pasted on a book or an item as an important note to be read, that thought is not wrong.

    Broadly speaking, a memo is indeed a reminder or a brief note about a problem that is being discussed. But it turns out, the memo is not just a simple note because the memo has two functions, which are official and unofficial.

    Then, what is the meaning of the memo? What about the official and unofficial functions of a memo?

    Well, for Reader to understand that, let’s read the following review!

    Meaning of Memo

    According to Keraf (1980), the memo stands for memorandum and has various meanings, namely (1) memorandum means an informal note or reminder letter, (2) memorandum means a statement of diplomatic relations, and (3) memorandum means a form of communication aimed at to advice, instructions, or explanations.

    Meanwhile, based on KBBI (Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia), this memo or memorandum is a form of communication that contains suggestions, instructions, or explanations in the form of notes. In addition, memos can also be used as a statement in diplomatic relations.

    Not only that, a memo or memorandum can also be used by the leadership of an organization or company in an effort to deliver a short message in the form of a notification or request in an organization or company.

    Well, based on some of the definitions that have been explained, it can be concluded that a memo is a form of communication through short messages that are usually in the form of suggestions, notifications, requests, and written in a note.

    In practice, it is very rare for employees to give a memo to their superiors, especially in an organization or business enterprise.

    Meanwhile, in the legal realm, a memorandum report usually has one to three pages only. If there is more than one page, efforts should be made to summarize it so that the reader does not have to read the entire information.

    Purpose of Memo Writing

    The purpose of writing a memo is to request or provide information to someone to be addressed. For example, Ana wants to write a memo to her father that she is going to college, so the purpose of writing the memo is to notify her father that she is going to college.

    Types of Memos

    Previously, it was explained that the memo was official and unofficial. Official memos are usually written by companies with important contexts or matters. While on informal memos, written personally. Well, here is the description.

    1. Official Memo

    As the name suggests, in an official memo the context is definitely an important matter. Usually this type of memo is used as a statement as an official link between the leader and his subordinates, in a company, institution or agency.

    2. Informal Memo/ Personal Memo

    Next is an unofficial memo or it can also be called a personal memo. It is called so because usually the contents of the notification are unofficial matters, and are addressed to friends, relatives, family, even the closest people.

    Characteristics of a Memo

    Memos are fundamentally different from notice boards. Well the following are the characteristics of a memo.

    • Contains suggestions, instructions, or explanations about something
    • The information presented is clear and relevant
    • In an official memorandum, it has parts like a letter, but simpler
    • In an unofficial memorandum, the identity of the office is not included (name of the office, telephone number, office address)
    • Delivered horizontally (parties with equivalent positions), as well as vertically (from superiors to subordinates, or vice versa)
    • The language used is shorter, more concise, and simpler

    Sections of the Memo

    Previously, it was explained that a memo is a short message. Despite this, memos still have certain parts, especially in official memos. Well here is the description.

    • Head part

    Just like humans, a memo also has a head that is located on top. The head of this memo consists of the memo header, the name of the sender, and the name of the recipient of the memo.

    • Content section

    The next part is the body of the memo which consists of the information to be conveyed by the sender to the recipient.

    • Closing Section

    The last part is the closing part or the foot of the memo. The footer of this memo consists of the date the memo was written, the signature, and the clear name of the memo maker.

    Signing is very necessary, especially on official memos, because it shows that the information contained in the memo is important information in an official context.

    General Structure In A Memorandum

    When talking about the memorandum, the context must be official. Although memos and memorandums are actually the same thing, many people think that memos are related to informal contexts, while memorandums are related to official contexts.

    1. Memo letterhead

    This section later contains a brief explanation related to from and for whom the memo was made. The header of the memo usually contains the name of the maker, the purpose of the memo, the subject of the memo or topic, and the date.

    In the placement of dates should be actual.

    2. Introduction

    Next is the introductory structure located in the first paragraph of a memo. This introduction contains information about the purpose of the memo without being verbose. For example, a sentence such as “I am writing this memo to request approval regarding…”

    It should be known that the memo is to-the-point information, so that the delivery should also be to the point.

    3. Details

    The next structure is detailed. In this structure contains details of the purpose or subject of the memo which can be placed in the paragraph after the introduction. Similar to the introductory structure, the details should also be simple.

    For example: ” Along with the growth of the company and business, we have a new target market as of today … … 2022, so as the main director, I decided to separate the video and promotional content team from the marketing division. Furthermore, this team will move as an independent division effective from today ”

    4. Closing

    In the last structure of a memo, it must contain the contact number of the party that can be contacted in relation to the contents of the memo. For example, a memo containing permission to use the building for a festival event, then the closing part should have the contact of the relevant official clearly when the permission is approved.

    An example sentence: ” When permission is approved, please be willing to contact the Business Manager via the following email address… For his attention, I thank you and have a good job “.

    Tips for Compiling a Memo

    Specifically for an official memo, the compilation should use effective standard language, because the use of this memo is in an official context.

    • When you want to write a memo, it’s best to write it briefly and concisely, straight to the point.
    • Use language that is appropriate for who will receive it. When the receiver is someone with a certain position, use standard and effective language. However, when the recipient is the closest person in an informal context, can use everyday language but must be polite and clear in content.
    • Don’t forget to include the name of the memo maker clearly so that the existence of the memo can be accounted for.
    • Also include the recipient’s name so that the memo is not misdirected.

    Sample Memo

    Sample Official School Memo

    NEO CULTURE ZONE HIGH SCHOOL

    Jl. Citizen No.127 Tanjung Karang Barat

    Tel. (081) 332344 Email: culturezonehighschool@gmail.com

    MEMO

    From: Principal

    To: Head of SMA Neo Culture Zone

    I would like to discuss with you about the implementation of the Annual Festival in the framework of the 23rd School Anniversary which will last for three days. This discussion is to discuss the students so that they can better prepare for the Annual Festival.

    The discussion will be held on October 22, 2019. It is requested that you and all OSIS members prepare data about the Festival’s readiness. God willing, this discussion will be held later in the day after the second break in the OSIS room. That’s it and thank you.

    Bekasi, October 22, 2022

    Principal

    Kuncoro

    Sample Enterprise Memo

    PT Eska Lokal

    Jl. Jendral Sudirman No. 18 Depok

    Tel. 0212121212

    MEMO

    From: Managing Director

    To: Financial Staff

    Please prepare this month’s financial report. The report will be used as evaluation material with the board of directors which will be held at the monthly meeting, on December 19, 2019, at 10.00 WIB, in the office hall.

    The financial report still needs a lot to be prepared, so I really hope that you and all the staff can prepare the report as soon as possible. Don’t forget to send a soft copy of the report to my email. That’s it and thank you.

    Depok, December 13, 2021

    Principal Director

    Chandra Bayuji

    Example of an Organizational Memo

    Central Java Education Office

    State Vocational High School 1 Solo

    MEMO

    May 22, 2021

    From: Principal

    To : The entire Council of Teachers and School Staff

    It is requested for the entire council of teachers and staff to participate in reminding the students of SMK Negeri 1 Solo in the movement of neatness, such as putting on a shirt, wearing uniform black shoes, and neatness of hair, this is done so that the students become trained and accustomed to always appear neat in while in the school environment and outside of school. Thank you.

    Principal

    Kirino Saputra

    Well, that’s a comment on the meaning of memos and examples . If you often write notes on a sticky note and stick it on the fridge or table when you want to leave, that also includes a memo, which is an unofficial memo.

     

  • The Meaning of National Science: Systematics, and the Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences

    The Meaning of National Science: Systematics, and the Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences

    Meaning of National Knowledge – Friends of Reader, are there any of you who have a focus of interest in studying the country? Studying the country is a fundamental part of studying the building of national science. By studying the science of the state, we have opened the gates of other state sciences, such as the science of state administration law and the science of state law.

    That is why, many scientists say that national science is a “knowledge gate” to the next national science. It is the same as studying politics which is a basic part of studying the building of political science.

    Similarly, studying law is the main part of studying law. We will know that studying or understanding a country will expand our way to understand a country. Therefore, understanding the concepts of the country first becomes the main prerequisite in learning the science of the country.

    Below will be an explanation of the meaning, systematics, and the connection of national science with other sciences.

    Meaning of National Science

    National science is a science that belongs to the group of social sciences that study the origin, purpose, formation, and disappearance of the state in a general, abstract, and universal way. Further explanation can be presented as follows.

    1. National science “studying the country in general”, meaning discussion using general arguments, that is the general understanding of the country. If it is applied to the countries in the world, the above argument is generally agreed as a valid statement;
    2. National science “studying the country abstractly”, meaning in its description it presents the country as a value. In this case, what is observed is not just a country, but the country in general. Thus, the science of the state is distinguished from the science of state planning or state administration and the science of government. These three sciences study a country in a real situation, for example the constitution of Indonesia, the administration of Indonesia, and the government of Indonesia;
    3. National science “studying the country universally”, meaning the values ​​that exist and apply anywhere.

    From the description above, it can be stated that national science is science. The meaning of science here is the result of human thought that is objective and organized systematically. A science has the following characteristics.

    1. Being objective, it means that science must also be able to pursue the truth that can be generally accepted;
    2. Being systematic, it means that the understandings obtained cannot be separated, but are a close and whole unity.

    National Science Systematics

    A scholar named George Jellinek, in his book entitled Algemeine Staatslehre , revealed that national science has the following systematics.

    1. National science as s taatswissenschaft (science in the narrow sense), which investigates the country in an abstract and general state;
    2. National science as rechtswissenschaft (science in a broad sense), which is divided into two categories, namely individual staaslehre (science that investigates a specific country), for example studying state institutions, the judiciary, and so on; as well as pezielle staaslehre (science whose research is aimed at the country in a general sense, as well as representative institutions that are studied specifically).

    George Jellinek.

    George Jellinek is the figure who first formulated national science as a science that stands on its own. This caused him to be nicknamed “the father of national science.” This then raises a question, namely “Has national science been studied as science before the systematization done by George Jellinek?”

    In this case, the answer to the question still raises speculation because at that time national science has not yet become an independent science and its nature is still descriptive or includes all knowledge related to the state. Questions such as religion, politics, culture, morality, and economy related to the country are included in the discussion of national science.

    This can be known from the works of Plato and Aristotle in Ancient Greece in the book titled Politeia and Politica , which talks about the issues of the state in it. At that time, the object that was observed and studied was the city state (city state) which is known as the police with a territory that is not as large and the number of people is not many.

    It is not surprising if all issues related to the country can be compiled and poured into a work that discusses the country. However, that condition in its development could no longer be maintained due to the emergence of the nation state , with the boundaries of sovereignty expanding and reaching even larger territories and populations.

    As a result of this condition, there is a need for lessons about the country that need to be systematized in independent science.

    Regarding learning in Indonesia, national science was introduced by Universitas Gadjah Mada (UGM) in 1946. When compiling the study material for the law faculty, UGM compared it with the Rechstsschool (law school) located in Jakarta. However, the curriculum structure was found to be incompatible with the reality of independence and then a comparison was sought at the University of Leiden, the Netherlands.

    In relation to that, the initial lecture on national science was named Staatsleer (the term national science which comes from the Dutch language) which covers the main issues about the state and is free from colonial reality. In further development, there are also those who use the term “Theory of the Nation”, especially in the study of political science to systematize the object of research on the country.

     

    The Relation of National Science with Other Sciences

    National science has been taught for a long time, but it was only at the beginning of the 20th century that it was compiled as a systematic science by George Jellinek. With the development of the social situation as taught by Herbert Spencer, there is also a need for branches of science that conduct specific research on certain fields.

    With that statement, national science then has a relationship with other branches of science, among others with the science of constitutional law, the science of state administrative law, political science, and economic science.

    1. The relationship between State Science and State Law

    It has been stated that national science has a general research object regarding the growth, existence, formation, and disappearance of the country or it can also be about a specific country. This is the similarity between the science of the state and the science of constitutional law, that is, they both have the object of research in the form of the state.

    However, the object of research in the science of constitutional law is more concrete because it is bound to time, place, situation, and certain arrangements, for example the constitutional law of Indonesia, the constitutional law of the United States, and so on. Some parties even say emphatically that the science of constitutional law is law about the organization of the state.

    This is what causes the details of discussion in the science of constitutional law to be linked to state organs, relations between state organs, citizenship, the validity of laws, and so on. Thus, the connection between the two branches of knowledge is the same in its object, but the issues discussed are different.

    Of course, in order to learn the science of constitutional law, you must have a sufficient introduction to the subjects related to the joints of the state, all of which are found in the science of the state.

    2. The relationship between State Science and State Administration Law

    In general, administrative law is defined as the law that regulates the relationship between administrative organs and citizens. The areas that are the focus of the discussion are licensing, state officials, taxes, registration that creates rights, and so on.

    Thus, what is learned from the science of national administration law is the same as the science of the state, namely the state. The difference is that political science examines the basic elements of the state in general and abstract terms, while the legal science of state administration actually examines “the state in motion”, that is the relationship between (organs of) the state and society.

    For this reason, the knowledge of the state becomes the basis for learning the law of state administration, because to learn the latter, it also requires basic concepts related to the state.

    3. Relationship between National Science and Political Science

    Political science is a branch of science that studies issues related to the state. The object of his study is grundlagen (conditions for the establishment of the state), wesen (state essence), e rscheinungsformen (formations of the state), and landesentwicklung (state development).

    However, not all things that intersect with the state studied by a branch of science can be categorized as political science, but become a supporting element in the study of politics, for example:

    • History, especially that which concerns people or the country, is not part of the discipline of political science, unless it concerns the history of statecraft or the constitution. The behavior of community life, individual actions, history of literature, science, economic conditions, morality, military, diplomatic struggle, all of these cannot be categorized into a part of political science;
    • Statistics, especially those related to societal social problems, are not part of the discipline of political science;
    • Economic politics, especially those related to economic law and applied to individuals, are not related to the state, so they are not part of the discipline of political science;
    • Social studies, especially those related to identity, are not related to the state, so they are not part of the discipline of political science.

    Based on the Greek tradition, political science is called the term politiki . Furthermore, in Germany, studies were developed on s tasrecht (public law) and politics ( politics) as two different branches of science. Later, other differentiations developed, such as political statistics, administration, international relations, and so on.

    In its development, especially in the practice of learning, there is a difference between the object of study of political science in Europe, especially England and France, and in the United States. In learning in Europe, they take the root of the material in Ancient Greece, so the character of the material is conservative and normative. As for the study of political science in the United States, it already has a more specific meaning, which is about certain symptoms related to other countries.

    Meanwhile, political science in Indonesia until the 1960s was still taught by legal scholars, so the nature of the study was analytical and normative. It was only later with Miriam Budiardjo’s initiative and the establishment of an independent faculty that political science began to establish its object of study which has more special characteristics than the object of study of national science in the Faculty of Law.

    Although the method and institutionalization of the idea of ​​study differ from one country to another, in general it can be said that the object of political science study is about the country. This is where his attachment to national science lies. National science in this case provides a basic understanding of the main issues of the country, while the study of certain aspects of the country is empirically done by political science.

    In the subsequent growth, the object of study of political science becomes the provisions that apply in a certain country, so that in its development it will be studied by the science of constitutional law.

     

    4. Relationship between National Science and Economics

    The question of the role of the state or government in the economic field has for a long time given rise to an ideological debate between the four main schools of the world economy, namely laissez faire (let it happen), socialism, modern liberalism, and modern conservatism. However, the fundamental question that is being questioned is what kind of role is played in terms of government ownership and management in the economic field.

    Laissez Faire trend

    Some economists are of the view that laissez faire is the same as capitalism, even though capitalism itself is not a political ideology, but rather an economic system dominated by the private sector, especially in terms of production methods, distribution of production products, and the exchange of goods and services.

    Laissez faire in the Western world is a political ideology that is completely dependent on capitalism, which in its development always strives for capitalism itself to become an economic system.

    Currents of Modern Liberalism

    The understanding of classical capitalism then gets criticism and a sharp spotlight. A group of thinkers began to question the economic system of classical liberalism which is seen as more inclined to emphasize the notion of freedom form (free from) state or government intervention in economic affairs.

    This tendency is later referred to as negative freedom (freedom that is negative) because the emphasis on freedom from actually consumes freedom itself. On the other hand, what is needed is an economic system that emphasizes freedom to (free to) in the context of the role of the state or government in all areas of the economy.

    In further development, freedom to is known as positive freedom , which encourages the government to seriously and realistically provide guarantees of freedom of life for all levels of society.

    Modern Conservative Trend

    The trend of conservatism has a different view. This trend basically deals with efforts to preserve traditional values ​​and institutions. The strange question they face is the various radical changes driven by classical liberals in the 19th century.

    Adherents of conservatism believe that society should continue to run as it is. However, the holders of power are the aristocracy, not the emerging business groups.

    Trend of Socialism

    The view of socialists about freedom and competition is different from other trends. Because freedom and competition are very closely related to the social structure as a whole, freedom and competition
    in an unfair social order will strengthen the injustice itself.

    Therefore, the state or government cannot and should not take a certain role more actively so that the weak parties can be protected from the strong parties because they have power. Morally and politically, government intervention in the economic field can be justified and is absolute so that justice and common prosperity can be created for all members of society.

    Well, that’s the information about the Meaning, Systematics, and Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences . National science is a science that studies the basic concepts and joints of the national system in general. The study covers the same or similar things in the countries that exist or have existed in this world, for example about the emergence of the country, the disappearance of the country, the purpose and function of the country, the development of the country, the form of the country, and so on.

  • Meaning of Social Media, History, Functions, Types, Benefits, and Development

    Meaning of Social Media, History, Functions, Types, Benefits, and Development

    Meaning of Social Media – In today’s age, it cannot be denied that human life today is very much related to social media. Social media plays an important role in almost all walks of life. Starting from sending messages to friends, sharing information, to finding information that is hot in the community. So, it is not surprising when someone mentions that social media has become one of the important needs of almost everyone.

    The presence of social media in today’s society has provided enormous benefits, especially in the current pandemic era. Social media is quite helpful in erasing the distance between people, so it is very effective in shortening the time in communicating. However, something that has a high positive impact, does not close the possibility of giving a high negative impact as well.

    Well, the following will be explained about the ins and outs of social media, starting from the meaning of social media to all aspects. For those of you who want to learn more about social media, this article will be very suitable to help you understand what social media actually is.

    A. Meaning of Social Media

    Social media can be understood as a digital platform that provides facilities to perform social activities for each user. Some activities that can be done on social media, for example, communication or interaction to provide information or content in the form of writing, photos and videos. Various information in the shared content can be open to all users for a full 24 hours.

    Social media itself is basically part of the development of the internet. The presence of the past few decades has made social media able to develop and grow widely and quickly as it is now. This is what makes all users who are connected to the internet able to disseminate information or content anytime and anywhere.

    B. Meaning of Social Media According to Members

    Social media can actually be said to be one of the popular phenomena that attracts a lot of people’s attention. In some of his works, experts have given various definitions about the technology that society always needs today. The following is the definition of social media according to the opinion of experts, including:

    1. BK Lewis (2010)

    BK Lewis in his work titled Social Media and Strategic Communication Attitudes and Perceptions among College Students published in 2010 states that social media is a label that refers to digital technology that has the potential to make everyone connect and interact, produce and share order.

    2. Chris Brogan (2010)

    Furthermore, in 2010, Chris Brogan in his book entitled Social Media 101: Tactics and Tips to Develop Your Business, mentioned that social media is a communication tool that contains various possibilities for the creation of new forms of interaction.

    3. Dave Kerpen (2011)

    Meanwhile, Dave Kerpen in his book titled Likeable Social Media which was published in 2011 stated that social media has a definition as a place where pictures, videos, writings and interaction relationships in the network, both between individuals and between groups such as organizations.

    C. History of Social Media

    Quoted from the online site maryville.edu, the beginning of the creation of social media itself occurred on May 24, 1844. The beginning of social media was a series of electronic dots and lines typed on a telegraph machine. Also at this time, Samuel Morse sent a telegraphic message to the public for the first time.

    The roots of digital communication, along with the origins of the modern internet and the current understanding of social media, were pioneered by the emergence of the Advanced Research Projects Agency Network (Arpanet) in 1969. This digital network was created by the US Department of Defense to connect scientists from four universities to share with each other. software, hardware, and other data.

    Then, in 1987, the National Science Foundation launched a stronger national digital network called NSFNET. After running for a decade, precisely in 1997, the National Science Foundation launched its first social media platform to the public.

    However, according to The History of Social Networking on the Digital Trends website, the growth and development of the internet around 1980 to 1990 had the potential to introduce online communication services, such as CompuServe, America Online, and Prodigy. This communication service successfully provides users to interact via email, bulletin board messages, and realtime online chat.

    This is one of the driving forces behind the birth of the earliest social media network, namely Six Degrees which launched in 1997. Six Degrees itself is the first social media platform that can make users connect with real world contacts, for example creating a profile in database.

    After the emergence of Six Degrees social media, which turned out to be short-lived. In 2001, the world of communication technology innovated again by presenting a new social media called Friendster. Unlike the fate of its older brother, Friendster managed to attract millions of users by simply registering email addresses and basic online networks.

    Meanwhile, as one of the other early forms of social media communication services, after it was launched in 1999, a weblog or blog called the Livejournal publication site began to attract a lot of interest from many people. gain high popularity. Meanwhile, a few years later, the Blogger publishing platform created by the technology company Pyra Labs was officially bought by Google in 2003.

    Furthermore, in 2002, a social networking service from social media called LinkedIn managed to attract the attention of many users. This social media itself was established for professionals who are developing their careers. After almost two decades, LinkedIn has grown and developed into one of the most famous social media in the world with more than 675 million users worldwide. LinkedIn is currently still a social media site for someone who wants to find a job as well as companies looking for human resources.

    Still in the social network social media, Myspace managed to launch in 2003 and managed to become one of the most visited websites on the planet in 2006. This social media provides facilities for users to share music directly on their profile pages.

    However, precisely in 2008, the power of Myspace was defeated by Facebook. As a giant in the internet world, Google also tried to launch social media in 2012 with the name Google+. It’s just that this social media doesn’t have a long life after it was reported to breach the data security of around 500,000 of its users.

    D. Functions of Social Media

    After knowing and understanding the definition of social media in general and based on experts, in this section you will be explained about the function of social media. As one of the most widely used digital platforms today, social media has managed to connect almost everyone with internet access.

    However, the function of social media is not only limited to that, there are many other functions that you can get from social media. Well, the following are some of the social media functions that Sinaumedia.com can summarize, including:

    1. Communication

    The first function of social media is of course communication. Before growing to this point, social media initially only focused on building a good communication ecosystem for users. However, with the development of the internet and technology, social media is more than just communication, social media has become a second world for people all over the world to gather and interact. Social media has succeeded in developing communication that is not limited by time and geography.

    2. Branding

    The second function of social media is branding. After successfully building a gathering place for all people from various parts of the world, social media is always growing and providing various needs from people, one of which is branding. Branding itself is a person’s way of building an image in the eyes of many people.

    To do branding, users usually have a unique and special way to design social media accounts so that they are attractive to other users. This is what makes social media accounts similar to the real world, because everyone has their own unique characteristics.

    3. Place of Business

    The third function of social media is as a vehicle to do business or business. After successfully providing communication and branding, social media is slowly growing so that every user can build a business in the network or online. As a place that is open for 24 hours, social media is proven to make it very easy for its users to build a virtual business. This is predicted to have a lot of potential to reach more people than businesses that only rely on the real world.

    4. Marketing

    The fourth function of social media is to do marketing or marketing. As a platform that is almost always used by humans, now social media has succeeded in creating services that make it easier for businessmen to introduce and reach more consumers. This method is proven to be effective in increasing profits and making it easier for users to get what they need.

    E. Types of Social Media

    High demand, making many new social media emerging and competing to attract interest and attention from users. The development of social media is also very fast, many social media platforms that used to be very popular, have now slowly disappeared, or been acquired by larger parties. Well, the following are various services and types of social media that are very popular in the community, including:

    1. Blog Services

    Blog services can basically be understood as a personal journal that has internet. One of these types of social media has the function of sharing posts or views of its users about various specific issues. This type of social media user is usually referred to as narablog or blogger. Examples of social media blog services are such as: WordPress, Blogger.

    2. Social Network Services (Social Network)

    Social networking services or commonly referred to as social networks is one of the most widely used social media by people in various parts of the world today. One of these types of social media has a function as a gathering place for many people to socialize with each other. In this service, users usually send each other messages, information, photos, and even videos. Examples of social media services are Facebook and Linkedin.

    3. Micro Blog Services (Microblogging)

    The next type of social media is the service of micro blogs or commonly known as microblogging. Although it has almost the same services and uses as a blog, this type of social media presents a simpler page. This makes the micro blog service have a better speed than the blog service. One example of micro blogging services is Twitter.

    4. Media Sharing Services (Media Sharing)

    The next type of social media that you need to know is media sharing services or commonly referred to as media sharing. When you often spend leisure time or study time through social media platforms YouTube or Soundcloud. So, you have actually gotten used to using this media sharing service. One of these types of social media basically has a main focus to make its users share media content such as photos, audio, or video. Another example of media sharing services is Instagram, Flickr, and so on.

    5. Collaboration Services

    The following types of social media are collaborative services. This collaboration service itself is used to make users mutually invite other users to create a contribution. Not only invite, in this collaboration service, users are usually allowed to create content and make corrections to the content of ‘members’ of the site.

    One example of the most popular contribution service today is Wikipedia. Wikipedia itself is a multilingual encyclopedia project in a network that operates freely and openly. This contribution service is run by the Wikimedia Foundation, which is one of the non-profit organizations located in Florida, United States.

    6. Forum Services

    This last type of social media is known to have a classic form. This type of forum service can be said to be one of the types of social media that has been around for a long time and has been widely known for a long time. The forum service itself can be used by users as a place to discuss various matters or specific topics with other users in a discussion space. Examples of social media forum services are Kaskus, Quora, and so on.

    F. Benefits of Social Media

    After you know and understand various information about the meaning of social media and others, the following will be explained about the benefits you can get from maximizing the use of social media, including:

    1. Means of Learning, Listening, and Delivering

    There are several social media platforms that are now available that you can use to learn, from finding various information, data, to issues that are hot in the community. In addition, you can also use social media as a means to share information with other users, both friends in the real world and friends in the virtual world.

    2. Documentation, Administration, and Integration Tools

    The second benefit you can get from using social media is to create documentation, administration, and integration. Social media applications are basically a place for you to store a variety of content, ranging from profiles, information, reportage, events, recording events, to the results of research studies. Not only that, these are some of the benefits of social media, such as creating an organizational blog, integrating various lines in a company, sharing relevant content according to the target community, and operational effectiveness of the organization.

    3. Means of Planning, Strategy, and Management

    The third benefit of social media is as a means of planning, strategy, and management. In the hands of management and marketing experts, social media can turn into one of the weapons used to launch planning and strategy. For example, to carry out promotions, attract loyal customers, explore the market, educate the public, to gather feedback from consumers or the community.

    4. Means of Control, Evaluation, and Measurement

    Finally, the fourth benefit of social media is as a means of control, evaluation, and measurement. Social media itself can be used to control the organization as well as evaluate, starting from planning and strategy. In addition, social media can also process data related to community and market responses as a measuring tool, calibration and parameters for evaluation.

    This is a discussion about the meaning of social media, starting from the understanding of experts, the history of social media, the function of social media, the types of social media, to the various benefits of social media. Hope it can be useful for you.

     

  • Understanding Mass Media and Its Characteristics as a Means of Communication

    Understanding Mass Media and Its Characteristics as a Means of Communication

    Meaning of Mass Media – We must have a little contact with mass media in carrying out our daily life activities. We consume various types of information, whether from the internet, magazines, or television, especially in this all-digital era that makes everyone able to easily get new information.

    Basically, the process of delivering a message to a wide audience is called mass communication, while the tool or media used is mass media. Well, this article will discuss the meaning, characteristics, and functions of mass media.

    Meaning of Mass Media

    According to the Communication Lexicon , mass media are “means to deliver messages that are directly related to the wider community, for example radio, television, and newspapers”. According to Cangara in his book entitled Introduction to Communication Science , media is a tool or means used to deliver messages from the communicator to the audience, while the meaning of mass media itself is a tool used in delivering messages from the source to the audience by using communication tools, such as letters news, film, radio and television (Cangara, 2010: 123–126).

    Media is the plural form of medium, which means “middle” or “intermediate”, while mass comes from the English language, namely mass which means “group” or “group”. Thus, the meaning of mass media is an intermediary or tools used by the masses in establishing relationships with each other.

    1. Law No. 40 of 1999 about Pars

    Law No. 40 of 1999 on the Press mentions that the press is a social institution and mass communication vehicle that carries out journalistic activities, which includes searching, acquiring, owning, storing, processing, and conveying information, both in the form of writing, voice, image, voice and image, and data and graphics as well as in other forms by using print media, electronic media, and all types of available channels.

    2. Eep Saefulloh Fatah

    Fatah stated that the press is the fourth estate of democracy (the fourth pillar of democracy) and has an important role in building trust, credibility, and even the legitimacy of the government. The press that is meant as the fourth pillar of democracy is the press that has a function, namely as a tool of social control in democratic life.

    The control function makes the function of the press in society stronger. The press is expected to be able to cover both sides (seeing the news from two sides) which must be maintained because the press is a tool of social control for the government, so that the press becomes a medium for conveying the aspirations of the people towards the government.

    The press must also have a gate keeper function , that is to filter every report. It is hoped that the function of the press can provide good education for the community, as well as be a good bridge between the government and the community.

    3. Oemar Seno Adji

    Oemar mentions the press in a narrow sense, which is the broadcasting of thoughts, ideas, or news with the written word, while the press in a broad sense, which includes all mass communications (mass media) that emit someone’s thoughts and feelings, both with words – written and oral words.

    4. Onong Uchjana Effendy

    According to Effendy (2003: 65) in the Theory and Philosophy of Communication , mass media is used in communication
    if the communication is numerous and resides far away. The mass media that are widely used in everyday life are generally newspapers, radio, television, and movie theaters, which operate in the fields of information, education and recreation, or in other words information, education, and entertainment.

    Thus, mass media is a tool to do or disseminate information to a wide, numerous, and heterogeneous communicator. Mass media is a very effective tool in mass communication because it can change attitudes, opinions, and communication behavior. The advantage of communication using mass media is that mass media creates synchronicity, that is, a message can be received by a relatively large number of communicators.

    Characteristics of Mass Media

    Mass media is a means of mass communication. The process of delivering messages, ideas, or mass media information to the public is done simultaneously. A media can be called mass media if it has certain characteristics. Characteristics of mass media according to Cangara (2010: 126–127) include:

    • Being institutional, it means that the party that manages the media consists of many people, starting from the collection, management, to the presentation of information.
    • Being one-way, it means that the communication is less likely to allow dialogue between the sender and receiver. Even if there is a reaction or feedback, it usually takes time and is delayed.
    • Extensive and simultaneous, meaning that it can overcome the obstacles of time and distance because it has speed. Moving widely and simultaneously, that is, the information delivered is received by many people at the same time.
    • Being open, means that the message can be received by anyone and anywhere regardless of age, gender, and ethnicity.
    • Using technical or mechanical equipment, such as radio, television, newspapers, and the like.

    According to Cangara (2010: 76) in his book Introduction to Communication Science , mass communication is one of the types of communication that has a significant difference from other forms of communication. The nature of his message is open to a varied audience, both in terms of age, religion, tribe, occupation, and in terms of needs.

    Mass communication has a number of special features or characteristics, among which are the following.

    1. Institutional Communicator

    Mass media communicators move in complex, but institutionalized organizations. Board of mass communication message delivery through mass media, such as television, newspaper, radio, internet.

    2. Messages of a General Nature

    The messages conveyed in the process of mass communication by the communicator are aimed at a wide audience or all people, not just a group of people. Thus, the process of mass communication is open. This is because communicants are spread in various places. The news message also contains factual elements that are important and interesting for all circles of society, not just a group of people.

    3. Communication is Anonymous and Heterogeneous

    The communicator or recipient of information in mass communication is anonymous and heterogeneous. This is because mass communication conveys a general message to all communities who do not know each other without distinguishing tribes, races, religions, and have various psychological characters, ages, genders, places of residence, cultural customs, and different social strata. -different.

    4. Simultaneous Mass Media

    According to Effendy (2003: 53), the simultaneity of mass media is the simultaneity of contact with a large number of people in a distance from the communicator and the people are separated from each other.

    5. One-way Delivered Messages

    Communication between the communicator and the communicant occurs directly, but the communicator and the communicant do not meet each other and the communicant cannot respond directly. The communicator here handles the communication.

    6. Delayed Feedback

    This happens because between the communicator and the communicant who are not face to face directly. The communicator cannot immediately know the audience’s reaction to the message he has delivered.

    Functions of Mass Media

    1. Elvinaro Ardianto

    According to Elvinaro (2007: 14–17) in Mass Communication An Introduction , the functions of mass media can be divided into five, namely:

    a. Surveillance _

    As a tool to help the public to get warnings from the mass media that inform about threats.

    b. Interpretation (Interpretation)

    The interpretive function is almost similar to the supervisory function. Mass media not only supply facts and data, but also provide interpretations or temporary responses to important events. The media organization or industry chooses and decides which events are published or shown.

    c. Linkage _

    Mass media can unite diverse members of society, thus forming linkages based on common interests and interests about something.

    d. Transmission of Values

    The mass media represents the image of society, that is, it is watched, heard, and read. The mass media show us how they act and what they expect. In other words, the media represents us with role models that we observe and hope to emulate.

    e. Entertainment _

    The function of the mass media as an entertainment function is none other than to reduce the tension in the minds of the audience.

    2. Onong Uchjana Effendy

    Effendy (2003: 54) presents the function of mass communication in general, namely:

    a. Information function

    The function of providing information means that the mass media is a disseminator of information for readers, listeners or viewers.

    c. Educational Functions

    The mass media is a means of education for the public because it presents a lot of things that are educational in nature. One of the ways of educating that the mass media does is through teaching values, ethics, and rules that apply to viewers or readers.

    d. Influencing Functions

    The influencing function of the mass media is implicitly found in titles, features, advertisements, articles, and so on.

    Types of Mass Media

    According to Cangara (2010: 74), mass media are divided into three types, namely:

    1. Print Media

    Print media is the first mass media that appeared in the world in the 1920s. At that time, the mass media was initially used by the government to indoctrinate the public, so as to lead the reading public to a specific purpose, such as the needle theory in mass communication theory. However, the mass media is now free, as is the reciprocity of the audience.

    b. Electronic media

    After print media, the first electronic media appeared, namely radio as an audio media that conveys messages through voice. Speed ​​and timeliness in radio message delivery is certainly faster by using live broadcasts. During the dissemination of information about the Proclamation of Independence, the radio mass media played a major role in the dissemination of news. After that, a more sophisticated television appeared and could show pictures as audio visual mass media.

    c. Internet media

    New internet media is popular in the 21st century, for example Google was born in 1997. Internet media can exceed the capabilities of print and electronic media. Both media can enter the internet through a website. There are many advantages of internet mass media compared to other media. However, internet access which is still relatively free can be dangerous for users who do not understand, for example fraud, pornography, identity theft, and so on. Internet media does not have to be managed by a company like print and electronic media, but can also be done by individuals.

    Distortion of Mass Media Freedom

    Distortion of the freedom of the mass media in carrying out its functions include:

    1. Through Mass Media Regulation

    According to Article 28 of the 1945 Constitution and Law No. 11 of 1996 about the Press, the government has actually guaranteed the freedom of the press. The article provides a guarantee that there is no censorship and no prohibition for every citizen who wants to establish a press company. This is an important indicator of freedom of the press. For example, one of the TV stations reported on the Antasari case involving a woman named Rani. The reporting of the case only uses secondary sources, namely Rani’s family and Rani’s neighbors, not from primary sources.

    The violated article is article 3 which reads “Indonesian journalists always test information, report in a balanced manner, do not mix facts and judgmental opinions, and apply the principle of presumption of innocence”.

    2. Bureaucracy or Apparatus of Power

    In addition to the distortion of legal regulations, the control of press freedom by the government can also occur through the behavior of officials. During the time of the New Order (Orba), there were various behaviors of the apparatus that tried to control the freedom of the press, among others it was done by sending reprimands to the editors, physically assaulting journalists, up to the killing of journalists.

    For example, a member of the District House of Representatives (DPRD) of Cirebon City, Udin Saefullah, ran amok in the building of the people’s representative who did not accept after appearing in the local mass media, who said that he did not resign, even though he had registered as one of the prospective legislative candidates from Hanura party. He also threatened to beat journalists if he continued to raise his position as a member of the DPRD.

    3. Act of Judging the Community to the Media

    Freedom of the press guaranteed by UU No. 40 of 1999 was apparently used irresponsibly by some mass media. The freedom is used to unleash sensationalism. A number of individuals or community groups felt harmed by the news. They punish the press by going to the media office and then threatening and terrorizing, persecuting journalists, and vandalizing the media office.

    For example, the polling results reported by TVOne station and other TV stations experienced differences in polling results when the presidential election took place last year in 2014. This is what makes the community experience confusion in the quick calculation. In the end, a number of people protested against the TVOne station by criticizing it.

    4. Behavior of the Press Itself

    In practice, it turns out that not only factors outside the press have the potential to control press violence, such as legislation, the actions of the apparatus, and the control of press freedom turns out to be sourced from the press company itself. The media tends to present the entertainment side rather than providing information, political news tends to be presented that examines the personality of politicians rather than their thoughts and performance, and the news that is presented tends to be poor in meaning and make the reader cynical about the reality of everyday life.

    For example, the electronic media MNCTV always presents the advantages of the owner of the media, namely Harry Tanoesodibjo. This was done by the media because the owner wanted to nominate the president in the next election period. However, Harry Tanoesodibjo’s good image in the community was slightly tarnished after the revelation of the Antasari case that dragged his name. It can be ascertained that the media lacks professionalism when it comes to broadcasting advertisements and always favors its own owner or is not neutral.

     

  • Understanding Civil Society: Characteristics, Characteristics, and History

    Understanding Civil Society: Characteristics, Characteristics, and History

    Meaning of Civil Society – Do you know what civil society means? Civil society is a part of society that has manners in building, interpreting, and living its life. Civil society is often interpreted with different meanings. This is one of the concepts of waiuh face.

    Philosopher Petrus revealed that a civilized society can be interpreted as a civilized society in the meaning of life. The origin of the word civil is from English, which means civilized or cultured.

    While the term civil society is taken from the translation of civil society itself, that is civilized society. The concept of translation was first introduced by Dato Seri Anwar Ibrahim, through his talk at the National Symposium in 1995.

    This concept created by Anwar Ibrahim wants to show that the ideal society has an advanced civilization. More precisely, he mentioned that what is meant by civil society is a fertile social system. Where the system is based on moral principles that can guarantee a balance between the stability of society and individual freedom.

    Meaning of Civil Society

    As explained earlier, civil society is a fertile system that guarantees moral principles. Where individual freedom and community stability are very balanced.

    Another definition of civil society is that they are a group of people who are civilized, humane, possess knowledge, excel in technology.

    The Meaning of Civil Society According to Experts

    Below are some definitions of civil society according to experts. Read the information carefully.

    1. Mun’im (1994)

    Expressing that the term civil society is a unique idea that manifests itself in various social orders. Where the most important thing from the idea is the effort to coordinate various conflicts of interest. Whether it is the interest of the community, individual, or even the country

    2. Hefner

    Hefner revealed that civil society is a society that has special democratic characteristics in interacting with other societies. Moreover, civil society is usually more heterogeneous.

    In these conditions, they are expected to be able to organize themselves and be able to grow awareness to create civilization. That way, they are ultimately able to participate and overcome global conditions that are quite complex and also full of competition.

    3. Mahasin (1995)

    As explained earlier that civil society is a translation of civil society (in English). The word civil society consists of two words from Latin, civitas dei which means city, God and society which means society. From the word form one word namely civilization which means civilization. Therefore, civil society has the meaning as a community or group of urban people who have developed civilization.

    4. Munawir (1997)

    According to him, the civil society comes from the Arabic language. The word Madani comes from the word madana which means to inhabit, build, or live. But changed again to madani which means city people, civilized, and civil people. Thus, we can conclude that the word madani in Arabic has many meanings.

    While the civil concept according to Majid (1997) is often seen as a society that has merited in facing the plans of power and against the arbitrary government in Southern European countries, Latin America, and also Eastern Europe.

    5. Hall (1998)

    Hall says that civil society is usually synonymous with the term civil society. Where it means an idea, a shadow, a dream, and an ideal of a community that can embody social life. In a civil society, its members will stick to humanity and civilization.

    Characteristics of Civil Society

    After understanding some of the definitions of civil society from the experts, the following writer will explain some of the characteristics of civil society that you need to know:

    1. Upholding Values

    Civil society is synonymous with its civilized nature. They always uphold the values ​​and norms and laws they support. They hold all that with knowledge, faith, and technology. This means that civil society has a life based on the rules that are in place. Starting from values, laws, norms, and others.

    Their obedience is based on faith, knowledge, and technology that they have learned. Then developed with the strength of their faith and confidence in the Creator.

    2. Have a High Civilization

    As human beings who have strong confidence and faith in God the Creator, civil society has proven that they are a civilized society. Where they have good manners and manners. In addition, they also have manners towards their fellow human beings as well as their God.

    3. Prioritizing Equality and Transparency

    The next characteristic is that civil society judges that their status is all the same. Whether it’s a woman or a man. Openness or transparency means that they will live life with an honest attitude and do not need things to be covered.

    So that it will grow a sense of mutual trust between one member and another. This shows that this society has a democratic nuance. Where their democratization can be created with the existence of Non-Governmental Organizations, political parties, a free press, and tolerance.

    Why can it be like that? Because in social society it is related to the discourse of rational social criticism. Where community members explicitly and clearly create democracy. So, civil society can only be guaranteed by a country that adheres to a democratic system, such as Indonesia.

    Then related to the tolerance that has been mentioned above, it has the meaning of the willingness of each individual to accept various views, attitudes, and also political differences. Such tolerance is an attitude developed in a civilized society. It is a form of mutual respect and mutual respect. Both groups and individuals who have different opinions and attitudes.

    4. Free Public Space

    A free public space is usually also referred to as the free public sphere. This is a region that allows the community to have the rights and obligations of citizens. Where they have full access to various political activities, unite and also cooperate, express different opinions, and also gather and obtain information widely.

    5. Supremacy of Law

    In KBBI, the supremacy of law means the highest authority in the law which means that there is a guarantee of the creation of justice that can be realized. This can happen when a country places the law as the highest authority.

    It should be underlined, that the intended justice can be realized if the existing law is applied neutrally. This means, there is no exception to obtain a permission in the name of the law.

    6. Social Justice

    Social justice or also called social justice is a balance and also a proportional division between the rights and obligations of a citizen and the country itself. Where it covers aspects of life.

    That is, citizens have rights and obligations towards their country. So is the state, they also have rights and obligations over their citizens.

    The rights and obligations have a balanced portion. So that it will produce a balanced output as well. Plurality or diversity will certainly occur in society. Especially in a country that has millions of citizens. Where they come from various different groups.

    So, what is meant by pluralism is an attitude of accepting and acknowledging in writing that the society in a country is plural or diverse. This can be a factor in the creation of a multicultural society. Starting from culture, values, customs, norms, as well as language, religious tribes, ethnicities.

    As a member of civil society, as is the case with Indonesian society. We have various languages, tribes, religions, cultures, ethnicities, and others. Of course, we must have a pluralistic attitude and also believe that a plurality will provide positive values ​​that come from God.

    7. Social Participation

    To establish relationships and cooperation between groups and individuals, we need to participate in the social environment. This aims to achieve and realize certain goals.

    With clean social participation, then that is the beginning of the creation of a civil society. This can happen if there are nuances that can make individual rights and obligations very well protected.

    That means, civil society needs to balance between its rights and obligations. So that social justice will be created as mentioned above.

    Characteristics of Civil Society

    In addition to having special characteristics, civil society also has its own characteristics that are different from society in general. Here are some characteristics of civil society that you need to understand.

    1. Integration between individuals and groups is exclusively woven into society through social alliances and social contracts.
    2. The power that exists in civil society is diffuse. So that the dominant interest can be reduced by the presence of alternative forces.
    3. There are development programs that are dominated by the state or the government and also other development programs that are dominated by the community itself.
    4. Equipped with access to the relationship between the interests of individuals and also the country. Because, members of volunteer organizations can give input to decisions taken by the government.
    5. Progress and development of creativity that was initially hindered by the totalitarian regime.
    6. The creation of loyalty and trust. So that each individual acknowledges their attachment to other individuals and they do not prioritize their own interests.
    7. There is the liberation of society through the activities of social institutions with various perspectives.
    8. Having trust and faith in God. That means they are a society that has a religion and acknowledges the existence of God. In addition, they also place God’s law as the foundation in managing life.
    9. Live peacefully and peacefully. Because, all the people in the civil society, both as a group and as an individual, respect and appreciate the other party.
    10. Help each other without interfering in someone’s internal affairs that could reduce their freedom.
    11. Tolerance, that means they will not interfere in the affairs of others who already have freedom as human beings. They also will not feel disturbed by other parties who have different backgrounds.
    12. Creating a balance between rights and obligations.
    13. Have a high civilization. That means they have a love for science and use and benefit from that knowledge for the future.
    14. Have noble morals.

    History of Civil Society

    Various types of efforts have been made in order to create and create a civil society. Be it for a short term or for a long term. In order to create a civil society in a short period of time, it is necessary to choose a trustworthy leader. Then, the community also needs to place a leader who can be accepted well and who can lead wisely.

    When looking for the historical roots of civilized society, it can be seen that in Ancient Greek society, this already exists. In Raharjo (1997), it is revealed that the term civil society has existed since before AD. The person who first coined the term civil society was Cicero, an orator from Ancient Greece.

    According to Cicero, civil society is a political community that has good manners. This is usually exemplified by people living in the city. Where they have their own legal code. With the existence of citizenship and city culture, the term city is not just a concentration of people.

    But also as a center of culture and civilization. In addition, the term civil society does not only refer to the term civil society. However, it is also based on the concept of the city of Medina built by the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Therefore, civil society also refers to the concept of civilized society or civilization. As well as another concept introduced by the philosopher Al Farabi, namely the concept of Medina as the Main State.

    According to a researcher at the Pesantren Development Board and Islamic Studies, Dr. Ahmad Hatta, the madinah charter is an important document that can prove that civilized society in the past was very advanced. In addition, he also emphasized that the clarity of the law and the constitution in the society.

    Even if we look at the opinion of Hamidullah (1958) in his book First Written Constitutions In The World, the madinah charter is the first written constitution in human history. The constitution surprisingly contained rules about civil rights that are currently being debated a lot.

    These civil rights are now known as HAM or human rights. This appeared long before the Universal Declaration of the United Nations, the French Revolution, and even the Declaration of American Independence was proclaimed.

    Such is the explanation about civil society that the writer can give. From all the explanations above, we can conclude that civil society is actually the concept of society that we need today. Especially in Indonesia which has various differences. Starting from tribe, race, religion, values, morals, and others.

    With the creation of a civil society, of course we will be spared from the conflicts that arise due to differences that are not appreciated and respected. For example, during the election, there will definitely be many conflicts that arise due to political differences. Individuals and groups can hate each other just because they have different choices.

    Well, if we have characteristics and social concepts similar to civil society. So that kind of conflict can definitely be avoided or even eliminated. What do you think? Have you applied the concept of civil society in your daily life?

     

  • The Understanding of Human Beings as Individual Beings and Their Roles

    The Understanding of Human Beings as Individual Beings and Their Roles

    Understanding Humans as Individual Beings – Physically, humans are the same as other living creatures. Both have supporting elements that are able to help him live. But specifically, humans are different from other creatures. The meaning is that humans as creatures created by God become the most perfect creatures with the intellect they possess.

    The creation of reason that humans have can help them mention or categorize things and make a concept so that they have the ability to think. It can be said that the function of reason is to think.

    Then what about human needs? If classified, human needs are divided into two, namely material needs and spiritual needs. Material needs include two things, namely physical and biological. While spiritual needs include mental and psychological.

    Human Needs according to Abraham Maslow

    A pioneer of humanistic psychology Abraham Maslow argued that human needs are divided into five. Anything? See the following explanation.

    1. Physiological needs

    Some things that are categorized as physiological or basic needs are eating, drinking, clothing, sexual, and some others.

    2. The need for security and protection

    This one need includes several things, such as being free from fear, protected from danger, the threat of disease, war, and several other things.

    3. Social needs

    Being loved, recognized as a community, and counted as a person is a social need that humans need.

    4. The need for appreciation

    As the name suggests, the need for appreciation is certainly needed by humans to be appreciated for their abilities, position, position, etc.

    5. The need for self-actualization

    This one need is needed by humans, namely maximizing self-potential, self-expression, and creativity.

    The Meaning of Human Beings as Individual Beings

    After getting to know and understand the meaning of humans and their needs, Reader can only know the meaning of humans as individual beings.

    Ever heard of humans as individual beings? What is meant by individual? Actually individual comes from the Latin language individuum which means not divided. Whereas in English, individual comes from the words in and divided.

    If interpreted, individual means not divided or become a unity. Why is that? Basically, humans are born as individual beings who are not separated, not divided between their soul and body.

    Human development as an individual being does not only mean the unity of soul and body. Humans as individual beings have a broader meaning than that, namely humans have special characteristics with their own personality patterns.

    Despite having a twin brother, the personality of one individual is very different from another. People who are born with twins will not have exactly the same physical and psychological characteristics.

    In general, it can be seen that humans have the same physical equipment, but if we look further, the differences that each individual has will be clearly visible. The various differences will be seen in shape, size, nature, and so on.

    When Reader are in a group of thousands or even millions of people, you will still be able to recognize someone you already know because that person has recognizable physical characteristics.

    On the other hand, Reader will find it difficult to recognize one animal among thousands or even millions of similar animals. An individual is not only easily recognized through his physical or biological characteristics.

    Reader can recognize him through his nature, character, style, temperament, and taste. But physical characteristics become the main weapon for you to recognize people. Because physically there are people who are fat, thin, slim, straight hair, curly hair, brown skin color, white, and so on.

    Then you can recognize a person through his nature, character, and behavior. Because by nature there are people who are patient, cheerful, chatty, grumpy, etc.

    So, the term individual can be used to express the smallest or limited unit. Individuals can be understood as individual human beings so that they are often used as the term “people” or “individual human beings”.

    An individual can be defined as a human being who not only has a special role in his social environment, but also has a personality and specific behavior patterns about him.

    Then there are several aspects attached to the assessment of each individual, namely the physical organic aspect, the psychological-spiritual aspect, and the social aspect. The unity of the physical and spiritual aspects can be the meaning of the word individual.

    If there is a shock in one aspect, it will have consequences in other aspects. An individual’s spiritual ability can help him relate and think. In addition, the ability of the spiritual aspect of the individual can control and lead the mind to overcome every problem and reality that it experiences.

    These elements or aspects must be united in him so that a person can be said to be a human being as an individual being. If those elements or aspects are not united anymore, then a person cannot be called an individual.

    If a person only has his body, physical body, or body, then he cannot be said to be an individual. The term individual only applies to people who have organic physical integrity, psychological-spiritual, and social aspects.

    Without the existence of a society that is the background of its existence, individual identity will not be clear. In order to form a behavior that is in line with the situation, the individual needs to distance himself and process himself. In addition, individuals also need to form habits that suit their behavior.

    As individual beings, humans are always in the middle of other groups of individuals. Humans as individual beings need an environment that will help mature their personal formation.

    There is a time when the environment becomes an inhibiting factor and a supporting factor in the process of individual formation.

    The community environment is very influential on the formation of individuality. Conversely, individuals are also able to influence the community environment. The ability that each individual has is the main thing in establishing relationships with other human beings.

    Human Growth Process as an Individual Being

    Humans as individual beings are a combination of genotypic and phenotypic factors. What is meant by genotypic factor? Genotype factors are factors carried by individuals since birth and hereditary factors.

    Because physically everyone has similarities and the same characteristics of their parents. The similarities that occur can include the entire physical appearance or only certain parts.

    Physically you can see which part of the body has a resemblance to your parents. The same goes for nature and character. There may be some of your traits or characters that are similar to your father or mother.

    What about phenotypic factors? Phenotypic factors are physical characteristics, characters or traits that are influenced by environmental factors. These factors have a great influence in the formation of the special characteristics of each person.

    The environment in question is the physical environment, such as environmental conditions, living conditions or houses, and geographical conditions and climate. A person who lives in a mountainous area will certainly have different characteristics and habits from people who live in a coastal area.

    People who live in coastal areas may have a habit of speaking that tends to be harsh, unlike people who live in mountainous areas. The living environment will shape a person’s habits and behavior.

    Then there is the social environment that also forms the characteristics of individuals in social interaction. These interactions are usually done with family members, friends, and other large social groups.

    The process of growth accompanied by outward and inward development is considered a natural and normal human development. The meaning is that the human personality or individual has its own special characteristics on the whole soul and body.

    Growth can be interpreted as a human change towards being more advanced or arguably more mature. Then there are various opinions about growth. Basically, the process of association becomes part of growth. It can be said that the process of association is a change that happens to a person gradually and is influenced by the reciprocity of the experience he gets.

    Factors That Affect Human Growth As Individual Beings

    The following are some factors that can affect human growth as an individual being.

    1. The Nativist View

    Experts believe that this one growth factor is determined by other factors that individuals bring from birth. That is, a person’s growth is determined by the individual’s own factors, both similarity to parents, talent, and potential.

    2. Empiricistic view

    This one growth factor is slightly opposite to nativist, that is, the growth factor of an individual is backgrounded by the environment.

    3. Convergence View

    The last growth factor can be said to be a collaboration of the two views above. This individual growth factor is driven by the interaction of the environment and the environment.

    Based on psychology, individual growth levels are divided into four, namely:

    • Vital time (0-2 years)
    • Aesthetic time (2-7 years)
    • Intellectual age (7-14 years)
    • Social time (14-21 years)

    The Role of Humans as Individual Beings

    After discussing how the process of individual formation and growth, this article will take you to know how the role of humans as individual beings.

    Humans as individual beings have various roles to create all the things they want. Humans as individual beings have the role of protecting and defending their dignity.

    Then as individual beings, humans continue to strive to fulfill their basic rights. Realizing one’s full potential, both physically and spiritually, is one of the roles of humans as individual beings.

    In addition, humans as individual beings also play a role in fulfilling their own needs and interests for the well-being of the life they live.

    Human Development as an Individual Being

    Humans as the smallest unit in a group have self-awareness that comes from personal awareness of everything. The self-awareness referred to is reality, self-narcissism, self-respect, personality dignity, egoism, and self-realization.

    Humans as individual beings need behavioral patterns. Known as homo sapiens, humans have a mind that can help them think and act wisely. The intellect can be used by humans to develop the various potentials that exist within themselves.

    The potential is work, creation, and intention. The various development of potential that is done will make him a whole human being as the most perfect creature created by God.

    Human development occurs individually through various stages that take dozens or even decades to become an adult. Humans will grow with the efforts of education.

    The development that occurs will allow a person to have optimal potential. Educational efforts are made to develop human potential as individual beings.

    Education can also help people develop all the ideas in their minds and help apply them in everyday life. That way, human beings as individual beings will improve the quality of their own lives.

    Human Characteristics as Individual Beings

    As explained before, every human being is born with a different personality or becomes himself. That is the uniqueness that humans have.

    With the existence of individuality, each person will have different ambitions, wishes, feelings, enthusiasm, tendencies, and resilience. According to Oxendine, humans as individual beings have different characteristics. The following is the difference in the individuality of each person that appears specifically.

    1. Physical differences

    The physical differences in question are height and weight, age, vision, hearing, and ability to act.

    2. Social differences

    Social differences, including religion, economic status, tribe, and family relationships.

    3. Personality differences

    Personality differences lie in character, interests, motives, and attitudes.

    4. Differences in skill or intelligence

     

  • Meaning of Manhaj: Benefits and Advantages of Following Manhaj

    Meaning of Manhaj: Benefits and Advantages of Following Manhaj

    Manhaj is – Some Muslims may not know what is meant by manhaj salaf, although the term salafi may be familiar to some people. To understand it, it is necessary to dissect the meaning of manhaj and salaf first.

    Citing the journal Manhaj Salafiyah by H. Muhammadin (2013: 147), manhaj is ath-thariqah or the path taken by the companions of the Prophet SAW in understanding the religion of God. Meanwhile, salaf in a foreign language means the previous or leading.

    Yazid bin Abdul Qadir Jawas (2006: 18) in the Syarah Aqidah Ahlul Sunnah wal Jamaa’ah said that in terms of time, the word Salaf is used to refer to the period of time that should be emulated and followed, namely the first three generations in Islam.

    There are 3 main components of As-Salaf, namely:

    • The companions (those who lived as Muslims at the time of the Prophet, met him and died as Muslims).
    • Tabi’in (those who lived in the time of the Companions and died as Muslims).
    • Tabi’ut Tabi’in (those who lived in the time of tabi’in and died as a Muslim)

    It can be understood that the way of the Salaf is the path taken based on the understanding of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    Meaning of Manhaj

    Manhaj salah is an expression of two words, “manhaj” and “salaf”. Both have their own meaning. Manhaj is interpreted as a bright path, while salaf means those who have gone before you.

    Salaf can also be interpreted as imams and companions of the Prophet SAW. So, the way of the Salaf can be interpreted as a clear path according to religious rules based on the understanding of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    Mention for Followers of Manhaj Salaf

    The people who follow the way of the Salaf (salafiyyun) are commonly called Ahlus Sunnah wal Jamaah because they hold fast to the Al-Qur’an and As-Sunnah (the teachings of the Prophet) and are united on it. Also referred to as Ahlul Hadist wal Atsar because they hold fast to hadith and atsar when people prioritize reason.

    They are also called al-Firatun Najiyah, that is, the group that God saved from hell as will be mentioned in the hadith of Abdullah bin Amr bin al-‘Ash radhiallahu anhuma.

    In addition, they are also called ath-Taifah al-Manshurah, which is a group that is always helped and won by God as will be mentioned in the hadith Tsuban radhiyallahu anhu,

    Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    Manhaj salaf and salafiyyun are not limited (confined) to certain organizations, certain regions, certain leaders, certain parties and so on. In fact, the manhaj of the salaf teaches us that the bond of brotherhood is built on the Qur’an and the Sunnah of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, with the understanding of righteous salafush.

    Whoever holds fast to him, then he is our brother even though he is in another part of the world. This is the holy bond connected by the manhaj of the Salaf, the manhaj followed by the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, and his companions.

    The Salaf Manhaj is a manhaj that must be followed and held firmly by every Muslim in understanding his religion. Why is that? Because, this is what Allah explained in the Qur’an and by the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, in his Sunnah. Meanwhile, God has bequeathed to us:

    “O you who believe, obey Allah and obey the Messenger (Prophet Muhammad) and the ululamri (power holders) among you. If you disagree about something, return it to Allah (the Qur’an) and the Messenger (the Sunnah) if you believe in Allah and the Last Day. That is better (for you) and better as a result (in this world and in the hereafter).” (An-Nisa: 59).

     

    Evidence of Al–Qur’an Verses about the Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    As for the verses of the Qur’an that explain that we should really follow the way of the Salaf as follows:

    1. Surat Al-Fatihah verses 6-7

    “Show us the straight path. The path of those whom You have blessed.” (Al-Fatihah: 6-7).

    Imam Ibnul Qayyim said,

    “They are people who know the truth and strive to follow it. Everyone who knows the truth better and follows it more consistently, is certainly more entitled to be on the straight path. There is no doubt that the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, are the people who are more entitled to bear this attribute (title) than the people of Rafidah (Shia).” (Madarijus Salikin. 1/72).

    Imam Ibnu Qayyim’s explanation of the verse above shows that the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, who are the Salafush Salih, are more entitled to the title of “those who have been blessed by God” and “those who are on the straight path”. . Because, their knowledge of the truth is so deep and they are very consistent in following it.

    This title shows that the manhaj they follow in understanding this Islamic religion is the right manhaj and on the straight path. Therefore, those who try to follow their manhaj and footsteps, means that they have followed the right manhaj and are on the straight path.

    2. Surat An-Nisa verse 115

    “And whoever opposes the Messenger after the truth is clear to him and follows other than the path of the believers, We let him wander freely in error and We cast him into Jahannam. And Hell is as bad as the place of return.” (An-Nisa: 115).

    Imam Ibnu Abi Jamrah al-Andalusi said,

    “The scholars have explained the meaning of God’s words above that what is meant by the believers here are the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, and the first generation of this ummah. Because, they are people who welcome this Sharia with a clean soul.

    They have asked everything that was not understood from him with the best questions. The Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings of Allah be upon him, also answered it with the best answer. He explained with a perfect explanation. They also listen to the answers and explanations of the Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings be upon him, by understanding, practicing as best as possible, memorizing and conveying with full honesty.

    They really have a great priority over us. It is through them that our relationship can be connected with the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, as well as with Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala.” (al – Mirqat fi Nahjis Salaf Sabilun Najah p. 36 – 37).

    Shaykhul Islam Ibn Taymiyyah, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “Truly, both (opposing the Messenger and following other than the path of believers) are interrelated. Therefore, whoever opposes the Messenger as the truth is clear to him, must have followed other than the path of the believers. Whoever follows other than the path of the believers, he has opposed the Messenger after the truth is clear to him.” (Majmu’ Fatawa, 7/38).

    After we know that the believers in this verse are the companions of the Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him (as- Salaf) and the close connection between opposing the Messenger and following other than the path of the believers, it can be concluded that we must follow the “manhaj” whether we like it or not. salaf” way of friends.

    Because, if we take other than their path in understanding dinul Islam, this means that we have opposed the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace. The consequences are truly terrible, that is, they will be left free to wallow in error. The end is going into Jahannam, as bad as the place of return. Na’uzu billahi min dzalik.

    3. Surat At-Taubah verse 100

    “And those who were the first to convert to Islam from among the Muhajirin and Ansar and those who followed them well, God was pleased with them and they were also pleased with God. Allah SWT prepared for them a paradise with rivers flowing in it. They are eternal in it. That is a great success.” (at- Taubah: 100).

    In this verse, Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala does not specify His pleasure and guarantee of heaven for the companions of the Muhajirin and Ansar (as- Salaf). People who follow them well also get the pleasure of God and the assurance of heaven like them.

    Al-Hafiz Ibnu Katsir, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala informs about His pleasure to the people who preceded them from among the Muhajirin and Ansar as well as those who followed their footsteps well. God also informed about the sincerity of their pleasure to God, as well as what He has prepared for them, which is heaven – heaven full of enjoyment, and eternal enjoyment.” (Tafsir Ibn Katsir, 2/ 367). This shows that following the way of the Salaf will lead to the pleasure of Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala and His heaven.

    Proof of the Prophet’s Hadith about the Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    1. Hadith about the sunnah of Islam

    The Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, said,

    “Indeed, whoever among you lives as long as I do will see many disputes. Therefore, you must stick to my Sunnah and the Sunnah of the Khulafa ar-Rashidin who are guided. Hold it tight and bite it with your molars…” (Sahih, HR. Abu Dawud, at-Tirmidhi, ad-Darimi, Ibu Majah and others from the companion of al-‘Irbad Ibn Sariyah radiallahu anhu. Irwa ‘ul Ghalil , hadith no. 2455).

    In this hadith it is clearly stated that we will witness so many disagreements in understanding the teachings of Islam. The only way that leads to salvation is to follow the Sunnah of the Messenger of Allah, may Allah bless him and grant him peace, and the Sunnah of the Khulafaur-Rashidin (Salafus Salih). In fact, the Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings of Allah be upon him, ordered us to always stick to it.

    Imam ash-Syathibi, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “The Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, as you have witnessed, has linked the Sunnah of al-Khilafa ar-Rashidin with his Sunnah and one of the consequences of following his Sunnah is following their Sunnah.

    Because what they follow as Sunnah is really following the Sunnah of their Prophet, may God bless him and grant him peace. Or follow what they understand from his sunnah, may God bless him and grant him peace, both globally and in detail that is not known to anyone other than them.” (al-I’tishom. 1/118).

    2. Hadith about people who are above the truth

    The Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, said,

    “Continually there is a small group of my people who always appear above the truth. Those who insult them will not harm them, until God’s judgment comes and they are in such a state.” (Sahih, HR. al-Bukhari and Muslim, the wording of this hadith is the wording of Muslim from the companion of Tsauban, may God be pleased with him, hadith no. 1920).

    Imam Ahmad bin Hanbl, may God have mercy on him, said, “If it’s not halul hadith, I don’t know who they are?!” (Shyaraf Ashhabil Hadist, by al-Khatib al-Baghdadi, p. 36)

    Imam Ibu Mubarak, may God have mercy on him, Imam al-Bukhari, may God have mercy on him, Imam Ahmad bin Sinan al-Muhaddits, may God have mercy on him, and they all said about the meaning of this hadith, “So, everything is about the meaning of this hadith.”

    3. Hadith about 73 groups

    The Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, said,

    “My people will be divided into 73 groups. All went to hell except for one group. He was asked, “Who are they, O Messenger of Allah?” The youth answered, (The group that is above what I and my companions are.” (Hasan, HR. at-Tirmidhi in his Sunan, “Kitabul Iman”, “Chapter Iftiraqu hadzihik Umah.” From the friend of Abdullah bin Amr bin al – Ash.

    The truth is recognized by Allah SWT

    As Muslims, the way of the Salaf is a rule that must be held tightly. Allah SWT has ordered Muslims to follow the way of the Salaf as His word salam Al-Qur’an.

    “Those who preceded and were the first (to enter Islam) from (among) the emigrants and the Ansar and those who followed them well, God was pleased with them and they were pleased with Him, and God provided for them the heavens in which rivers flow; they remain in it forever. That’s a big win.” (Qs. At Taubah: 100).

    In other words, God also praises the faith of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    “If they have believed in what you believe, they have indeed been guided. However, if they turn away, they are indeed at enmity (with you). So, Allah will suffice you (with His protection) from their (evil). He is All-Hearing and All-Knowing.” (Qs. Al Baqarah: 137)

    The priority of Manhaj Salaf

    As the only manhaj that must be followed to understand Islam, there are several merits of the Salaf manhaj, namely:

    1. It is a rule that shows the straight path according to the pleasure of Allah SWT.
    2. Manhaj salaf should be held tightly when there is an understanding or opinion in understanding Islamic law.
    3. Following other teachings other than the way of the Salaf means that it is more free to fall into error that is not according to the instructions of Allah SWT.

    Benefits of Manhaj Salaf

    Any Muslim who follows the way of the Salaf, will certainly get a reward from Allah SWT. Here are the benefits of obeying the Salaf method:

    1. Shown the way to safety to avoid going astray.
    2. Apart from the temptation of the cursed devil.
    3. Saved from the torment of hell.
    4. People who are always in the truth and will always get help from Allah SWT.
    5. People who practice the way of the Salaf will be pleased by Allah and attain heaven (Al Jannah).

    Closing

    It turns out that there are many benefits and priorities, yes, Reader. By knowing about its benefits and priorities, it is easy for us to know in depth. Now Reader have a better understanding of the Salaf manhaj, right? May we become obedient people who follow the way of the Salaf and be protected by Allah SWT to walk on the straight path. Hope this article inspires you!

     

  • The Meaning, Benefits and Purpose of Business You Need to Know

    The Meaning, Benefits and Purpose of Business You Need to Know

    Purpose of Business – The increasingly modern age makes many people who develop a business starting from a home business to a business that has expanded to several regions. A business built by a person or group can be said to be a business venture. Business activities that are carried out in earnest will experience development, so that the profits obtained will be more and more.

    Therefore, in order for a business to grow, it is best to first understand the meaning of business, the benefits of business, the purpose of business, and other things related to business. Some of these things need to be known by many people, especially for those who want to start a business. In fact, not only knowing some of these things, we also need to understand these things.

    By knowing and understanding things related to business, then the spirit of developing and expanding the business will increase, so that we will find various ways to develop the business that is being developed or pioneered. Businesses that are growing will be able to compete with old competitors or new competitors.

    The more people who create and develop a business, then the employment field will be wide open, so that the well-being of the community will increase as well. Therefore, never hesitate to build a business even if you have to face various obstacles.

    If you want to know business matters, such as the meaning of business, the benefits of business, the purpose of business, you can read this article to the end, Reader. So, read this article immediately, Reader.

    Meaning of Business

    The word “business” comes from the English language, namely business , while the word business itself comes from the development of the word busy which means busy. “Busy” in this case can happen to individuals, communities, or society. Business if interpreted in a simple context can be interpreted as a busyness in doing an activity or job that can provide profit to someone.

    Meanwhile, business if interpreted in the context of an entity can be interpreted as a business entity or organization that performs a movement in a professional, industrial, or commercial activity. All these activities are done with the aim of making a profit.

    This is in line with business in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) business is a commercial venture in the world of trade or business or business venture. In building a business, the business owner will definitely try to get enough profit because with that profit a business can be developed into a bigger business.

    In short, business is an activity or activity carried out by an individual or a business entity with the aim of making a profit by doing various things, such as manufacturing, distribution, selling, and purchasing. Therefore, many people say that business is related to economic activities and can build economic growth.

    However, in building a business, it is not as easy as flipping the palm of the hand, so whether it is an individual or a business entity, you should try to think about making a mature plan. This needs to be done so that the business that is built can last a long time, and even have the ability to compete with competitors.

    The Meaning of Business According to the Experts

    After knowing the meaning of business based on KBBI, now is the time to know the meaning of business according to the experts. Taken from several sources, the meaning according to experts is as follows.

    1. Brown and Petrello

    Brown and Petrello stated that business is an institution that can make a production result, either in the form of goods or services that can be used to meet business needs and can meet the needs of businesses that have been carried out by the government or the private sector with the aim of achieving a profit or no.

    2. Jeff Madura

    According to Jeff Madura, business is an institution built by individuals or groups with the aim of forming an enterprise that can be utilized or useful to provide services or production products that are liked by customers or society in general.

    3. Hughes and Kapoor

    Hughes and Kapoor said that business is an activity of an individual or a group of individuals that is planned with the aim of creating a product or service that can be sold to consumers in order to gain profit while also being able to meet the needs of the consumer himself.

    4. Steinford

    According to Steinford, business is an institution or business entity that can create goods and services that can be used to meet the needs of society. If, the needs of the community are increasing, then the goods and services produced by business institutions will also increase in order to meet the needs of the community while also getting more profit.

    5. Hooper

    Hooper said that business is all the complex things that exist in various fields, such as sales and industry, basic industry, processing and industry, manufacturing and network, distribution, banking, transportation, insurance, and others that then all those fields enter the business world as a whole.

    6. Merriam Webster

    According to Merriam Webster business is an activity, such as the manufacture, purchase, and sale of goods and services that are then exchanged for money. In addition, he also said that business can be interpreted as an activity that includes part of the job as well as some activities that have been completed by companies, shops, factories, and so on.

    7. Griffin and Ebert

    Based on what was expressed by Griffin and Ebert, business is an institution or organization that provides or produces goods or services with the aim of making a profit.

    8. LR Dicksee

    According to LR Dicksee, business is a form of an activity carried out in order to obtain profit or profit from a business activity carried out.

    9. Prof. Owen

    Prof. Owen said that business is a company that is closely related to production and distribution of production to be traded or sold to the market or consumers by giving a price for each service.

    Business Benefits

    A business built by a person or a business entity must have several benefits, namely:

    1. Be a Leader and Boss

    In creating and developing a business, we can be leaders or bosses. What’s more, if the business that is built is owned by yourself and not owned by the group. By being a leader as well as a boss, then we can make policies that suit our desires. However, it is even better if the policy is taken based on the joint decision of the employees of the business, so that communication between employees and leaders can be well established.

    For some people, becoming a leader and boss has been an ambition since childhood, so they will try as hard as possible, but some other people become leaders and bosses because of their exceptional performance in the company. From wherever the desire to be a leader and boss is important to have the ability to develop a business venture.

    2. Manage Time Well

    The next benefit that can be felt from business activities is being able to organize well. That is, we can arrange when to work and when to rest. However, things like this happen more often in businesses built by individuals rather than groups.

    If the business is developed as a group, it is best to arrange the time with the agreement of the group members. This needs to be done so that there are no misunderstandings between group members, so that the business that is being pioneered can grow and last longer. A business that is growing indicates that the business that is being carried out is making enough profit.

    3. Increase Self-Confidence

    Increasing self-confidence is very important in a human life. Basically, there are many ways to increase self-confidence, one of which is to build a business venture. Business activities turn out to be able to build self-confidence because we have confidence that production results in the form of goods and services can sell well in the market.

    The more self-confidence increases, the more ideas to develop business ventures. Therefore, the benefits of business should be maximized as best as possible.

    4. Getting Appreciation

    For those of you who build a business venture, either as a group or individually, then you can get benefits in the form of gaining appreciation. The appreciation given can be for the company and can also be for the individual. The more awards received, the greater the consumer’s trust in the company or individual itself.

    Consumer trust is very important for the sustainability of a business. In other words, consumer trust is the key to the success of a business.

    5. Awaken the Spirit of Entrepreneurship

    The benefit of the next business venture is to awaken the spirit of entrepreneurship. This spirit of entrepreneurship is very necessary in developing and expanding business ventures. Without an entrepreneurial spirit, it will be very difficult for a business to grow. In this modern age, developing an entrepreneurial spirit is necessary because we can open up jobs.

    6. Adding Experience and Insight

    The last benefit of building a business is adding experience as well as insight. The more experience we have in our lives, the more solutions we find to solve problems. Similarly, by building a business, the problems in the business will be easier to overcome when we already have a lot of experience in the business.

    Business Purpose

    Basically, the main purpose of a business is to make a profit. However, in reality, the purpose of business is not only that, but there are other purposes. Therefore, in order to make it easier to understand the purpose of a business, the purpose of business is divided into two, namely the purpose of business in general and the purpose of business for business actors.

    Business Purposes in General

    1. Making a Profit

    As many people already know that the main purpose of building a business is to make a profit. Almost all companies and entrepreneurs will seek profit from the business that is built. For this reason, business owners must be smart to find ways so that the business that is built can be developed well and profits can be achieved.

    2. Progress and Development for Business Enterprises

    Every business that is built by an individual or a group, must really want the business to continue to experience progress and development. The more advanced and developed a business is, the greater the profit obtained and the more jobs there are.

    3. Gain Performance

    Who does not want to get a performance, every business that is built must have a purpose to get a performance. This is because performance is a form of acknowledgment that the business is trusted by the community and that its goods and services have superior quality from competitors.

    4. Provide Community Needs

    In addition to making a profit, a business is also built with the aim of providing for the needs of the community. Community needs will be difficult to meet if there is no one to make goods and services needed by the community. Therefore, the community and the company will be interconnected. The company will make a profit from the goods and services sold, while the community can meet its needs.

    5. Increase Community Economic Growth

    Economic growth in the community should be increased so that the community becomes more prosperous. In addition, economic growth is also needed by the country to advance the life of the nation and the country. Economic growth can be obtained through the formation of a business venture. In short, when we build a business, the business must have the purpose of increasing economic growth, whether it is the economy of the community or the economy of the country.

    6. Creating Jobs

    The more jobs there are, the more people’s lives get closer to prosperity. Increasing employment can be done by building and expanding a business. The purpose of this one business can be said to be very good, because it can provide income or income to other people, so that the person can live a better life.

    7. Showing Enterprise Existence

    The existence of the company is the purpose of a business. Without the existence of the company, the trust of society and consumers will decrease, so the company will have difficulty growing.

    Business Purposes for Entrepreneurs

    1. To Meet the Needs of Life

    For business people, businesses must have a purpose to earn income from the business they pioneered. For this reason, business people will look for various ways to get profit from sales so that the needs of life can be well met.

    2. Enriching Family Life

    Entrepreneurs who already have families will rely on business as income or income. With that income, the entrepreneurs can provide for their families.

    3. Continuing the Family Business

    For some businesses that exist in Indonesia are the result of previous generations, so there are not a few entrepreneurs who aim to continue family businesses that have been established for a long time. By continuing the family business, the business that has been built for a long time will not disappear.

    4. Making Innovation and Adding Experience

    The purpose for the next business actors is to develop innovation while adding experience in the business world. Innovation in business is very necessary to be able to compete with other companies. In addition, with the emergence of an innovation, it means that the ideas owned by business actors are quite a lot.

    5. Want to Own Your Own Business

    For entrepreneurs who build their own business, they must be very proud because they can build their own business. What’s more, businesses developed individually will be free to determine a policy.

    Conclusion

    Businesses that are built and developed individually or with groups, actually have many benefits that can be felt. In addition, in building a business, we also need to know the purpose of building the business. This needs to be done so that the business that is built does not lose its direction and continues to experience progress and development, so that it can provide benefits for oneself, the community, and even the country.

     

  • Meaning, Benefits and Examples of Humility

    Meaning, Benefits and Examples of Humility

    KW Example of Humble Attitude

    Meaning, Benefits and Examples of Humility

    pixabay

    Example of humility – Humility as a commendable act, because to avoid arrogance and pride. Humility should always be applied in everyday life. Being humble can provide many benefits for yourself and even others. The benefits of humility are not only acceptable in this world but also in the afterlife. 

    On this occasion, we will discuss more about humility, starting from the meaning to examples of attitude. So, read this article to the end, Reader. 

    What is Humility?

    Humility or a humble attitude as an attitude that realizes the limitations of one’s own abilities and one’s own inability and does not become arrogant. A humble attitude can also be understood as a polite attitude and having a realistic view. However, it does not mean to humble yourself because humility and humility are different. Humility will keep away from arrogance and knowing everything. 

    Humility should be possessed by everyone. not only important in the work environment, but human beings as social beings and individuals who need each other, Reader need to remain humble wherever they are. 

    Humble Purpose

    After discussing the meaning of humility, the next discussion is the purpose of humility. Then, what is the purpose of being humble? The following is the purpose of humility that you need to know. 

    1. To respect others as human beings regardless of face or property.
    2. Humility will not magnify the great, nor will it diminish the small. 
    3. As a way to respect yourself because you feel that you still have a lot of shortcomings compared to others. 
    4. To be modest and not boastful even though one has many advantages. 
    5. To cover all the things that feel a shame that should not be heard by others. 
    6. Not to brag about yourself. This is one of the gifts given by God Almighty. 

    Humble Priorities

    In addition to purpose, it turns out that humility also has priority. The following are some of the priorities of humility. 

    1. Humility will pave the way to heaven.
    2. God will raise the status of those who humble themselves.
    3. Liked and respected by others.
    4. Liked by many people.
    5. Have a lot of friends.
    6. His heart will always be calm.
    7. Inherit the noble attitude of the Prophets.
    8. Tawadhu is the path to a noble position. 

    Examples of Humility

    Well, after knowing the meaning, purpose, and priority of humility, then at this point we will discuss examples of humility. The following are examples of humility as follows:

    1. Do not hesitate to ask for help

    Asking for help, especially for trivial matters, is sometimes prestigious, but not for humble people. When they find difficulties in solving something they will not hesitate to ask for help. 

    2. Easy to thank

    Are Reader among those who often say thank you, even for small things? This is one of the signs of a humble attitude , Reader! They will easily say thank you for help and service from others. For example, to waiters who bring food, couriers who deliver packages and other small things. 

    3. Have a high sense of curiosity

    Humble people are eternal learners aka always thirsty for knowledge. They will make more use of time to study, both academically and learning from other people’s experiences. No wonder if humble people are sometimes identified as serious people. 

    4. Prioritize the interests of others

    A humble person will understand his worth. Because of this, they rarely stand out in front of others, just to show how smart or great they are. 

    In addition, they will also realize that as many things as they know are not the most important. But how much they care about others. 

    5. Able to handle ego

    A humble person is less likely to engage in ego-driven disagreements or disagreements. This is because they understand that everyone has a different perspective and that perspective is just as valuable as their own. 

    6. Have many friends

    In general, humble people think more flexibly. Therefore, they will be easier to get along with anyone who has a different mindset. They can get along well and rarely have conflicts or disagreements with others. 

    7. Easy to compromise

    Arrogant people are quite difficult to be invited to compromise on something. Unlike those who have humility in themselves. Humble people tend to find it easier to meet in the middle and reach a compromise that benefits both sides. This applies in all aspects of both work and relationships.

    8. Not proud to admit wrong

    Admitting mistakes is sometimes difficult for some people, but not for those who have a humble attitude. When wrong or confused, they will not seek justification and immediately apologize. If true, they are also not arrogant or arrogant. 

    9. Accept criticism or other people’s input

    Humble people will always be open to the opinions of others. They understand that there are 2 sides to every argument. Therefore, humble people will listen and accommodate every input, criticism and admit that other people’s ideas or opinions are better than theirs. 

    10. Do not envy the success of others

    Humble people will celebrate and be happy with the success or happiness of others. They sincerely congratulate their colleagues or friends on their achievements. 

    11. Listen a lot, talk a little

    They are humble people who listen more than dominate the conversation. In addition, when telling stories or speaking they do not exaggerate everything or look for validation or acceptance from others.

    12. Always be grateful for what you have

    Being grateful for what you have, whether it’s in good or bad conditions, is a manifestation of humility. So, so that Reader can always feel happy and joyful, then thank God a lot for all the blessings. 

    13. Follow the work of devotion even if you are a well-respected and respected official

    In the community, devotional work activities are often held, so even though Reader has a highly respected and respected position, there is nothing wrong with continuing to participate in the devotional work activities. 

    14. Helping others who have done evil to us

    What is the attitude of Reader when he sees people who used to do bad things suddenly experience difficulties? Surely even if the person has done less good to us then when he is in trouble we are obliged to help and help him. The attitude of always wanting to help others who have done good to us is a reflection of humility. 

    15. Openness to accept every test and problem

    The next humble attitude is to openly accept every test and problem that comes in life. A humble attitude comes from believing that all problems and trials come from God. 

    16. Be patient when insulted

    What did Reader do when insulted and insulted by others? Everyone definitely has a different reaction, yes, Reader. But when Reader is insulted by other people, it is best to try not to respond to other people’s insults and make the insults a lesson that has wisdom for you. Reader’ attitude of being patient is a reflection of his humble attitude. 

    17. Putting other people first even if they are a respected person

    Still putting others first even if someone is looked up to is one of the humble attitudes. For example, an official or prominent person is queuing even though he may not have to queue but he chooses to queue because there are other people queuing. 

    18. Not arrogant despite having a lot of wealth

    Another example of humility is not being arrogant despite having a lot of money or property, which can be used to buy whatever you want to buy. So, even though Reader has abundant property, he still feels that the property or wealth he owns is a deposit from God, so that at any time the property he owns can be taken back by His owner. 

    How to Apply Humility

    Applying humility in everyday life as a commendable attitude that needs to be done in everyday life. This trait is a trait that is shown by not being proud of what we have. 

    Applying humility in life turns out to have its own priority that is beneficial for life both in this world and in the afterlife. This is in accordance with what is stated in the following hadith narrated by Imam Muslim:

    “Alms does not reduce property. God does not add to a servant the nature of forgiveness but will glorify himself more and more. And also no one has the quality of tawadhu (humility) because of Allah but Allah who exalts him.” (HR. Muslim no. 2588).

    The property can be applied in various ways. For example, not bragging about one’s advantages in front of others, always being open to other people’s input and advice and always appreciating other people’s success. 

    The Benefits of Having a Humble Attitude 

    Why should you have a humble attitude in the work environment as well as the everyday environment? Because the work environment or everyday environment is the most visited place because they spend a lot of time there. 

    There will be many relations, more experienced people and significant others. Therefore, it is very important to have a humble attitude in the work environment so as not to create arrogance and feel the greatest and most capable. Does Reader know the benefits of being humble? Let’s take a look!

    1. Build good relationships

    When Reader is humble and not arrogant, it will certainly be better to develop a good relationship. No one is comfortable with someone who has an arrogant attitude. A good relationship in the work environment or the surrounding environment is of course very important, if you have a good relationship between colleagues, the work environment will definitely be more comfortable. 

    2. Build good teamwork

    A good relationship and relationship between colleagues in the work environment is very much needed. For example, if a leader is not humble, of course the team under him will not be comfortable in the work environment. However, if Reader is humble, this can build good teamwork. 

    3. Creating relationships 

    Being humble and building good relationships can also have a positive impact by creating relationships. If in the work environment, of course this relationship is very important both to support careers and to improve and develop Reader’ abilities. 

    4. Can continue to learn

    Being humble will also make Reader feel that their knowledge and skills are not enough. Curiosity will make Reader able to continue learning and be humble. This is also one of the triggers for Reader to continue to be curious and develop skills. 

    5. Easy to adapt 

    Not being arrogant and humble will make Reader know the position well and neither exaggerated nor humble. When Reader locates itself well, it will be able to adapt quickly in the work environment. 

    6. People become more sympathetic

    Another benefit of being humble is that other people will be sympathetic towards us, Reader. This is nothing else because the nature of Reader is very opposite to the arrogant nature. Where arrogance is not liked by others. 

    Characteristics of Humble People

    By understanding the meaning of humility, it will be easier to apply it in everyday life. Here are the characteristics of people with a humble attitude and nature.

    1. Not selfish and selfish.
    2. Able to handle his emotions wisely.
    3. Helper and prioritize the interests of others. 
    4. Always be grateful for receiving and getting help from others. 
    5. Forgive people who have done wrong. 
    6. Do not discriminate against others based on position, class, taste and so on. 
    7. Don’t try to justify yourself so always apologize when you do something wrong. 
    8. Easier to accept criticism and include others. 
    9. Make the success and achievements of others as motivation. 
    10. More listening than talking. 

    How to Cultivate Humility

    To cultivate a humble attitude, one needs to be aware of the following things:

    1. Realizing our need for help and guidance. 
    2. Believing in spiritual and transcendental reality.
    3. Believing in our need to give to a higher power. 
    4. Realizing our need to make amends and clean up mistakes. 
    5. Realizing our limitations and our mistakes. 
    6. Believing in life after death.
    7. Awareness of our mortality as human beings. 

    Well, that’s about the meaning, benefits and examples of humility, Reader. Humility in a person does not come by chance. However, it should be formed and also from some life experiences. After realizing a few things, slowly a humble attitude will also be embedded in a person. Of course this should also be accompanied by a positive and supportive environment. Hope this article inspires you! Good luck!

     

  • Definition of Management Trainee and 16 Tasks

    Definition of Management Trainee and 16 Tasks

    What is the meaning of management trainee ? Management trainee  or what is often referred to as the term MT is indeed no stranger to the ears. However, there may still be some who ask about the meaning of  management trainee .

    In addition, there are many who do not know the duties of  a management trainee . Many  fresh graduates  choose to enter the MT world. It was done as a stepping stone in the career world.

    When entering  training , participants will get a lot of training. However, in addition to that, the participants will also gain a lot of knowledge. They will participate in the trial program in each department.

    Then, what is the meaning of  management trainee?  This article will briefly discuss the meaning of  management trainee , its requirements, duties and responsibilities and the benefits of following this program.

    Definition of Management Trainee

    The training will be carried out in each department of the company. Then will be evaluated by the manager or senior manager. They will then be placed in the department they control.

    The purpose of holding this program is to create new manager candidates in a company. The manager that will be created is allocated to various fields. Such as sales, marketing, operational midwifery and so on.

    Some people often equate  management trainee  or MT with internship programs in general. However, both are different programs. Management trainee programs   are more difficult than internship programs in general.

    The activities will be more challenging. Because, there will be many surprises from the company in it. Therefore, each participant must prepare and improve the abilities they have.

    In addition, the difference between  management trainees  and interns lies in their position. People who undergo  management trainees  are people who are already legally part of the company. While the trainees are only temporary.

    Intern participants can be said to still be “outsiders” from the company. Management trainee  is also a role that is discussed in a company organization. They are official employees in the company.

    However, in the career level, the role and salary will be different from the employees in general. There are several different terms to refer to  management trainees  in each company. Such as Graduate Program, Management Associate Program, Officer Development Program, Future Leaders Program, Global Leaders Program and so on.

    However, if you look back, the terms from  the management trainee  have similarities. The similarity is emphasizing  development  and  leadership , or a development and leadership. However, basically all those terms are the same as the meaning of  management trainee .

    That is, participants will be prepared and developed to become a leader. They will become leaders in the company after completing the  management trainee program  .

    Management Trainee Requirements

    However, in general or in outline,  the management trainee requirements  are as follows:

    • Have good communication skills.
    • Have mathematical ability.
    • Have computer skills.
    • Having the ability in verbal presentation.
    • Have skills in written presentation.
    • Have MS skills. Strong office.
    • Have relevant experience in the same field.
    • Have a business or management degree.
    • Speak in math and computer skills.
    • Speak in verbal and written presentations.
    • Strong MS Office skills.
    • Relevant experience in a similar field.
    • Possess a management or business degree.

    Management Trainee Duties and Responsibilities

    • Complete all assigned tasks.
    • Helping other jobs every day.
    • Participate in workshop activities, meetings and other classes.
    • Learn and observe from the experiences of other colleagues.
    • Absorb and understand information and knowledge about company rules, work processes and SOPs that apply in the company.
    • Listen in detail to all input or criticism given by managers, supervisors, and other seniors.
    • Meet all requirements.
    • Follow all the meetings held in the training.
    • Follow all company rules, safety protocols and health protocols.
    • Prepare documents.
    • Make a report.
    • Learn about the resolution of a problem.
    • Listen well to all the speakers in the training or meeting.
    • Willing to go to another office or branch.
    • Join to jump right into the training process.
    • Following the test and evaluation at the end of the training session.

    Benefits of Following a Management Trainee

    Not only that, there may be doubts when looking at the tasks that must be done in following the  management trainee program . However, there are many benefits that can be taken when following the  management trainee program . Especially for you   fresh graduates .

    What are the benefits of following the program? Here is the explanation.

    1. Train the ability to work together

    To be a good manager, one must be able to work well together. That does not only apply to co-workers of the same profession. However, towards  customers .

    Through this training program, a person’s ability to work together will continue to be trained. This is done until they can master and pass the training program. The way to train the ability to work together in  management trainees  is to divide them into several groups.

    The group will be used as a place to practice cooperation in the next few months. All training participants must be able to solve the problems encountered. In addition, they must be able to work together in completing the test that will be given.

    2. Teaching the spirit of leadership

    One of the functions of management in a company is leadership. Therefore, in this training all participants will be trained. The participants will be prepared how to be a good manager in a company.

    Not only that, the participants will learn more about leadership. And be able to master the leadership attitude, as needed by a manager.

    3. Work according to interests and talents

    The third benefit of following a management trainee program   is being able to work in a place that suits your interests and talents. Mostly, a company will use a generalization system in the  management trainee process.

    Based on that, so in the program will be taught and presented with various types of job divisions available. For example, a person will start trying different types of jobs. Starting from finance, marketing, communication,  supply chain  and so on.

    Through that,  the supervisor  will know where the person’s best abilities are. The participants can also participate in the discussion, as well as explain which role they like best in the business.

    That’s a brief summary of the meaning of  management trainee , requirements, responsibilities and the benefits that can be gained if you follow the  management trainee program .

     

  • Definition of Functional Foods and Examples of Functional Foods

    Definition of Functional Foods and Examples of Functional Foods

    Functional Food – As we know that every human being definitely needs food or food to survive. With the food we eat, we will get energy or strength to be able to do our daily activities, be it heavy activities or light activities. In addition, food can make the body fit and healthy, thus avoiding some diseases.

    In this fast-paced life, human awareness of the importance of healthy food is quite high. In fact, it can be said that most people are aware that food does not only function as a filler to fill the stomach, but it is necessary to observe the nutritional content of the food eaten. Things like this need to be spread to others so that more and more people behave in a healthy way, especially through food.

    However, there are still many foods out there that contain pesticides. This is because when the food is grown or harvested it does not use organic ingredients. If the pesticide substance is still within normal limits, it does not really harm our body. However, if the pesticide substance is beyond normal limits, then it is best not to consume that food.

    For those of you who don’t know what functional food is, let’s get acquainted with the term. By getting to know functional foods, you can live a healthy life, so that your body’s health can be improved and the risk of disease can be reduced. So, read this article to the end, Reader.

    Meaning of Functional Food

    In maintaining life, humans need food, especially food that contains the nutritional value needed for the body. By consuming nutritious food, we can create a healthy body. A healthy body will make us feel better in carrying out various activities and the most important thing about a healthy body is that it can reduce the risk of getting sick.

    To get a healthy body, not only consume nutritious food, but you need to get used to organizing the right diet. With nutritious food and a regular diet, the body is not only healthy, but will be fit as if there is a sense of enthusiasm in carrying out activities.

    Food or functional food is food that is born from food ingredients that contain nutrients and bioactive compounds that play a very important role in maintaining the health of the body. Therefore, functional food is food or food that is natural or has gone through a processing process that has the function of maintaining the metabolism of the human body.

    Functional foods can be eaten as foods that have been freed from harmful chemicals, one of which is pesticides. Food that is free from pesticides will not harm the body, it can even make the body healthier

    Currently, functional food can be known by several terms, namely Functional food, Nutraceutical, Pharma food, Designer food, Vita food, Phytochemical, Food Aceutical, Health food, Natural food, and Real food. Although functional food has many terms, but until now there has not been an agreed functional food term.

    The Meaning of Functional Food According to Experts

    According to the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI)

    Functional foods are natural and artificial foods that contain one or more compounds that are beneficial for health.

    According to Astawan

    Astawan says that functional food is food that contains active components that can have a positive impact on health, apart from the benefits provided by the nutrients contained therein.

    According to the Consensus Document Scientific Concepts of Functional Foods in Europe

    This consensus document was published by the European Commission Concerted Action on Functional Food Science in Europe (FUFOSE). Based on this document, functional food is food that is proven to provide one or more benefits that can be felt by the body, maintain health and fitness, and reduce the risk of disease.

    According to Nenden Indrayati A

    Functional food is food or food that is natural or that has been processed, containing one or more compounds based on scientific research that are considered to have a variety of specific physiological functions that have a good impact on human health.

    According to Goldberg 

    Goldberg states that functional foods are foods (not pills, powders or capsules) that come from natural ingredients. This food can launch processes in the body, such as taking care of physical and mental conditions, curing diseases, and preventing diseases.

    Functions of Functional Foods

    According to Astawan, functional food has three functions, namely sensory, nutritional, and physiological .

    1. Sensory

    The first function of functional food is sensory or food that has an interesting color and appearance and the taste of the food is very delicious. Food with an attractive appearance will look very tasty to enjoy, so that there are nutrients that enter the body. In addition, food texture is also included in sensory .

    2. Nutritional

    Every human being definitely needs nutrition to support his life. In this function, food contains higher nutrients than similar foods. The nutrients contained in the food will provide a positive impact that can be felt by every human body.

    3. Physiological

    Food can provide a physiological effect that can be felt by the body, such as the body’s immune system is well maintained, the nervous system can function properly, delay the aging process, and prevent the appearance of diseases.

    Examples of Conventional Functional Foods

    Taken from several sources, examples of conventional functional foods include:

    1. Fruits

    Fruits are well known as food or intake rich in vitamins. Each fruit has different vitamins. Therefore, everyone should choose fruits that suit the needs of the body. For example, oranges that are rich in vitamin C, apples that contain a lot of vitamin A, bananas that contain vitamins A and C, and other fruits.

    2. Spices

    Indonesia is very well known for its spices, even almost every preparation of Indonesian cuisine contains spices. Spices that can be used as functional foods, such as cinnamon, cloves, turmeric, ginger, etc.

    3. Fermented food

    Fermented food can be used as a functional food. Currently, there are many fermented foods, such as tempeh, kimchi, kefir, kombucha, and so on.

    4. Drinks

    Some drinks will be beneficial for the body as long as they are consumed regularly and not excessively. Drinks that can be used as functional food because they have nutrition in them, namely coffee, black tea, green tea, herbs, and others.

    5. Vegetables

    Just like fruits, vegetables contain vitamins and substances that are very beneficial for the health of the body. We should get the vegetables that are around us. Vegetables around us, such as spinach, cauliflower, broccoli, kale, mustard greens, white mustard, etc.

    6. Grains

    Grains that look small turn out to be included in functional food. Grains as functional food, such as buckwheat, brown rice, wheat, oats, barley, etc.

    7. Seafood

    It is no longer strange that seafood contains a lot of vitamins and substances that are beneficial for the body. Therefore, seafood is included in functional foods. Examples of seafood are salmon, anchovies, sardines, cod, prawns, lobsters, and others.

    8. Nuts

    After grains, nuts can also be used as functional foods, including almonds, cashews, pistachios , Brazil nuts, macadamia nuts , and so on.

    9. Legumes

    Legumes are foods that contain nutrients and belong to the legume family. The amount of nutrients contained in legume plants, so the plants are included in functional foods, such as peanuts, chickpeas, soybeans, lentils, red beans, green beans, etc.

    Examples of Functional Food Modifications

    Below will be given examples of functional foods that have been modified. The examples are taken from several sources, namely:

    1. Yogurt

    Yoghurt is a food made from milk that is processed by fermentation. Yogurt is rich in vitamin D content that can strengthen bones.

    2. Almond milk

    After yogurt, now there is milk made from nuts, such as almond milk and cashew nut milk which are very beneficial for our body because they contain a lot of vitamin D and calcium.

    3. Bread and pasta

    Are you someone who eats bread or pasta for breakfast? Bread and pasta turns out to have a lot of iron content. The iron content can reduce the risk of anemia.

    4. Cereal

    The next modified food is cereal. Cereal is enriched with vitamin B12, so it is very suitable to be used as a functional food.

    5. Packaged juice

    If you are too lazy to make juice, then you can buy bottled juice. Although this juice is packaged, the nutritional content in it is still very good for the body.

    Types of Functional Foods

    Functional foods are divided into several types, namely based on the source of food or food and based on the way it is processed.

    1. Based on Food Sources

    Functional food sources are still divided into two, namely plant-derived food sources and animal-derived food sources. Plant-based foods, such as grapes, tomatoes, brown rice, soybeans, etc. While the food source comes from animals, such as salmon, tuna, milkfish, and others. Not only fish, animal food sources also come from beef, goat meat, etc.

    2. Based on the Processing Method

    There are three types of functional food processing methods, namely natural functional food, traditional functional food, and modern functional food.

    a. Naturally

    Functional food can naturally be interpreted as food that can be eaten directly or processed into a dish, such as kale, spinach, broccoli, etc. Fruits also include naturally functional foods, such as oranges, watermelons, pears, guavas, and so on.

    b. Traditionally

    Indonesia is well known for its traditionally processed foods. Functional foods processed traditionally, such as kencur rice, bandrek, tape, dali , and others.

    c. Modernly

    After functional foods that were processed traditionally, now functional foods can be processed in modern ways, such as pasta, isotonic drinks, sausages, packaged juices, and others.

    Benefits of Functional Foods

    Functional foods that we consume have several benefits for us. Below will be briefly explained the benefits of functional food.

    1. Protect Yourself From Disease

    It seems that it has become a common thing that functional food is indeed one of our personal protectors in order to avoid various diseases, especially chronic diseases. Not only that, functional food can also be used as medicine when we are affected by an illness.

    Apart from medicine, the body needs energy so that our body has the ability to move, so that the disease can be fought well. By protecting yourself from illness, it is the same as making the people closest to you happy.

    “Why can functional foods protect us from disease?” That question may often appear for some people, especially those who are not used to consuming functional foods. In functional food there is a substance called “antioxidant”. The molecules in antioxidant substances will protect us from free radicals. Free radicals are substances that can damage cells in the body.

    Thus, we should assume that health is the number one thing that needs to be taken care of, so we will try to eat functional food and eat with a regular diet.

    2. Keeping the Body Not Deficient in Nutrition

    The nutrients in functional foods are very abundant, so that if we consume those foods, the nutrients in the body will be fulfilled. The nutrients found in functional foods, such as vitamins, minerals, fiber, and healthy fats. All these nutrients are beneficial for the body. For example, fiber that can be useful for smoothing the digestion of food, vitamins that are useful as boosters of the body’s immunity, and so on.

    If our body suffers from a lack of nutrition, then it is very vulnerable to disease, so it will be difficult to do various daily activities. In fact, some diseases require us to ask for help from others, such as heart, stroke, etc.

    Basically, there are many diseases caused by our lack of body nutrition. For example, goiter caused by iodine deficiency, anemia caused by iron deficiency, and many more.

    Therefore, if we want to avoid diseases caused by malnutrition, we must get used to consuming functional foods regularly. Even better, we should get used to a healthy lifestyle, such as sports, regulating sleep patterns, etc.

    3. Encouraging the Growth and Development of Children

    The growth of the child must be observed so as not to experience a delay in growth. If a child experiences growth retardation, then some parts of the body will not function optimally. Body parts that cannot function optimally will make it difficult for a child to do some activities, so they will be “left behind” from children of their age.

    Functional foods have nutritional contents that can be beneficial for children’s growth, such as vitamin B12, omega 3, calcium, folic acid, and others. Vitamin B12 and calcium are very good for the growth of children’s bones, the fulfillment of these two nutrients, then the bones will be strong. Omega 3 can improve brain health and intelligence. Folic acid reduces a child’s risk of spinal cord disease, reduces the risk of neural tube defects, etc.

    For this reason, every parent should give functional food as soon as they are children, so that the child’s growth will go well. Parents can provide food, such as milk, grains, cereals, etc.

    Conclusion

    Food or food is the main source in human life because with food, then humans can undergo various kinds of daily activities. Food consumed by humans can be of natural origin or that has gone through the processing process. From wherever the food we consume comes from, we must look at the quality of the food. Not only looking at the quality of food, but the nutrition in a food also needs to be considered.

     

  • Meaning of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect and its Types

    Meaning of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect and its Types

    Initially, food 4 healthy 5 perfect was a campaign carried out by the government. As time progresses, society becomes more aware of the importance of healthy food. So now people are flocking to eat healthy food.

    Healthy food is very beneficial for the body. There are many benefits to be gained from eating healthy food. In addition, healthy food is not difficult to find. There are many shops that sell healthy food ranging from raw materials to food menus.

    However, what exactly is healthy food? This article will discuss the meaning of healthy food and its benefits for the body.

    Meaning of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect

    While 5 perfect is milk that becomes additional nutrition. Initially, this 4 healthy 5 perfect food was a campaign. A campaign promoted by the government to its citizens. However, as time goes by this becomes a lifestyle for the community.

    Awareness of the importance of consuming healthy food continues. However, it should still be accompanied by a healthy lifestyle. Examples include regular exercise, enough rest, a healthy and clean lifestyle, and many more. Through healthy food and a healthy lifestyle, health will always be maintained and avoided from various diseases.

    Types of Food 4 Healthy 5 Perfect

    1. Plant Food

    In addition, carbohydrates also have great benefits in the body. The benefit is as the main energy in the body. Complex carbohydrates are the healthiest type of carbohydrates for the body. Complex carbohydrates consist of fibers and starches that are strung together in long, complex chains.

    Complex carbohydrates also have more nutrients. However, complex carbohydrates take longer to digest in the body. Foods that contain complex carbohydrates have a lot of minerals, vitamins and fiber. All those contents are important for the health of a person’s body.

    The staple food sources that go into the 4 healthy 5 perfect food are diverse. For example, rice is widely consumed by people in Indonesia. In addition, potatoes are also one of the staple foods in Indonesia. Not only that, staple foods such as bread, yams and cassava are also widely consumed as staple foods.

    2. Side dishes

    Protein has amino acid content in it. The structures and functions in the body depend on how the proteins in the body are. The arrangement of tissues, cells and organs in the body will not happen if there is no protein in it.

    There will be many deficiencies in the body if the protein content in the body is lacking. The protein can be obtained through food. If a child does not have enough protein, it will cause problems in the child’s nutrition. So that he will suffer from malnutrition, this will threaten the child’s life.

    Therefore, it is necessary to have complete protein for the health of the body. These proteins can be obtained from various sources, such as animal sources. Like fish, eggs, and meat. Apart from animals, protein can also be obtained from vegetable or plant sources. Examples are tofu, tempeh, soybeans and nuts.

    3. Vegetables

    Vitamins are things that also have an important role in the body. So much needed by the body. Vitamins are responsible for producing energy and immune function in the body. In addition, vitamins are also responsible for blood clotting. In addition to the functions above, there are still many other functions of vitamins in the body.

    Not only vitamins, vegetables also contain many minerals that have various benefits. One of them is to play a role in the growth process. In addition, minerals also have a role in bone health and fluid balance. There are many more functions of minerals for the body.

    Vegetables are very healthy foods. In addition to being nutritious, vegetables are also rich in fiber. So good for digestion. A simple way to maintain health is to eat a lot of vegetables. Not only that, eating lots of vegetables will also protect the body. The body is protected from various diseases. Chronic diseases such as diabetes, heart disease and cancer can be prevented by eating lots of vegetables.

    4. Fruit

    In fruits there is also fiber that can help health. Like facilitating defecation. And lower cholesterol levels in the body. In Indonesia, there are many types of fruits. Many people do not like to eat vegetables, but prefer to eat fruits. That’s because the fruit has a more varied taste. Like having a fresh, sweet, sour taste, etc.

    5. Milk

    One of the things that is often associated with drinking milk is bone health. That’s because of the combination of its strong nutrition. A combination of calcium, potassium, protein and phosphorus. Grass-fed full-fat milk products also contain vitamin K2. All these nutrients are important and have a big role in maintaining bone health.

    In Indonesia, the most commonly consumed milk is cow’s milk. Not only drinking milk directly, milk is also widely used as a food ingredient. Such as cream, cheese, yogurt, butter and many other products.

    In addition to cow’s milk, there are still several types of milk consumed by Indonesian people. There are some people who are sometimes allergic to cow’s milk. However, he can replace it with other types of milk. Such as soy milk, goat milk and other types of plant milk.

    The most commonly consumed milk is cow’s milk. A wide variety of food products are made from cow’s milk, such as cheese, cream, butter, and yogurt. Other types of milk such as goat milk, soy milk , and other types of plant milk.

    Food Benefits 4 Healthy 5 Perfect

    1. Preventing malnutrition

    One of the great benefits that can be obtained when eating healthy food is preventing malnutrition from occurring. Malnutrition is one of the high-risk health problems. To minimize it, you can eat healthy food. These 4 healthy 5 perfect foods will help maintain the nutrients in the body. So that the body will not lack nutrition.

    2. Improve the immune system

    One of the benefits of eating healthy food is improving the immune system. From now on, pay attention to the food menu that will be consumed. Consume vegetables and fruits in sufficient amounts for the body. Vegetables and fruits have many nutrients for the body. In addition, many vitamins are contained in it. This will form a better immune system.

    One example of a vitamin that is important to consume is vitamin C. Many fruits contain vitamin C. Such as oranges, strawberries, mangoes and kiwi fruit. Not only fruits, many vegetables also contain vitamin C. Consuming it regularly is believed to prevent various diseases.

    3. Controlling body weight

    One of the benefits of eating 4 healthy 5 perfect foods is being able to control body weight. Consuming healthy and nutritious food can make the body maintain a healthy weight and idea. In addition, eating healthy food can also reduce the risk of chronic health problems.

    In addition to keeping the body healthy, eating healthy food can also help reduce weight. Many people diet and choose to eat healthy food. However, a healthy diet program should also be accompanied by regular exercise.

    4. Lowering sugar levels

    Sugar levels in the body can decrease as a result of consuming healthy foods. Through a healthy diet, diabetics can manage the level of glucose in their blood. For people with diabetes, it is very important to limit foods that have a very high level of salt and sugar.

    So it is recommended to consume healthy and nutritious food. In addition, the food consumed should be low in sugar and salt. It is useful so that the glucose in the blood is not high.

    Examples of foods that can be consumed are nuts. Like almonds and hazelnuts. In addition, cucumbers and tomatoes are also good for consumption.

    5. Take care of the digestive system

    There are many bacteria in the large intestine. However, those bacteria have an important role in the process of metabolism and digestion. Through healthy food that is low in fat, the intestines will be healthier. In addition, consuming foods high in fiber will also help. Examples of foods that can take care of digestion are green vegetables such as sweet potatoes. In addition, yogurt and egg whites also have benefits for maintaining the digestive system.

    6. Keeping the mood

    Not only physically healthy, nutritious food will help maintain spiritual health. There are several studies that prove that eating a healthy food menu will affect feelings or mood. The opposite will also happen, if the eating pattern is not healthy then it will trigger increased symptoms of depression. In addition, the body becomes easily tired.

    Read: Healthy Food According to Blood Type

    7. Helps growth

    Growing children really need to eat healthy food. In the process of growth and development, that will be very helpful. Food that has balanced nutrition will help the body in carrying out its functions. In addition, nutrition such as protein, minerals, vitamins, carbohydrates and fats will help the child to stay active.

    8. Reduce the risk of cancer

    Another benefit of healthy food is reducing the risk of cancer. The development of cancer cells will be prevented through healthy and nutritious foods. To take care of that, it is recommended to consume foods containing beta-carotene, antioxidants and vitamin A. These contents can be found in fruits, vegetables and nuts.

    9. Maintain skin beauty

    One of the ways to treat the skin is with nutritious food. A body that gets good nutrition will have an effect on the skin. The skin will be healthier and smoother. In addition, it will look more youthful. To get that, consume healthy food. Such as vegetables, fruits and Omega-3 acids in the daily food menu.

    10. Improve brain memory

    One of the ways to maintain brain health is to eat healthy food. In addition to maintaining health, eating healthy food can also improve brain memory. Healthy foods that can be consumed are foods that contain vitamins D, E, C and Omega 3. In addition, flavonoids and polyphenols will be useful in protecting cognitive decline and dementia.

    Food that can be consumed is fish. Like tuna and milkfish. In addition, salmon is also believed to have good benefits for brain health. Not only that, catfish is also a good fish to consume.

    11. Improve sleep quality

    In addition to physical health problems, eating healthy food can also help improve sleep quality. In addition to eating healthy food, there are several things that can be avoided to get good quality sleep. Like drinks and foods that contain caffeine or alcohol.

    That is some explanation of the meaning and benefits of eating 4 healthy 5 perfect food. Although many people know the importance of eating healthy food, there are still some who ignore it. Therefore, do not forget to keep reminding to eat healthy food.

     

  • The Meaning of Kalam: History, Sources, and Its Relationship with Some Islamic Sciences

    The Meaning of Kalam: History, Sources, and Its Relationship with Some Islamic Sciences

    Meaning of Kalam – Does Reader know that the existence of kalam is one of the sciences that must be learned by Muslims? Yes, the existence of the knowledge of kalam is also as important as the knowledge of monotheism and fiqh. Although it is admitted that many people do not understand the study of the science of this pen. In fact, the existence of pen knowledge has existed since the time of the Prophet SAW, but at that time it was not yet known by such a term.

    Considering that all of us as Muslims are obliged to follow the truth of the Messengers of God, then that is why the knowledge of kalam exists. In fact, many scholars have also contributed to answering the existence of this knowledge. Then actually, what is the knowledge of the pen? What is the scope of pen knowledge? What is the history of the development of pen knowledge until now? Does the science of kalam have a relationship with other sciences, namely the science of philosophy and the science of Sufism? Well, for Reader to understand that, let’s read the following comments!

    Definition of Kalam Science

    If literally, the term “kalam” means ‘words’ or ‘conversation’. While in terms of terminology, the science of penmanship is the science that talks about the existence of Allah SWT, the attributes that must be in Him, the attributes that He does not have, the attributes that may be in Him, until the Messenger of God to determine the truth of his apostleship. If Reader each feels strange with the name of this science, it is only natural because people usually call this Science of Kalam as the Science of Monotheism.

    Definition of Kalam Science According to Experts

    Some scholars also put forward the definition of the Knowledge of Kalam, for example:

    According to Al-‘iji, the Science of Kalam is a science that provides the ability to establish Islamic religious beliefs by presenting arguments in order to eliminate existing doubts.

    According to Ibn Khaldun, Kalam is a science that contains rational arguments to defend the creed of faith and contains a rejection of the heretics (new actions without previous examples) that in the creed deviate from the wrong school of thought and ahlussunnah He also thinks that this knowledge will later contain reasons why we should defend the beliefs of the faith, of course by using the arguments of the mind and containing objections against those who deviate from the beliefs of the Salaf and AhlusSunnah.

    According to Hasbi al-Shiddieqy, the existence of the Science of Kalam or the Science of Tawheed is a science that talks about the ways of establishing religious beliefs by using convincing arguments, both naqli, aqli, and wijdani arguments.

    Well, from some experts’ opinions on what is the Knowledge of Kalam, it can be concluded that the Knowledge of Kalam or the Knowledge of Tawhid is a science that talks about how to establish the beliefs of the Islamic religion with valid evidence. These beliefs include Allah SWT (along with His attributes), messengers, revelations, the afterlife, faith, and others.

    As for why this knowledge is called the Knowledge of Kalam, because:

    • The most important question to be discussed in the first century of the Hijri is ‘does the Word of God (Al-Quran) include Qadim or Hadith?’. Therefore, the whole of science uses the name and makes it one of the most important parts of its study.
    • The basis of the Science of Kalam is the propositions of thought and the influence of these propositions is evident especially in the talks of the Mutakallimin (Islamic theologians).

    Scope

    It should be understood once again that the object of study in the Science of Kalam is indeed a bit more complicated and is even able to provoke a long debate in Islamic theological trends. Briefly, the main issues discussed in the Science of Kalam lie in 3 issues of scope, namely:

    1. Qismul Ilahiyat , that is, the sense of God’s existence and His attributes. The matters discussed are about:
    • Attributes of God. Does God really exist or not? This problem is debated by the Mu’tazilah and Ash’ariyah schools.
    • Qudrat and Iradat god. The question is debated in the Qadariyah and Jabariyah schools.
    • The question of human free will. This problem is closely related to God’s Qudrat and Iradat.
    • The problem of the Quran. What is a creature or not, and what is the original or new Al-Quran.
    1. Qismul Nububiyah , that is the relationship that cares between God and His creatures. The matters discussed are about:
    • God’s messengers who have been appointed to do certain work, namely Angels.
    • The revelation that God delivered to His Messenger both directly and through Angels.
    • The Apostles themselves received orders from God to deliver teachings to mankind.
    1. Qismul Al-Sami’yat , which is a question related to life after death. The matters discussed are about:
    • The day of human resurrection returns in the afterlife.
    • Day of reckoning.
    • Shiratal Mustaqim (bridge).
    • The question related to the place of retribution, be it heaven or hell.

    Other Names in the Science of Kalam

    The use of the term “kalam” in the Science of Kalam often makes the public feel alien to its existence. Therefore, there is another name for this Knowledge of Kalam, namely:

    1. Knowledge of Tawheed

    It is called the Science of Tawhid because it talks about the oneness of Allah SWT. According to the scholars of Ahl al-Sunnah, Tawheed is that Allah SWT is One and His essence, undivided, One in His attributes, which is eternal, unparalleled for Him, One in his actions- His, and He has no partner.

    2. Knowledge of Ushuluddin

    Named as Ilmu Ushuluddin because it discusses the principles of the Islamic religion. Not only the principles of religion, but also on the principles of religious belief with clear proofs (Al-Quran and Mutawatir hadith) as well as mental proofs.

    3. Knowledge of Aqidah or Aqa’id

    Named as Science of Aqidah or Aqa’id because it talks about Islamic beliefs. Sheikh Thahir al-Jazairi (1851-1919) also explained that the Islamic creed is the things that Muslims believe in, meaning they decide on the existing truth.

    History of Kalam

    Does Reader know that Kalam is included in the four scientific disciplines in the study of Islam? Yes, the other three are Jurisprudence, Sufism, and Philosophy. If in the Science of Fiqh it is more about the formal aspects of worship and Islamic law. Then in the Science of Sufism, we discuss more about aspects of appreciation and personal religious experience. While in Philosophy, it discusses more about things that are speculative reflections about this life.

    The early history of the emergence of Kalam is from the death of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, at which time there was a question among Muslims about who would be the successor of the Prophet (Khalifatul Rasul). This was then overcome by appointing Abu Bakar As-Shiddiq as caliph. After his death, the caliphate was led by Umar bin Khattab who at that time the Muslims seemed determined to experience expansion such as the peninsula from Arabia, Palestine, Syria, some Persian territories, to the Romans and Egypt.

    After the caliphate of Umar bin Khattab ended, Uthman bin Affan was appointed as the caliph to replace Umar. Uthman is still included in the wealthy Quraish group, his family also consists of Makkah Aristocrats who have trading experience and administrative knowledge. That knowledge was used in leading the administration in the regions outside the Arabian peninsula. But unfortunately, at that time nepotism tended to occur so that there was instability among Muslims. In fact, there were many opponents who did not agree with Uthman’s leadership, until finally he was killed by rebels from Kufa, Basrah, and Egypt.

    After Uthman died, Ali Abi Talib was selected as the next caliph candidate. However, he immediately received a challenge from other leaders who also wanted to become caliph, let’s say there were Talhah, Zubair, and Aisyah. The event is known as the Jamal War. Then, there was also a challenge that came from Muawiyah bin Abi Sufyan who at that time wanted to become caliph and demanded Ali to punish the murderers of Uthman. Due to the existence of those events, Theology emerged regarding the historical origin of the existence of the Science of Kalam.

    At the time of Prophet Muhammad SAW, the existence of the Knowledge of Kalam did exist but was not yet known by such a term. It was only known later, precisely after other Islamic sciences appeared one by one. Especially when people have talked a lot about belief in the supernatural (metaphysics). From the existence of political and historical events that happened in the past, grow the factors that caused the emergence of the Knowledge of Kalam, namely:

    Internal factors

    1. The existence of the Al-Quran in addition to inviting His people to believe in prophethood and things related to it, also alludes to the existence of groups and religions that existed in the time of the Prophet Muhammad SAW. The Qur’an does not allow their belief and opposes it with the following reasons:
    • As a group that denies religion and the existence of God, and also says that they are the ones who cause destruction and damage, as mentioned in QS Al-Jatsiyah verse 24.
    • As groups of polytheists, as mentioned in QS Al-Maidah verse 116.
    • As groups of infidels, as mentioned in QS Al-Isra’ verse 94.
    • As hypocritical groups, as mentioned in QS Ali Imran verse 154.
    1. There are passages that seem to contradict each other, so people come who collect the verses and philosophize them.

    External Factors

    1. Many of the followers of Islam, who used to be Jews, Christians, and others. After they “calmed down” from the pressure, they began to review their religious beliefs and expand them into Islam.
    2. The Muslim groups that existed in the past, especially the Mu’tazilah group, focused their attention on the broadcasting of Islam and refuted the reason that they were hostile to Islam, by knowing their beliefs as well as possible.
    3. The Mutakallimin want to balance their opponents using philosophy, so they study logic and philosophy.

    The science of Kalam is mentioned as a science that can stand on its own during the Dani Abbasid Empire, especially during the leadership of the caliph al-Makmun, which was pioneered by two Islamic figures namely Abu Hasan al-Ash’ari and al-Maturidi.

    Sources of Kalam Knowledge

    The existence of Kalam still makes the Al-Quran and Hadith as the main source of their study in an effort to explain the existence of Allah SWT, His attributes, and other issues of Islamic belief. Well, here are the sources of study from Ilm Kalam.

    1. Al-Quran

    In this holy book, there are many verses that talk about divine problems. For example in QS Al-Ikhlas verse 3-4 which means “(Allah) neither begets nor begets” “and there is nothing equal to Him” 

    2. Hadith

    In the hadiths of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, many talk about problems that are also discussed in the Science of Kalam. Among them is the Prophet’s hadith which explains the nature of faith and the division of groups, namely:

    “This hadith was narrated from ‘Abdullah bin ‘Umar. He said that the Messenger of Allah once said ‘What happened to the children of Israel will happen to my people…. The children of Israel have split into 72 groups and my community will split into 73 groups. All will go to hell, except for one group,’ ‘Who are they, O Messenger of Allah’ asked the companions. The Prophet replied, ‘They are those who follow my footsteps and my companions. (HR At-Tirmidhi)

    3. Human Thought

    Namely in the form of thoughts that are issued by Muslims and non-Muslims. Considering that Islam has used rational thoughts to explain things related to the verses in the Quran, especially those whose meaning was not clear even before Greek philosophy entered.

    The relationship between Kalam and other Islamic knowledge

    The existence of the knowledge of Kalam certainly has a relationship with other Islamic knowledge, namely in the form of:

    The relationship between Kalam and Islamic philosophy

    Many experts are of the opinion that Kalam and Islamic philosophy have a relationship, because basically Kalam also discusses divine and religious knowledge. While in Islamic philosophy discusses the intellectual proof.

    The relationship between Kalam and Sufism

    In relation to the Knowledge of Kalam, the existence of the Knowledge of Sufism has the following functions:

    • As a provider of spiritual insight in the understanding of Kalam. A deep appreciation through the heart of the Knowledge of Kalam makes it more understandable and can be applied in behavior. Therefore, the existence of Sufism can be said to be the perfecter of Kalam.
    • Functioning as a provider of spiritual awareness in the debates that exist in the Science of Kalam.

    The relationship between Kalam and Sharia

    In the Islamic religion, the existence of the knowledge of the pen is based on it being built through the Shari’a. If it is likened to, then sharia without the knowledge of Kalam is like a building hanging in the sky without any support.

    The relationship between Kalam and the Quran

    As mentioned before, the existence of Al-Quran has an inseparable connection with the Science of Kalam, because it is used as its main source. Al-Quran has a discussion about God in the form of essence, nature, asthma, actions, and demands, while Kalam will discuss about the oneness of Allah SWT.

    The relationship between the Knowledge of Kalam and the Knowledge of Ushuluddin

    In fact, the knowledge of Kalam is the popular name of the Knowledge of Ushuluddin. In Ushuluddin Science, which is also known as Theological Science (Divinity), discusses the basic principles of religion in the form of belief, monotheism, and i’tikad (belief) about the 6th pillar of Faith.

    The relationship between Kalam and Tawheed

    The science of Kalam is a science that discusses about God and bases its arguments on logic or ratio as proof against the argument of naqli or text. While Tawheed is a form of belief in God Almighty by believing in God and having no partner for Him. Therefore, Kalam and Tawhid both discuss about God.

    The relationship between Kalam and Ushul Fiqh

    According to Abu Hanifah, the existence of Fiqh is divided into two things, namely Fiqh Al-akbar and Fiqh Al-Ashgar. In Fiqh al-Akbar discusses beliefs, religious principles, and monotheism. While in Fiqh Al-Asghar discusses how to worship. Well, so the relationship between Ilm Kalam and Ushul Fiqh is both discussing belief and monotheism, especially in Fiqh Al-Akbar. In addition, both of them also use the Al-Quran and Hadith as their main sources.

    The relationship between the Knowledge of Kalam and the Knowledge of Aqidah

    Aqidah knowledge is knowledge that talks about matters related to belief in Allah SWT and His attributes of perfection. Well, in Ilmu Kalam also discusses such things.

    The relationship between Kalam and Sharia/Law

    Sharia is the whole of Islamic teachings in the form of divine norms, both governing inner behavior and concrete behavior. Well, in Ilmu Kalam also discusses this Sharia.

    Well, that’s the commentary on what Kalam is and its relationship with other Islamic sciences. Are Reader interested in learning this Science of Kalam?

    •  
  • Understanding Papers: Types, Structure, and How to Make Them

    Understanding Papers: Types, Structure, and How to Make Them

    Definition of Papers – Scientific writings are often made by academics to show the knowledge they are studying in depth in accordance with their respective fields. Almost all academics, whether they are still in school or college, know what is called a paper. The paper itself is usually used as a task to develop oneself. A paper is a scientific product written by someone. Writing a paper is not a difficult thing, but it only requires carefulness to see the situation and conditions to be used as a writing idea and also requires good writing skills based on the rules of paper writing.

    Therefore, in this article, we will explain in detail what a paper is, starting from the definition, type of paper, structure, and how to make a good and correct paper. The following is a complete explanation.

    Understanding Papers

    A paper is a scientific writing that discusses a specific topic that is included in the scope of knowledge. A paper has a systematic system that is divided into four parts, namely introduction, literature study, discussion, and conclusion or closing. In addition, a paper is one of the conditions to complete studies or education. A paper usually has a characteristic that is the result of a literature study or a report on the implementation of an activity, demonstrating an understanding of the theoretical problems being studied in the paper, showing the ability to deal with issues that come from the various sources used and demonstrating the various sources of information from the paper into one whole unit .

    The Meaning of the Paper According to the Experts

    The definition of a paper according to experts is certainly different in grammar from one to another. Even so, they all have the same meaning. The following are some definitions of paper according to experts:

    1. According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI

    According to KBBI, the meaning of a paper is divided into 2. The first is that a paper is an official writing about something that is mainly used for publication and at conferences and is often compiled and published. The second is that papers are written works by students or students to give a report in the context of the implementation of campus or school tasks.

    2. WJS Poerwadarminta

    According to him, the meaning of a paper is a written description that discusses a specific problem from which further discussion and explanation is obtained.

    3. Cape and Ardial

    According to Tanjung and Ardial, a paper is a written work that contains a problem written systematically and through logical and objective analytical thinking.

    4. Panuti Sudjiman

    According to him, a paper is a prose essay that is not fictional and discusses a specific topic. In the sense of a paper, it will generally be published in magazines and newspapers or it can also be in the form of an anthology book.

    Based on the meaning mentioned above, we can conclude that a paper is a formal scientific work with a specific discussion topic. The conditions for a written work to be called a paper are if it is based on one’s own thinking, is not plagiarized, has never been published before, and contains contemporary elements. For example, it contains a topic that is being hotly discussed by the public and the most important thing is that it is scientific.

    Types of Papers

    The following are the types of papers based on the type of study, among others:

    1. Deductive Papers

    A deductive paper is a paper based on a theoretical study which is relevant to the problem being discussed.

    2. Inductive Papers

    An inductive paper is a type of paper written based on empirical data that is objective in nature based on what is obtained from the field but remains relevant to the discussion.

    3. Mixed Papers

    A mixed paper is a type of paper that is compiled or written based on theoretical studies as well as empirical data. That means, this mixed paper is a combination of deductive and inductive papers. In the mixed paper, there are six categories based on the subject of the problem formulation discussed, namely:

    a. Scientific Papers

    Scientific papers are basically used for written works resulting from scientific studies that contain problems and discussions. You should note that if viewed in terms of principles and scientific procedures, a scientific paper will resemble a simple research report. Where scientific papers are generally written as a scientific problem solving suggestion. Certainly, the writer of a scientific paper will also need library studies and that is seen in the attached revision.

    b. Working Papers

    The working paper will usually be read at the working paper seminar. Where it will be delivered in the form of argumentation in a research result. In the work paper that is read there should be a problem that is presented. The presenter of the working paper has included assumptions and also hypotheses to answer the problem. Based on the content of such a paper, a discussion will arise.

    c. Research Papers

    A research paper is one of the terms used for scientific writings in the form of suggestions for solving a controversial problem without the intention of being read in a seminar.

    d. Position Papers

    A position paper is a paper prepared at the request of a party that serves as an alternative solution to a controversial problem. As for the procedure used as a discussion and writing is done scientifically.

    e. Analysis Papers

    Analytical papers are a type of empirically objective paper. As for the source of data obtained based on experience gained from discoveries, experiments, and also observations that have been made.

    f. Response Papers

    A response paper is a paper that is often used as a course assignment for students that contains a reaction to a reading.

    Paper Structure

    The structure of the paper consists of cover, introduction, table of contents, introduction, discussion, conclusion, and bibliography. The explanation of the structure of the paper is as follows:

    1. Cover

    Cover is the front page of a paper. Where the paper cover contains important information. Usually, an example of a paper cover contains the author’s name written in full, the logo of the institution or institution, the place and also the year of publication. The following are some examples of paper cover examples in universities:

    – Title of the paper.
    – Author’s name accompanied by NIM.
    – The name of the apologist lecturer.
    – Campus logo.
    – Name of major.
    – Faculty name.
    – University name
    – Year and place

    The writing on the cover page of the paper should be in accordance with the applicable format. An example of a paper cover with the title “The Influence of Education on the Character of the Nation”. In the sample cover of the paper, the title should use capital letters and be printed in bold. For the font on the cover title of the paper can be larger than other writing which is generally only size 14. So that the reader will find it easier and more focused to read the title of your paper.

    2. Introduction

    The introduction is not only found in the structure of the paper, but in almost all scientific works. Where this preface is an opening greeting from the author intended for the reader. The writing of the introduction is written before the writing of the table of contents of the paper. Generally, this introduction is written to provide information about anyone who has played a role and also contributed to the creation of the author’s paper, thanks, explains the main structure of the paper, and the basic thinking of creating the title and its purpose in outline.

    At the end of the introductory paragraph, you can add the hope and also the benefits of writing the paper to the readers. This preface is then closed with the date of manufacture and the author’s signature accompanied by a clear name.

    3. Paper Table of Contents

    The table of contents of the paper usually contains page information from each chapter and sub-chapter of the paper. Therefore, the table of contents of the paper is important and should be there. The function of the table of contents is to make it easier for readers to find the material they want to read. In addition to containing page numbers and chapter or subchapter titles, the table of contents also contains a list of pictures and a list of tables if any. The table of contents of the paper must be well organized, complete, and correct by arranging it in order, ie from the smallest to the largest page number. If the paper requires an appendix that supports the content of the paper, then the appendix can be included in the table of contents of the paper called the table of appendices.

    4. Chapter I Introduction

    In the structure of this paper is the main part of the paper that explains the problem to be discussed. Where in the introductory chapter it will be further divided into three important points that become sub-chapters, namely background, problem formulation, and also the purpose of writing.

    5. Chapter II Discussion

    In this section it is also included in the structure of the paper which is the description of the main topic in the writing. This happened because chapter II contains a discussion about research methods, research targets, and an explanation of the research results that have been obtained, either qualitatively or quantitatively. For qualitative papers, the discussion contains more theoretical studies that are discussed using one’s own language, instead of copying results from other sources. Qualitative paper data can be obtained from interview methods and other methods that support the discussion. So that it is exclusive and different from other papers.

    The composition between theoretical study and discussion should have more discussion compared to the theory, ie with a minimum ratio of 1:2. When quoting from the theory in the discussion, then the source must be included. It is important to show that the information obtained from the paper is authentic and not random. If the data is quantitative, then it can be discussed by making a table that contains numbers so that it is easy for readers to understand. A graph or diagram can also be made to show the increase or decrease of data with certain variables. So that it is easy to see and understand. Then the data that has been processed is discussed to answer the problem posed. From the discussion, theoretical foundations, theoretical comments that can be in the form of support or refutation of previous studies, are obtained.

    6. Chapter III Closing

    The last structure of the paper is the conclusion which consists of conclusions and suggestions. The conclusion is the meaning given by the writer from the discussion he has made. The characteristics of the conclusion in the paper are:

    – Contains a comprehensive meaning from the content of the discussion
    – The conclusion is not a summary of the content, but the answer to the problem discussed
    – Must be in accordance with the purpose and also the formulation of the problem
    – Can explain whether the answer to the problem is in accordance with the hypothesis
    – Written briefly and clearly
    – Can be written using point format

    The subchapter in the next cover is a suggestion. Suggestions are input from the author and tend to be aimed at the reader. For readers, the purpose of this suggestion is expected so that readers can apply it theoretically or practically in society. The suggestion is obtained from the content and conclusion of the paper to be developed, followed up on, and various things that need to be observed by further researchers. In addition, suggestions can also be used for policy makers or institutions related to research to be able to correct when something is not in accordance with the rules.

    7. Register Library

    The bibliography is the final part of the paper which serves to provide information about the sources that are used as a reference in the paper, especially in Chapter II of the discussion. The bibliography page is also included in the table of contents of the paper so that the reader can understand its location. The order of writing the bibliography should be alphabetical.

    Usually, the writing style starts from the author’s name written in reverse. Then followed by the year of publication and the title of the book whose first word is written using capital letters, then followed by the place of publication, and the name of the publisher. With the bibliography, it will provide information that the paper is written based on logical reasoning and scientific theory as explained by experts in books, websites, scientific journals, and others.

    How to Make Papers

    Here are some steps you can take to write a paper, among others:

    1. Choosing the Right Theme

    Theme is one of the important things that should be in a scientific work. Where the theme of the paper needs to be thought about in depth so that the paper made can be useful for others. The theme used in the paper is generally related to the writer’s academics. After finding a theme, write down ideas related to the theme.

    2. Formulating Purpose

    The next step in making a paper is by formulating the purpose. Once you have determined the appropriate theme, then the next step is to find the purpose of why you are writing the paper. Is it for education or for what?

    3 Determining the Limits and Title of the Paper

    The function of the paper’s limitations is to make the paper more specific and in-depth about the theme you will study. As for the title of the paper, it is made by involving variables that are the topic of discussion. So that readers can know the outline of the paper you wrote.

    4. Collecting References

    The way to make the next paper is to collect various kinds of supporting data or literature studies related to the title of the paper you will make. Steps to gather references can be done by making notes containing small summaries and writing quotes and even words that are difficult to learn.

    5. Developing the Paper Framework

    After searching for literature that produces a framework of thought. Therefore, the way to make the next paper is to develop ideas and ideas broadly and contextually from the framework of the paper based on the structure of the paper which is the basis for its preparation.

    That’s an explanation of what a paper is and various things in it. Starting from the meaning, type, structure, and how to make it. Hopefully useful.

     

  • Understanding Majas: Functions, Kinds, and Examples

    Understanding Majas: Functions, Kinds, and Examples

    Meaning of Majas – Who doesn’t know about Majas? Maybe the meaning of majas and all kinds of things are more familiar among students. Because, they are the ones who still get lessons and assignments to write poetry using majas. However, do you know that we often find the use of majas in everyday life? Even without us realizing it, we also often use majas in communicating with other people.

    In general, the use of majas in everyday life is often used in conversations with people who are close enough. Although it is often used in everyday conversation, many of us are still not aware that sometimes we use majas in our conversation. What’s more, there are many kinds of majas in Indonesian.

    In this article, the author will explain the meaning of majas and its various types. In addition, the writer will also explain the functions and examples of majas in Indonesia and their meaning.

    Meaning of Majas According to Experts

    Before discussing majas too deeply, it is important for us to know the meaning of majas according to experts. Of course they will have differences of opinion about the meaning of majas. For that, let’s look at the explanation of the meaning of majas from the experts.

    1. Dale and Warriner

    According to Dale and also Warriner, the meaning of majas is a metaphor that can affect many effects. The influence they mean is influence that can be done by comparing and introducing in general. Majas is generally used in short sentences. But despite that, majas has a value and also a taste that can give birth to certain connotations. In addition, majas is also often referred to as an imaginative word.

    2. Craft

    The meaning of majas according to Keraf (1988) is the effort of someone who represents his thoughts by using special language. Where the language can show the person’s personality. Keraf also said that there are three elements in language so that it is better impressed. These elements include, among others, honesty, politeness, and attractiveness.

    3. Moeliono

    Majas according to Moeliono are distinguished based on their style. Where it aims to animate an essay. Majas is also referred to as a denotation used to express a word that is moved. Not only that, majas is also often used to awaken the reader’s senses.

    4. Ratna

    Meanwhile, Ratna (2009) revealed that majas has a purpose which is to create an aspect of beauty in a literary work. However, the beauty of style in a language in literary works is a key element. Because, literary works can be used as a genre produced from human civilization and formed due to the activity and creativity of an author.

    5. Aminudin

    According to Aminudin (1995), majas is one of the language styles used as a technique in stringing together a sentence. Where later the structured sentences can be used to explain or describe ideas in accordance with existing ideas and norms. He also said that majas is presented as a classical rhetorical insight that is evaluated as a birth ornament.

    While the Javanese tradition considers the opposite, where majas is a type of rinengga language or the use of language arranged to be beautiful. But as time goes by, majas is no longer used just to be fashionable, but has a wider provision of songs. Where majas can provide awareness for its connoisseurs.

    6. Nurgiyantoro

    While Nurgiyantoro thinks that majas is a style of language that has its own way in its application. For example, the language in a prose, where majas is used to convey an idea and also the writer’s thoughts.

    7. Pradopo

    Almost the same as other opinions, Pradopo evaluates majas as a language that has a specific way of using it. Where the method aims to obtain certain effects in literary works. One of the ways is to include majas.

    8. Kridalaksana

    More specifically, Kridalaksana (2001) revealed that language style can be used to take advantage of the wealth of language that a person possesses in speaking or writing literary works. In addition, majas can also be used for certain things in order to get certain effects as well. Kridalaksana also says that the characteristics of majas in general have language characteristics of a group of literary writers.

    From the explanation of the meaning of majas above, we can conclude that the meaning of majas is a style of language that can be used to influence or convince the readers or listeners. That means, majas can be used both in written and oral form.

    Majas function

    After understanding the meaning of majas, now it’s time to learn about the function of majas itself. Here are some explanations about the functions of majas that you can learn.

    1. Build a Fun

    One of the functions of majas is to build a pleasure. When we use majas, then words that are generally ordinary will become more beautiful and interesting and more effective. That means, there is a sentimental value in every sentence that uses majas in it.

    When words, sentences, and even an essay are intended for other people specifically or may be intended for readers. So majas will create its own sense of pleasure compared to ordinary sentences. Of course, happiness here has various forms. It depends on the person receiving it.

    2. Creating an Imagination

    In addition to building pleasure, majas also serves to create an imagination. Because, majas is able to encourage someone to give birth to imagination. The presence of majas in a written work does have a meaning that can be interpreted differently from one person to another. The meaning of majas can vary depending on the person’s way of thinking, knowledge, and insight.

    Of course it will affect the quality of imagination or the formation of the perspective of the readers or connoisseurs. Not only that, majas also has the function of bringing the reader and the writer closer together.

    3. Bringing the Reader closer to the Author

    As already mentioned above, majas can also be used to bring the reader and the author closer emotionally. Why is that so? Because, there are so many different kinds of majas. Where from the large number of majas there is more and more giving pressure to more essential values.

    4. Essential

    Something that has an essential value will be deeply impressed. For example, when there is a sentence written using two different techniques. A sentence is written with general words and what they are. Then the second sentence is written using majas. Of course, sentences that have meaning will be more different and more meaningful.

    5. Increase Readers’ Attraction to Literary Works

    If you pay close attention, the presence of majas is actually intended to attract the attention of literary connoisseurs. Where the use of majas can increase the value in a literary work. Then majas can also give spirit to the work. Also helps in explaining the meaning and description of the writer.

    6. Creating a Suggestive

    One of the functions of majas is to create a suggestion from the writer to the reader. In addition, majas can also create dense, rich, interesting and effective information effects for readers. So that the readers will feel entertained and still get information from the literary work.

    All kinds of Majas

    Majas is divided into several types, within one type of majas it may still be differentiated into several other types. Well, this time we will tell you, what kind of majas there are. Let’s watch until the end!

    1. Comparative Law

    Comparative clauses are one of the types of clauses that function as comparative sentences. Well, the comparison majas itself has many more types. Here are some comparisons.

    a. Allegory

    This word is usually used in writing stories by using the method of making figurative sentences. This majas can be made as a sentence or can also be made a full paragraph.

    b. Allusions

    Majas allusion is often used as a sentence that can refer to a legend, event, metaphor, proverb or figure. This majas has a shortcoming which is often considered incomplete because it is quickly impressed.

    c. Simile

    Majas is usually used to compare things that are different but have a similar meaning. This majas can double as two majas at once, namely the comparison and parable majas.

    d. Metaphor

    Language Style This majas uses a direct comparative language style, this majas is used to compare comparisons both physically, properties, things and ideas.

    e. Synesthesia

    Using a style of language that has changed meaning due to the exchange of responses. This majas functions as the soul of a literary work.

    f. Litotes

    Language style that functions as a display of ideas about something that is considered strong and big. This Majas usually uses sentences that are not very strong, to mean polite.

    g. Hyperbole

    Shaped as an exaggerated figure with a specific purpose.
    Those are some types of comparisons, actually there are still other types of comparisons.

    2. Confirmation Authority

    Is one of the majas used to emphasize something, with the aim of increasing the level of understanding and impact of the readers or listeners. There are several types of affirming majas, such as pleonasm majas and repetition majas. Majas pleonasm itself has a definition as a majas that uses a language style that has characteristics as a marker that there are some words that must be repeated.

    Then for repetition is a majas that uses a language style that is useful to show the repetition of the whole word from the word made by the writer. The repetition can be in the form of words, clauses, phrases and even sentences.

    There are several types of majas that are still the same as affirming majas, such as:

    • Pararima
    • Apophasis
    • Alliteration
    • Parallelism
    • And so on.

    3. Dispute Resolution

    Opposition majas become majas that are used quite often. There are several types of opposition, such as:

    a. Paradox

    Majas paradox can be simplified into an opinion that has a conflict with the general opinion or the opinion believed by many people. Majas paradox has signs, such as the sentence is strange and considered unexpected. Majas paradox has a key, which is to be clever in hiding the truth.

    b. Antithesis

    Majas which generally uses two words, functions as an opposition between two ideas.

    • Oxymoron
    • Anachronism
    • Interminous contradictions

    4. Majas Sidran

    Sarcasm is used to allude to something with a specific purpose. Here are all kinds of sarcasm that we can present for you.

    a. Irony

    Majas sarcasm characteristically hides the truth and says the opposite of the fact. This Majas has a characteristic as if it raises something, then drops it.

    b. Sarcasm

    Satire uses words and even harsh sentences to hurt other people’s feelings, usually in the form of rude mockery or ridicule.

    c. Cynicism

    This majas will be expressed directly to the person with negative words. The majas of cynicism can be the opposite of the majas of irony.

    d. Satire

    Majas uses expressions that contain the meaning of sarcasm, irony and parody that serve to threaten and laugh at something.

    Majas examples

    Actually, from the various types of majas that have been mentioned above, there are still many more majas that have not yet been explored. so that it can be a picture or a concrete example of majas, here are 50 examples of majas.

    Majas Repetition

    Example:
    Suppose a rose blooms, you are the fragrant flower in my heart and mind.
    Like the ocean, you are the owner of wider knowledge

    Majas Epifora

    Example:
    If you forbid, I will not come.
    When I have time, then I will come on time

    Majas Pararima

    Example:
    Two days ago I used to deliver. Oh no, just yesterday.
    We mean to go to Pak RT’s house, want to organize a takbir keliling event, meaning to ask for permission to organize takbir keliling.

    Majas Alliteration

    Example:
    Satisfying the soul, captivating the
    body

    Majas Assonansi

    Example:
    Everyone is pressing on
    Harum’s chest as a secret flower

    Majas Simile

    Example:
    Like water on a taro leaf
    Like water with oil
    Lighting a spirit like a candle that never goes out The
    mother and child’s faces are like betel nuts split in two
    The woman is very beautiful, her eyes are like bright stars

    Majas Metaphor

    Example:
    Brian is a land crocodile
    Lazy to read so
    the night goddess shrimp brain is out of his contest

    Majas Personification

    Example:
    I miss talking to an old weed that is about to die
    Insects lament the increasingly selfish behavior of humans, even nature howls unable to advise the apathetic attitude of humans.
    Waving, bathing on the beach
    Not all romances will lead to marriage

    Depersonalization Majas

    Example:
    If you are the moon, then I am the star.
    If you are the envelope, then I will be the stamp.
    If I am a flower, then you are a beetle.

    Majas Alusio

    Example:
    Bandung is known as the Paris of Java.
    Yogyakarta is famous as a miniature of Indonesia.

    Majas Antithesis

    Example:
    My success in winning the race made him sad.
    Seeing that I failed to apply for a job made Ardi happy.
    Even though he tried and fought, he still failed.

    Majas Pleonasm

    Example:
    Rian went downstairs. It came down.

    Majas Euphemism

    Example:
    I often hear of female friends who sell themselves.

    Majas Synecdoche Pars Pro Toto

    Example:
    Campaign attributes are not carried

    Majas Synecdoche Totem Pro Parte

    Example:
    For students, generation Z and millennial children understand technology, especially social media.

    Majas Hyperbola

    Example:
    My love for you is as wide as an ocean that cannot be touched by humans.
    The divorce that happened to Rini’s parents made it seem as if their world had come to an end.

    Majas Litotes

    Example:
    I’m sorry if we only serve cold tea and village cakes.
    Sorry if I think for a long time, because my brain is squatting.

    Majas Metonymy

    Example:
    Ardi is confused about whether to buy an Avanza or an Ertiga.

    Majas Cynicism

    Example:
    Your words that always lie make me nauseous.
    I don’t want to see the hypocrisy of your attitude.

    Majas Sarcasm

    Example:
    Your appearance does not attract the lust of boys.
    No repentance, your habit of stealing is known to the whole world.

    Majas Anaphora

    Example:
    The sound is boring, the sound is deafening, the sound is hitting

    Majas Symmetry

    Example:
    Father is silent and mother does not like to speak when seeing Endru’s attitude.
    My sister hates Aryani’s behavior.

    Majas Climax

    Example:
    Everyone from children, teenagers, to adults like to watch ’tilik’ movies

    Majas Rhetorik

    Example:
    Where is there a person who does not want to succeed?
    Does salt taste salty?

    Interruption Majas

    Example:
    I, the people who have worked here for ten years, have never been promoted.

    Those are some explanations about the meaning of majas and its various types. Not only are they diverse, majas also have functions that are interesting enough to learn more about. Are you interested in learning slang and using it in everyday conversation?

     

  • The Meaning of Magazines – Functions, Criteria, and Complete Types

    The Meaning of Magazines – Functions, Criteria, and Complete Types

    Definition of Magazines – Since colonial times, the presence of mass media has played an important role in the independence process of Indonesia. Although at that time, the mass media was limited to two sheets of paper with several writings on them, but the written content contained great meaning and information.

    As time progresses, so does the mass media that circulates. Currently, mass media is divided into three forms, namely print mass media, electronic mass media, and online mass media .

    Print mass media is usually published daily, weekly, biweekly, or even monthly. Then, this electronic mass media usually takes the form of electronic devices such as radio and television to spread information. Meanwhile, this online mass media consists of telephone satellites and internet networks.

    According to Reader , the existence of magazines is included in which mass media ?

    If Reader doesn’t understand what a magazine is , let’s read the following explanation regarding the meaning of a magazine along with its functions, criteria, and various types!

    Meaning of Magazine

    According to Soeatminah (1987), the definition of a magazine is a periodical publication that contains articles and publications for an unlimited time and has a serial number.

    Well, based on the expert’s opinion, it can be concluded that the meaning of magazine is “mass media that is published periodically and contains informational articles in accordance with the relevant field in the magazine.”

    The existence of this magazine appeared not long after the newspaper appeared. In Indonesia, the existence of magazines has a long history and is divided into four periods, namely at the beginning of independence, the old order period, the new order period, and the reformation period.

    Magazines are usually published with a predetermined target or audience. That is, the editors have determined from the beginning who will be the readers, whether children, teenagers, adult women, adult men, or even general readers.

    However, the target reader is not only based on age and gender, but can also be based on profession. For example, readers as businessmen or farmers.

    Magazine Functions

    A magazine has different functions from other magazines. It depends on the information contained in it.

    For example, news magazines such as Tempo have a function as an informational media that contains domestic and foreign events, as well as an entertainment function.

    It’s different with the adult women’s magazine Femina . In the adult women’s magazine Femina, the articles contained in it are about various information and tips about feminine issues, so that they function more to educate and entertain.

    Then, there is also the Trubus agricultural media , whose main function is to provide education and guidance on how to cultivate crops, making it an informational function.

    However, in general, magazines have many functions other than those previously exemplified. According to the thesis written by Devita Permatasari with the title LKP: Pembutan Desain and Page Layout in Zigma Magazine , a magazine has 2 functions seen from different points of view, namely the function for the publisher and the function for the reader.

    1. Magazine Functions For Publishers

    • Magazines as organizational learning media
    • Magazines as communication media
    • Magazines as promotional media (with product advertisements contained in them)
    • Magazines as a medium for channeling talent in the field of writing
    • Magazines as a means of investment

    2. Magazine Functions For Readers

    • Magazine as a source of information
    • Magazines as communication media
    • Magazines as channels for everyone’s aspirations (with a special column to publish the aspirations of each person who sends them to the editors)
    • Magazines as seeds of democracy
    • Magazines as promotional media
    • Magazine as a media for learning based on reading and writing
    • Magazines as a medium for channeling talent in the field of writing
    • Magazine as an increase in creativity
    • Magazines as entertainment

    Good Magazine Criteria

    What are the things that make a magazine called a good magazine? Does a good magazine have to contain the latest information?

    Just like teaching materials, a magazine must also have accurate readability so that readers can understand the information contained in it. The criteria of a good magazine can be seen from various aspects, namely in terms of segmentation, function, cover , layout , color, selection of typefaces (font), selection of rubrics, illustrations and pictures, size, and layout composition.

    1. Segmentation

    • The magazine’s target market mission must be in line with its readers.
    • The name of the magazine should be suitable for its target readers.
    • The content of the magazine rubric should be suitable for the target readers.

    2. Functions

    • When the reader reads the articles contained in the magazine, the reader finds it easy to read and get benefits and inspiration in his life.
    • Readers can feel the benefits directly after reading the magazine.

    3. Cover

    • Show the identity of the magazine in accordance with the mission that has been set in advance by the editors.
    • Can attract the attention of potential readers to want to read it.
    • Communicative and informative.
    • The illustrations used correspond to the theme of the magazine.

    4. Layout

    • Not monotonous
    • Has its own groove
    • Easy to read and understand

    5. Color

    • Not too flashy
    • Does not make the eyes tired quickly
    • The use of color should match the segmentation and theme of the magazine rubric

    6. Font Type

    • Must use a font that is easy to read

    7. Selection of Rubrics

    • The content of the rubric should match the name of the magazine
    • The rubric should be able to attract the attention of the reader
    • Each rubric must have at least 1 illustration or picture

    8. Illustrations or Pictures

    • Illustrations should fit the theme of the magazine
    • The illustration does not offend SARA
    • Illustrations should be easy to understand
    • The image must have a high resolution to be seen clearly

    9. Magazine Size

    • The size of the magazine should not be too big and not too small, usually using A4, Letter, B5, or F4 size
    • Easy to carry and does not break quickly.

    Types of Magazines

    1. Scientific Magazine

    Is Reader just now aware of the existence of a scientific magazine?

    The definition of a scientific magazine is the same as a magazine in general, only the content is different. In scientific magazines, it usually contains the most up-to-date sources of information, be it about discoveries or new theories and developments in science.

    In a scientific magazine, it is usually managed and published specifically by scientific institutions, universities, and professional organizations.

    2. Children’s Magazine

    Definition of Children’s magazine is a mass media that is published periodically and contains general knowledge with the target audience being children. This children’s magazine can also be used as a learning medium because it contains many pictures and illustrations so children tend not to get bored.

    Examples from children’s magazines are Bobo and Mombi .

    In addition, children’s magazines can also indirectly give children intelligence because they contain a lot of reading that can develop skills, knowledge, and creativity in children.

    The existence of children’s magazines is considered to have many benefits in the same way as other mass media. The benefits of children’s magazines are:

    • Can develop children’s imagination

    Through reading and illustrations contained in it. In addition, in children’s magazines there is usually a special rubric that invites children to cut, color, and do other creative activities to develop their imagination.

    • Get information and insight

    The information and insights contained in children’s magazines are certainly general matters. In fact, sometimes the information and insight is not necessarily known to all adults 

    • Improve harmony between children and parents

    Usually, in a children’s magazine there is a special section that contains fairy tales, short stories, and cergam (picture stories).

    As a parent, of course you can read the stories contained in the child’s magazine. Of course, it can add harmony to the relationship between children and parents. In addition, the child’s focus in listening to his parents tell a story turns out to be good for his brain development 

    3. General Magazine

    In general magazines, there are usually no specific topics discussed in them. The information contained is information of a specific nature and there is no specific segment.

    4. Religious Magazine

    This type of magazine usually contains religious articles. Although the readership of this type of magazine is quite limited because not everyone can read it, but it turns out to be very popular 

    5. Men’s Magazine

    This men’s magazine will contain articles related to hobbies, sex, men’s outfits, gym tips , automotive, and others. His writing style is more simple and direct to the point

    6. Women’s Magazine

    The women’s magazine will contain articles about women’s lifestyles, food recipes, gossip, gossip columns, make-up tips , inspirational stories, and others.

    Well, that’s the meaning of magazines and some things about magazines. Does Reader still subscribe to favorite magazines? If so, don’t forget to always keep it because it contains a lot of valuable information and knowledge…

  • The Meaning of Course Play: Types, Examples, and How to Process It

    The Meaning of Course Play: Types, Examples, and How to Process It

    Main Course Is – The term Main Course is often seen when visiting a star restaurant, Reader. Usually available at lunch and dinner.

    The use of the term Main Course comes from the culture or habit of Western people who enjoy various foods. However, you should pay attention to the order of the dishes in order to enjoy the taste to the maximum.

    This habit is often referred to as Full Course Meal or food with a complete menu. During the series of full courses , Reader will enjoy various menus. A Full Course Meal usually starts with an appetizer before the main course, such as soup or amuse-bouche , followed by the main course and ending with sweets, coffee, and tea.

    Main Course is one of three classifications of food based on the order in which it is presented.

    Main Course is one of the main dishes that are usually served after the appetizer . Main Course is also commonly referred to as “main dish” or “groce piece”.

    This Main Course is usually served in a much larger portion than the appetizer portion because it consists of many ingredients both at lunch and dinner .

    For its own type, there are various types such as Indonesian main course, continental, oriental, Japanese, western. In the world of food and drink, we are no stranger to this classification. Here is a further explanation about the main course, see the explanation.

    Definition of Play Course

    Main Course is a main course or main meal with a set menu that is served at lunch or dinner in a larger portion than the appetizer.

    Some staple ingredients in this cuisine often use meat, fish or poultry. Vegetarians use ingredients that look like meat or synthetic meat made from vegetable gluten.

    Main Course is usually served with a sauce that suits the type of food. This sauce can be served directly on the food or served by itself using a gravy boat (saus boat = boat shape).

    The type of sauce served can be divided into white sauce, chocolate sauce, oil sauce or sauce. The main course is always accompanied by side dishes in the form of side dishes consisting of various vegetables and potatoes or other carbohydrate sources such as pasta, noodles, rice or other root vegetables.

    The dishes that can be served as Main Course are very diverse. Starting from salad dishes, soup dishes, egg dishes, cheese dishes, pasta and vegetable dishes, fish and shellfish dishes, poultry and chicken dishes, beef dishes, pork dishes, and others.

    Course Play Features

    Main Course features are as follows:

    • The portion for the ala d’hôte menu is 175–200 gr and 200–250 gr for the a la carte menu
    • From the selection of ingredients, the Main Course is usually made from food ingredients that contain animal ingredients. proteins such as beef, poultry and seafood
    • As a dish, the main course or main course is usually served on a dinner plate.
    • Including animal side dishes, vegetables and carbohydrates, the amount of Main Course ingredients is around 350-375 grams (side dishes 175-225 grams, carbohydrates 75 grams, vegetables 75 grams)
    • Main Course is varied with many variations available.
    • Do not use the same ingredients or colors in each menu
    • Main Course should be separate without appetizer or dessert. Therefore, the Main Course menu should meet the nutritional needs of the body.

    Main Course Compilation Materials

    Main Course usually consists of several spices such as:

    • Animal side dishes such as fish (tuna, snapper, mackerel, catfish), poultry (turkey, chicken, duck, etc.) quail and seafood (octopus, squid, lobster, shrimp, crab) are prepared with various spices and served with a lot of sauce (175-225 grams)
    • Carbohydrates used are usually rice, potatoes, various noodles and pasta that are processed in various ways or can be in the form of bread in a 75 gram portion.
    • The vegetables used are generally cauliflower, broccoli, chickpeas, radishes, asparagus, mustard in a 75 gram portion.

    So all the spices are on the dinner plate like the Main Course . The combination of carbohydrates, vegetables and complements should match the aroma, color and taste in order to stimulate the appetite.

    Types of Course Play

    Based on the Processing Technique

    • Deep Frying: Chicken maryland, Chicken Cordon bleu.
    • Grilling: Beef Steak, Chicken Steak, German Steak.
    • Roasting: Roast Beef

    Based on the Type of Basic Material

    Egg Dishes : It is a dish whose main source of protein comes from various types of poultry eggs and fish eggs (caviar). For example: Scrambled egg, omelette, scotch egg, etc.

    Pasta : Processed food used in Italian cuisine, made from a combination of flour, water, eggs and salt to form pasta that can be made into various types, sizes and shapes. Examples of pasta serving: Spaghetti bolognese, Fettuccine Carbonara, Macaroni and cheese and others.

    Fish Dishes (Fish Dishes) : As a dish based on fish, both freshwater fish and saltwater fish, this dish is chosen by many people because of its very high nutritional content. Examples: Meuniere Fish Fillet, Spanish Naked Fish and others.

    Seafood Dishes : As a dish made from various types of fishing and sea farming, the most commonly used ingredients are lobster, shrimp, squid, clams, and octopus. Examples of cuisine: Moules la Marinière, Lobster Fireplace, Shrimp Stew, and others.

    Meat Dishes : This dish is considered different from the poultry category. What differentiates cooking from poultry is that the meat comes from red meat animals. Meat from this post includes beef, lamb, camel and pork, old or young.

    Other countries or regions can use other meat as a base ingredient for their Main Course, such as horse meat, rabbit meat, deer meat, etc.

    How to Play Course Processing

    To serve the Main Course , some common food processing preparation techniques are used. This is of course to see what food ingredients will be prepared and cooked. Main Course processing techniques include:

    1. Deep Frying Technique

    This technique is commonly used because we only need to dip food into hot oil with a temperature between 176 and 190 degrees Celsius. quickly cooked, such as fried fish fillets.

    2. Boiling Technique

    In addition to frying, Main Course can also be boiled in boiling water. Food is usually boiled with coconut milk, chicken broth or other spicy liquid.

    3. Roasting technique

    The roasting technique is a way of cooking food in an oven at a temperature of 150 degrees Celsius by only using oil or fat from the food itself.

    Examples of dishes prepared with this technique are grandma’s grilled chicken, grilled beef with dabu-dabu sauce, and many more.

    4. Braising technique

    Simply put, the preparation of the main dish can also be done by boiling the food for a certain time until soft. Foods that are usually prepared with this technique are stew, rendang, boiled tofu, etc.

     

    5. Sauteing technique

    The sauteing technique is a technique of frying Main Course food with only a little oil. Of course this is the opposite of deep frying which uses a lot of oil.

    Cooking equipment used in this technique such as frying pans or frying pans, frying pans can also be used. Commonly prepared meals

    by the way is Gordon Blue Schnitzel, Black Paper Steak, or Chicken Stir-Fry.

    Example of Main Course Menu

    There are many examples of Main Course menus that are famous in the world, both menus from Indonesia, Western, Continental, Eastern and other countries that we often see such as:

    1. Foire Gras

    Foire Gras est is a typical French dish that has been a favorite of many people since the Middle Ages. This dish is made from foie gras base material that is processed in various ways starting from boiling, grilling, or frying.

    Foie Gras has a delicious and unique taste. From the first bite, you will taste the sweetness like butter but more concentrated. Although tasty, this main dish is quite expensive.

    2. Chicken Parmigiana

    Chicken Parmigiana is a prepared chicken dish that is coated in breadcrumbs and served with a Napoli sauce made of cheese and tomatoes. This dish originates from Australia and is often served with side dishes such as salad and potatoes. Chicken Parmigiana has a rich and delicious Italian taste, used as a family dinner.

    3. Lasagna

    Lasagna is a special and first food in Italy, a pasta dish consisting of layers of lasagna served with sauce and other ingredients.

    While in other places, this lasagna is made with cheese or ricotta, tomato sauce, mozzarella cheese and various meats (chicken, beef, pork), vegetables (mushrooms, zucchini), spinach and prepared with onions, garlic, oregano, then grilled.

    4. Tortellini

    Tortellini is a typical Italian dish shaped like a navel, made from a mixture of grilled meat and cheese. Tortellini food is served in a thick sauce. In another version, Tortellini can also be stored in the refrigerator for less than 7 weeks, so if you want to eat it, just reheat it in the microwave.

    5. Pizza

    Pizza is a type of baguette with various fillings such as chicken, meat, etc. with ketchup, cheese and grill or grill for a few minutes. This pizza was invented in Naples, Italy and has become a popular dish all over the world.

    6. Spaghetti

    Spaghetti is an Italian staple food made from fine flour with a thin and dense cylinder like pasta.

    In the beginning, this spaghetti size was very long, but in the middle of the 20th century, the shorter size became much more popular and was widely used by the local population. The size is around 25 to 30 cm with different variations.

    In its presentation, spaghetti is often mixed with tomato sauce, meat, olive oil and vegetables. But for cheese lovers can add types of cheese such as parmesan, pecorino or grana padano.

    7. Beed Bourguignon

    Beed Bourguignon is a beef stew in red wine with a blend of selected spices. Usually the meat used is tenderloin so that it is soft and not greasy.

    8. Tortillas

    Tortillas are light flat breads made with wheat or corn. So, in general, this tortilla will be eaten with a variety of sauces, meat, vegetables and nuts. For Spaniards, this tortilla must be brought to accompany their meal.

    9. Rendang

    Rendang is a typical Indonesian dish made from processed meat that is boiled for a very long time to get a very soft texture with a favorite spice.

    This dish is known as the best dish in the world, and of course because the cooking process requires spices and time.

    10. Gudeg

    Gudeg is a special food of Jogja made from young jackfruit boiled with coconut milk until it turns brown. Usually this gudeg is served with hot rice accompanied by fried chicken, tempeh, egg, and fried sambal krecek.

    11. Uduk rice

    Nasi uduk is a dish made from thinly sliced ​​white rice and steamed with grated coconut milk. Then season with nutmeg, cinnamon, ginger, lemongrass and pepper.

    This food is then served with fried dumplings, fried tofu, omelet/egg slices, abon, dried tempeh, fried onions, fried chicken, cucumber and peanut sauce. This food is usually sold in the morning for breakfast.

    12. Stew

    Semur is stewed meat from Indonesia that is boiled in a dark brown sauce made from sweet soy sauce, shallots, onions, nutmeg and cloves.

    There are many types of stew, including meat stew, chicken stew, and jengkol stew.

    Sweet soy sauce based on black soybeans is the most important ingredient in making stew because it plays a role in improving the taste, but still has to create a mixed taste with other ingredients.

    In addition to having special ingredients of beef and potatoes, semur also has various types of ingredients such as tofu, tempeh, eggs and other additional ingredients according to the tastes of the local community.

    13. Betutu Chicken

    Betutu is a side dish made from whole chicken that is filled with spices and then grilled over a fire. Betutu has been recognized in all districts in the province of Bali. Ayam Betutu is a special dish of Gilimanuk and one of the most popular Bali dishes among tourists.

    Betutu is used as a dish in religious ceremonies and traditional ceremonies as well as as a dish for sale. The customers are not only Balinese but also foreign guests who arrive in Bali, especially in certain places such as hotels and restaurants.

    14. Fried rice

    The first main dish is fried rice which is also very popular. This menu consists of rice that is removed from the cooking process and then combined with special Indonesian spices.

    There are actually many types of fried rice, such as chicken fried rice, seafood fried rice, meatball fried rice and many more. This unique menu often attracts tourists to several tourist spots.

    15. Meatballs

    Indonesian meatballs are one of the best main dishes. Fill it with meatballs, noodles, tofu, fries and then add beef broth. These meatballs are chewy and juicy, so many people use them as the main dish at some events.

    There are also various types of meatballs, not only meatballs but also chicken meatballs, fish meatballs, tendons, shrimp meatballs, rib meatballs and pork meatballs. All these rocks are worthy of being tasted and even easy to find in all cities in Indonesia.

    16. Gado-Gado

    Gado-Gado menu food can be said to be a kind of special Indonesian tool. Although included in the salad menu, these gado-gado are often used as the main dish in Indonesia. The ingredients of the gado-gado are various, starting from potatoes, bean sprouts, cubes, eggs, lettuce and then sambal pea.

    Gado-gado itself is an Indonesian name that refers to the combination of many foods in one portion. This menu is very popular in the Yogyakarta area. When eating, you can use it with rice or with lontong. But sometimes vegetables are added to add flavor.

    Closing

    Well, with the comments above, of course you more or less understand the meaning, types, methods of processing and examples of the Main Course food menu. In this way, you can get many Main Course menu suggestions if you hold an event or invite guests for dinner. If you want to make a Main Course food menu, but don’t know the recipe, just buy the recipe menu book at Sinaumedia.com .

    That’s the discussion about the main course or main course. In general , the Main Course can be divided into two, namely the Indonesian Main Course and the Continental Main Course . Both can be chosen according to personal preferences and tastes.

  • Understanding Magnets: Properties, Types, Shapes and How to Remove Magnets

    Understanding Magnets: Properties, Types, Shapes and How to Remove Magnets

    Meaning of Magnets – Looking for a falling needle will take time by hand, of course it will take a long time, although we can guess where it falls, but it will be difficult for sure.

    Try using a magnet. The trick is to bring the magnet close to the surface of the floor and the needle-like metal will be attracted to the magnet. The search process will be easier.

    Ever noticed the nail scavengers on the street? They also used a stick with a magnet attached to the end so they just combed the road and attached all the metal including nails which would later be collected.

    Why can magnets attract metals? Can all metals be drawn? Can we make magnets? Can magnetic properties be removed? Let’s talk more about the power of magnets

     

    A. Meaning of Magnets

    Initially, in a metal mining area, a metal was found that was able to attract other metals, although not all metals could be attracted. Then the metals that were found turned out to be strongly attracted, some weakly attracted and some unable to attract metal.

    Magnet itself comes from the Greek word magnítis líthos which means Magnesian stone. The region has magnetic stone content, and Magnesia itself was a region in Greece in the past currently called Manisa.

    If a magnet is between iron powder, then you will see a lot of powder sticking to both ends of the magnet. The more in the middle, the less iron powder sticks.

    This means that the two ends of the magnet are where the attraction force is the strongest. While the middle part has no magnetic or neutral attraction. 

    B. Magnetic Properties

    What distinguishes magnets from other things? Of course there is a unique property that the magnet has, what is it? Learn various interesting facts about magnets through the book Jago Fisika: Magnet Dan Listrik

    1. magnets can attract certain things

    Magnets only attract certain objects around them, so not all objects can be magnetized even if the objects are around them.

    There are certain materials that can be attracted by magnets. The materials are metal type. But, not all metals can be magnetized, depending on the type. Then there are metals that are attracted so strongly, but there are also weak ones.

    2. A magnet has two poles

    Magnets have two poles, the positive pole and the negative pole. The two Poles are located at the end. That’s where the magnetic force is so strong.

    Eits but don’t expect to find north and south writing. The north pole of the magnet will always face the north of the earth, and the south pole of the magnet will always face the south of the earth.

    Hm.. why do magnetic poles always point north and south?

    The answer is because of the influence of the Earth’s strong magnetic field.

    The Earth’s magnetic field was discovered in 1600 by a William Gilbert, the most prominent scientist in England. Gilbert theorized that the Earth functions as a giant magnetic bar that affects all magnetic objects on Earth.

    Quoted from NASA that, the Earth’s core is an electromagnetic solid surrounded by a liquid core (liquid iron and nickel) in which electric current flows.

    The electric current in the molten core causes the Earth’s magnetic field to be so strong that it covers the entire Earth as well as the outer space around it.

    Earth as a very large magnet with the north pole of the earth’s magnet around the south pole of the earth, on the other hand the south pole of the magnet around the north pole of the earth.

    The north pole of the free magnetic field faces north because it is pulled by the south pole of the earth’s magnet which is located around the north pole of the earth. The south pole of the magnet is free to face south because it is pulled by the north pole of the earth’s magnet which is located around the south pole of the earth. The direction of the lines of magnetic force in the earth’s magnetic field is from the direction of the south pole of the earth to the north pole of the earth. How can you?

    The location of the earth’s magnetic poles is not exactly the location of the earth’s poles! Therefore the compass needle will form an angle with the north-south current as well as with the horizontal plane of the earth. The direction of the magnetic axis of the compass needle forms an angle with the north-south direction of the earth. This angle is called the declination angle.

    The declination angle is the deviation of the direction of the compass needle from the true north and south direction of the earth. The magnitude of the angle of declination in various places is not the same, and also changes every year.

    In addition to the angle of declination, there is also the angle of inclination. The angle of inclination is the angle formed by the magnetic axis of the compass needle with the horizontal direction of the earth. It turns out that the magnetic axis of the compass needle forms an angle with the horizontal or horizontal line of the earth.

    Well, the navigation of ships and airplanes uses a compass as a direction indicator. By observing the direction of the magnetic pole of the compass needle, it can be estimated which direction is north and south.

    By reading the angle of declination on the compass, the actual north-south direction of the earth can be determined.

    Because the angle of declination changes every year and as technology advances, sooner or later the compass is considered less accurate as a direction indicator.

    It is Radio Beacons that replace the use of a compass to inform the north and south direction of the earth, including the wind angle accurately.

    3. Different poles will attract each other, same poles will repel each other.

    If the poles of the same type are brought together, there will be a force of repulsion, while if the poles are opposite, there will be an attraction.

    Suppose we bring the north pole closer to the north, then the two magnets will repel each other. But if we bring the north and south poles closer together, there will be an attractive force.

    If we use a natural magnet and when we bring the two ends together it turns out that they repel each other then we can conclude that their poles are different, while if they attract each other, be sure that the poles are different.

    Oh, yes. If a magnet is cut into small pieces, it turns out that the small pieces will form new magnetic poles. No matter how small the size, it still has magnetism.

    So a magnet consists of small magnets that are located in a row from the north pole facing the south pole of the magnet and on the other hand the south pole faces the north pole of the magnet. These small magnets are called elementary magnets.

    4. Magnetic force can penetrate the barrier.

    Magnets have a force that can penetrate objects. So even if there is metal blocked by glass or paper, the metal is still affected by the magnetic force. So it’s not magic, it’s not magic if the magnet can still attract metal even if it’s blocked.

    To prove it, just sprinkle iron powder on paper and put a magnet behind the paper. Although blocked by paper, the iron powder will move as the magnet is moved. Want to be moved up, down to the right and to the left the iron powder will follow.

    5. Has a magnetic field

    A magnet has a magnetic field that will produce a magnetic force. The magnetic force of a magnet will get closer if it is near the magnetic field, but will move away if the distance is also away from the magnetic field

    a. Definition of magnetic force field

    What is a magnetic force field?
    The magnetic force field is the space around the magnet that still has the influence of the magnetic attraction force.

    The field of magnetic force is described as curved lines called lines of magnetic force.

    Curious to see what the magnetic line style looks like? try to sprinkle iron powder on white paper, if we keep a magnet behind the paper, then the iron powder will show a regularity, they will be in the area around the magnetic field

    b. Magnetic style line pattern

    The pattern of style lines when poles of the same type are brought close together, the style lines formed move away from each other, until there seems to be an empty space. For example, we bring the north pole closer to the north pole or the south pole to the south pole.

    Meanwhile, if poles of different types are brought closer, the north pole if brought closer to the south pole,
    then a pattern of lines of force can be seen connecting each other from pole to pole.

    C. Types of Magnets

    1. Types of magnets based on their origin.

    Where does the magnet actually come from? Based on its origin, magnets are divided into two, namely natural magnets and artificial magnets, which are discussed in the SMA/MA/SMK Kitab Keramat Listrik&Magnet: Seri Pendalaman.

    a. Natural Magnets

    This natural or created magnet was discovered by the people of Magnesia in the past. This magnet has magnetic properties since it was discovered. Usually natural magnets are in the form of rocks. Natural magnets also have special characteristics, which are permanent. That’s why the magnetism of natural magnets is harder to lose.

    So, when this magnet was discovered, it already had the ability to attract things around it without human intervention or being formed naturally.

    b. Artificial Magnets

    Based on the need that is increasing over time, then make a magnet.
    So along with the development of time, humans began to be able to make artificial magnets.

    Not everything can be made into a magnet. Things that have elemental magnets can be made into magnets. As discussed earlier that the magnet consists of domains or elemental magnets

    1). Artificial magnets based on the strength of the magnet

    a) Permanent magnet

    Based on their strength, artificial magnets are divided into permanent magnets. Artificial magnets have permanent magnetism if their domains or elemental magnets are in a fixed order. For example, in steel, the elemental domains or magnets are indeed difficult to arrange, but once magnetized it turns out to be regularly organized.

    b) Temporary Magnet

    Artificial magnets have temporary magnetism if the domains or elemental magnets can only be organized for a while and then soon become scattered or chaotic again, for example iron. It turns out that iron is an elemental magnet that is easy to set up, but unfortunately it will soon be scattered again. If it scatters back then the magnetic strength is gone.

    2). Based on the material, artificial magnets are divided into 3 groups

    a). Ferromagnetic

    Ferromagnetic is a material that if made into a magnet then the magnetism is very strong.

    Examples of ferromagnetics are iron, steel, nickel, and cobalt. In addition to being strong as a magnetic material, these materials are also very strongly attracted to magnets.

    b). Paramagnetic

    Paramagnetic is a substance that, if made into a magnet, has weak magnetic properties, and cannot be made into a magnet. Examples of ferromagnetic materials are aluminum and platinum.

    c). Diamagnetic
    Diamagnetic is a material that cannot be made magnetic.
    The reason is because there is no elemental magnet in the material.

    3). How to make artificial Magnets

    There are two ways to make magnets namely:

    a). Making magnets by rubbing

    Iron or steel rubbed with a magnet will become a magnet. How to rub iron or iron to become a magnet?

    The way to make a magnet by rubbing is to rub iron or steel in the same direction. Directional movement is able to make elementary magnets become directional

    b). Make a magnet with an electric current.

    How to make a magnet with electric current is:

    Wrap the copper wire around the nail, connect the end of the wire to the battery pole. Observe, Once connected, the nail will have a magnetic force and can attract metals around it.

    Why is that? Electric current flows from the power source to the coil wire, the larger size nail made of iron is in the electric field. Small nails are attracted to big nails.

    So as long as the big nail is in the electric field the big nail will become a magnet. If we cut the current, the big spike will become neutral again. Because magnets always have 2 poles, namely north and south, how do you determine which is the north and south poles? This way, the electric current will flow from the positive pole to the negative pole.

    In the event according to the picture, it means electric current in the direction of clockwise rotation. As long as the electric current flows, the nail end B is the north pole and the end A is the south pole.

    So when the electric current in the coil wire flows clockwise, the iron or steel end where the electric current enters the wire is the south pole while the place where the current leaves the coil becomes the north pole.

    When the electric current in the coil is counter-clockwise, where the current enters the iron or steel end as the north pole and the other end is the south pole.

    It turns out that the number of windings and the voltage given will affect the size of the magnet produced.

    The greater the electrical voltage used, the greater the magnetic intensity, the greater the electric current, the greater the magnetic strength and the more turns of the coil, the stronger the magnetic intensity.

    c). Making a magnet by induction
    If we use a US magnet to induce iron AB until it becomes a magnet with A as the north pole and B as the south pole of the induction magnet. If we move the magnet US away then the iron aB becomes neutral and will not attract the metal anymore

     

    D. Shapes of Magnets

    Magnets found in a mine have an irregular shape. While the magnets that are made have a shape that is adapted to the needs. Magnets are currently a key component of modern technology as discussed in the book Electricity and Magnets.

    Magnetic forms among them

    1. Rod magnet

    A rod magnet is a rod-shaped magnet or like a small block or cube.

    These magnets are usually used for door locks on glass and wooden cabinets. In addition, it can also be used as a cover for other things, such as pencil boxes, gift boxes, etc

    2. Horseshoe magnet

    Horseshoe magnets are also known as horseshoe magnets. Why? Because its shape resembles a poultice that is used as a horse shoe.

    The use of u magnet or horseshoe magnet is to lift magnetic objects

    3. Magnet needle

    Needle magnets have a flat, elongated, and pointed end. A needle magnet is usually used to make a compass work as a wind direction indicator.

    4. Cylindrical magnets

    Cylindrical magnets have a cylindrical shape, round and flat. The use of cylindrical magnets is largely similar to the use of bar magnets.

    These magnets are used for door locks on glass and wooden cabinets.

    Not only that, ino magnets can also be used to cover other things, such as pencil boxes, gift boxes, etc.

    5. Ring magnet

    Its name is also a ring magnet so the shape of a ring magnet resembles a ring. This magnet has a circular shape with a hole in the middle.

    Ring magnets are used to make loudspeakers, such as speakers in radios, cinemas, or mobile phones. Ring magnets can also be used in electric motor machines.

    E. How to Eliminate Magnetism

    It turns out that magnetism can be removed. How to remove it is as follows:

    • Beaten
    • Heated
    • Flowed back and forth

    That is the information about the meaning of magnet that should be known. It is certainly very useful for us in our daily lives, because many things around us use magnets in their operation. Also read the following other articles:

    Recommended Books & Articles

  • Meaning of Internship: Purpose, and Benefits

    Meaning of Internship: Purpose, and Benefits

    Internship is – During college, you may also often hear about senior sisters or lecturers who suggest an internship if you are in the final stage. In fact, some people think that this internship student can give you the facility to find a job after graduating from college.

    However, before you start searching for internship vacancies for students, it is good for you to first understand what an internship is. That way, it will be easier for you to determine what abilities will be developed in the internship.

    For more clarity, here is an explanation of the internship that Reader needs to know.

    Definition of Internship

    The definition of internship or internship is a study program as well as practicing working in a direct way at a company for some time. Companies that accept interns have the right to assign tasks and must provide guidance during the program. Then, at the end of the program, the trainees will then get an evaluation from the company, especially from their direct superiors.

    In general, internships are done by SMK students as well as students at the final level. In some fields of study, internship can be said to be one of the compulsory subjects that will later affect the grade. However, there are also study programs that do not require students to do an internship.

    You may also have heard the term PKL or Field Work Practice or commonly known as the abbreviation PKL. Although they are basically the same, the difference between an internship and a PKL is only limited to the use of the term. The term PKL generally refers to internship programs at the SMK and diploma levels. Meanwhile, for the S1 and S2 lecture levels, the term internship or apprenticeship has become more commonly used.

    Purpose of Internship for Students

    Basically, the main purpose of the internship is to act as a bridge between the world of education and the world of work. In the internship program, the trainees will learn a lot about the world of work and also add useful skills for the world of work. As for the several objectives of the internship, among others:

    1. Implementation of knowledge to work

    In some fields of study, the theoretical knowledge that has been learned on campus is sometimes still not enough. Therefore, you still have to learn how to implement this knowledge into real and more beneficial work activities. Having an internship program will make it easier for you to improve your skills that will be useful in the world of work later.

    2. Increase Hard Skill

    There are many skills and knowledge that you will learn when you start your internship. In addition to getting it from the training session, you will also directly practice it under professional supervision. With this program it can be regarded as an effective way to develop skills or abilities.

    3. Learning Various Soft Skills

    In addition to learning hard skills, you will also learn various soft skills directly in a more effective way. As for soft skills , such as the ability to communicate, negotiate, and time management will definitely be honed during the internship. Not only that, you can also develop various other soft skills , which are adapted to the type of work and the responsibilities of the work you are doing.

    4. Easier to Adapt to the Work World

    The rhythm of the world of work is very different when compared to the rhythm of school and college. Because of this, there are not a few fresh graduates who later find it difficult to adapt when they first enter the world of work. The internship program will then give you the opportunity to adapt more comfortably and gradually.

    5. Facilitating Career As a Fresh Graduate

    After graduating from college, students will definitely look for a job that will then be quite challenging because of the high competition and lack of experience. However, by being a fresh graduate with internship experience written on your CV, it can make you superior to other job applicants, so the possibility of being recruited is also greater. The connections you make during the internship will also help you open a good career path.

    6. Improve Insight and Competence

    The work internship program can be likened to the initial gateway to getting to know the real world of work. Therefore, trainees will not be surprised when they graduate and enter the world of work. This is because the internship participants already have the insight that has been gained throughout doing internship activities. In fact, you will also be more accustomed to the system of dividing tasks in each division in a company and being involved in a project.

    7. Developing Relationships and Friendships

    Friendship or relationship has an important role in the world of work. When you follow an internship program , then you have the opportunity to meet new people with diverse backgrounds. From there, you can also strengthen relationships professionally. In addition to personal relationships, the internship program will also expand the relationship between the campus and your school with the company.

    Benefits of Internships for Companies

    On the one hand, internships will then be seen as troublesome for companies because they are required to provide work facilities, education, and guidance to students. However, on the other hand, the company can get profit from the trainees.

    Saving Employee Salary Costs

    The company will then seek the services of interns for a number of small jobs, such as administrative affairs and light practical work. This practice can save the company’s budget because the internship does not require the company to pay a salary.

    Finding Potential Employees

    When providing training and supervision, company management will also look at the quality and performance of each trainee. On several occasions, it is not uncommon for companies to find participants who have the potential to be recruited as employees after graduation.

    In addition, companies will also find superior seeds from this internship program. Because of this, it is not uncommon for companies to then recruit part-time employees from employees who have had previous internships. This will certainly simplify and save the recruitment process.

    Internship Aspects

    The internship program has several rules and regulations that must be met and agreed upon by both parties in order to ensure that no one is harmed. There are several important aspects that need to be considered during the internship.

    Application and Recruitment

    You can participate in the internship program by sending an application directly to the company of your dreams or by participating in a recruitment event organized by the company. The process is similar to full-time job application and recruitment, but simpler and simpler.

    Duration

    Most internship programs themselves are only around 3-6 months. According to government regulations, this internship cannot be done for more than one year. If the company then still needs the services of an intern employee, then this status must be renewed to become a contract employee.

    Pocket Money

    Being an intern does not entitle you to a salary. However, the company must provide pocket money as compensation for transportation costs, meals, and work compensation. Although there are no specific rules regarding the amount of pocket money, but usually the interns will get a little under the UMR or even more.

    Guidance and Training

    Intern participants have the right to receive various training and work guidance in order to achieve their goals. Usually, this aspect is already written in the apprenticeship agreement to ensure that the company fulfills its obligations.

    Job Desk

    In return, the trainees are also obliged to provide this service to the company by doing some light work. In this aspect, it should be clearly stated in the agreement so that in the future there will be a balance between the work education received by students.

    Facilities

    Intern participants have the right to obtain facilities that will help them fulfill their obligations, such as desks and chairs in the office, computer equipment, and internet connection. Of course, these facilities are generally not as luxurious as full-time employees.

    Job Security

    The company is obliged to guarantee the work safety of the apprentice employees just like other employees, especially in various types of risky practice jobs. For example, civil engineering and architecture students who are interns in construction projects are entitled to be provided with safety helmets and safety shoes

    Evaluation

    At the end of the internship, the company is then obliged to give an evaluation according to the student’s performance during the program. The results of this evaluation will later be used as evaluation material by the campus.

    The difference between an internship and a management trainee

    Some people often think that internship is the same program as Management Trainee . However, the two then have many fundamental differences, including:

    1. The main purpose of the internship program is to prepare students to face the world of work. Meanwhile, the main purpose of Management Trainee is to prepare them to become policy holders in a company.
    2. Management Trainee with status and rights as an employee, while Internship or internship is not.
    3. Only fresh graduates with a maximum of two years of work experience will become Management Trainees . Meanwhile, Internship can only be followed by final level students.
    4. The Management Trainee will then be appointed as a permanent employee if he successfully completes the program with high marks. This benefit itself is not in the internship program.
    5. This internship program is limited to a maximum duration of only one year. On the other hand, Management Trainee then has a longer duration with a minimum of one year only.

    Internship Success Tips

    Here are the internship success tips you need to know.

    Actively Searching for Internship Information

    To be able to follow the internship program, of course you have to register first. Each company has its own standards in determining the candidates it seeks.

    If you are in college, usually this internship is done in the third, fifth or final semester. It should be noted that the internship quota is usually only a few, while the fans are very many, so your competition will definitely increase.

    The way to follow this program is by searching for internship information on your campus, social media, company website, or by asking your seniors who have worked or had an internship in a company.

    Don’t Focus on Money

    Don’t be obsessed with money when following an apprenticeship program, although it cannot be denied that money is very important to you. Some companies will then provide incentives for apprentices even if it is possible with a not too large nominal. It would be good to keep focusing on developing skills so that it is easier to get to know the world of work later. for Even if you are indeed employed, this is another benefit.

    Follow the Internship Program with Professionals

    Do the entire range of internship programs well, especially those that are related to your responsibilities or duties. In addition to work ethic, attitude and personality will also be seen by the company. Be polite and don’t act weird.

    Closing

    That’s the discussion about the internship and its purpose, hopefully all the discussions in this article will be useful for you. So, have you started an internship for college?

    If you want to find a book about career, then you can find it at Sinaumedia.com. To support Reader in adding insight, Sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Reader has information #LebihDenganMembaca .

    Author: Sofyan
    Source: Sofyan

    Recommended Internship Related Books

    More Probation: Enjoying the Job Search Journey

    Finding a job is a process that everyone faces in their career journey. However, there is often confusion and uncertainty that arises. Starting from incomplete information about job vacancies, HRD that is difficult to contact, to a lot of salary negotiations. Later on Probation , Samuel Ray—a professional HR practitioner—shares job hunting tips and tricks, from CV writing to salary negotiations, written in simple and “landing” language.

    Without covering up, based on his experience and point of view. This book is written for those of you who are looking for a job for the first time, are looking for a new job, or are reminiscing about the times when you were looking for a job. Because life is as simple as going through one probation process to the next.

    The Art Of Navigating Careers And The World Of Work

    Many people say, “I hate Monday” when starting Monday. Anyway, what’s wrong with Monday? Pambudi, Wing, Sagita, and Astrid, four professionals who have careers in various national and multinational organizations and companies have an idea to change I Hate Monday into I Love Monday so that we can be more enthusiastic in living our working days.

    They did an Instagram Live How’s Your Monday? every Monday, at 20.00 WIB. How’s Your Monday? discuss the world of work, career development, and leadership in a relaxed, but serious way, plus guest stars who are also professionals in their fields. The book How’s Your Monday? This is presented fluidly and thoughtfully, so that we can learn from seasoned professionals about:

    • Tips and tricks for making a persuasive CV, investigating job interviews and salary negotiations in a professional manner.
    • Essential things in the world of work that need to be known in order to succeed faster, such as making friends with seniors, coordinating, finding mentors, and getting precise coaching .
    • Accelerate your career, get a promotion, become a team leader for the first time, form a support system , etc.

    Work Not Suitable for Majors : Future Of Work In Industry 4.0

    Many people think that choosing a job that does not match the major is just pointless. Many are still disappointed if they get a job that does not match their major. This book will cover everything related to jobs in the future, especially with the rapid development of Industrial Revolution 4.0.

    Like it or not, we have to have the skills that the company will be looking for. Then, what skills do you have to have? Creativity, Emotional Intelligence , Positive Thinking, Decision-Making Ability, Communication Ability, Leadership Ability, Cultural Intelligence, and Technology Skills.

    13 Ways to Compose a Cv and a Job Application Letter

    The world of work today is certainly not free from the aspect of competition that is so tight. The competition is even more intense when the number of jobs and the number of applicants are not comparable. A job application letter and CV reflect your true seriousness and personality.

    Therefore, you must be able to create an accurate cover letter and CV and be able to describe yourself well. What should you include in your cover letter and CV? 

  • Meaning, Types and Examples of Press Releases

    Meaning, Types and Examples of Press Releases

    Meaning, Kinds and Examples of Press Release – In the world of Public Relations , it cannot be separated from what is called a Press Release. Press Release is an activity to notify information, whether it is in the form of the implementation of an institution or company’s activities, product launch, company launch, and so on. Simply put, Press Release can be said to be a way to do a soft sell .

    With a Press Release, the company or institution will be better known by many people so that it can improve the image of the company or institution. However, currently there are still some companies or institutions that have not used Press Releases. This kind of thing is very unfortunate because it can make other people not know an institution or company.

    Therefore, it is highly recommended for companies or institutions to use Press Releases. However, for some people, they do not know what a Press Release is. Below will be discussed about the Press Release to the examples. Reader, happy reading this article.

    Definition of Press Release

    Press Releases in a company or institution are usually written by the Public Relations department or public relations department. Public relations is short for community relations. Therefore, this part of public relations connects the company or institution with the community. Usually in the form of information in the form of writings from companies or institutions so that many people know.

    That information is called Press Release. With a Press Release, the public will know what information is being conveyed. In fact, not only the community knows, but other companies and other institutions know the information.

    So, Press Release is information in the form of writing given to the community, other companies, and other institutions with the aim of promoting the image of the company or institution. This press release can be published through offline or online newspapers , to social media.

    However, there are some companies or boards that hand over the task of creating a Press Release to a third party. This is done because third parties are considered more competent in making Press Releases.

    If seen at a glance, a press release is shaped like a news, but a promotion or branding of a company or institution is inserted. Therefore, the writing of Press Releases requires precision and the choice of language that is interesting for many people to read.

    Even for newly established companies, Press Releases are very suitable to be used as a way to introduce new companies. If there are many readers who read the Press Release, then it is most likely that the existence of the company will be seen and its products will be known by many people.

    The use of Press Releases in some companies is used to promote new products. The more people who know about a company’s new product, the greater the chance that the new product will be sold in the market.

    Why is a press release needed?

    “Why is Press Release so needed by companies or institutions? Perhaps such questions often appear in our minds. Actually there is no definite answer, but in general there are three answers. First, the Press Release becomes important because it can introduce a company’s product. Second, Telling an information related to an activity that will be carried out by the company or institution. Third, provide information related to the company or institution.

    If seen based on the three answers, then making a Press Release requires a very high level of thinking ability so that there are no mistakes in writing, using language that can attract the reader, until diverting slanted news related to the company or institution.

    Press Release Structure

    In order to make it easier to make a Press Release, it is necessary to know the structure. See the structure of the Press Release below.

    1. Title (head)

    The first thing to note when making a Press Release is the title. The title should be made as interesting as possible so that the information provided is read by many. In addition, the writing of the title should represent the contents of the Press Release. Titles with active sentences will make it easier for readers to understand the message or meaning of the information presented by the company or institution.

    2. Core (lead)

    After the title, the next structure that should be observed is the core or lead . The core of the Press Release can be interpreted as the opening part of a news story. Because of this, cores are usually first and foremost in the news. In writing the core, it is best to use subjects that are added with 5W+1H elements and written in a short, clear, and concise manner.

    3. Fill (body)

    The inverted pyramid method is very good to use in creating content from a Press Release. The inverted pyramid method places very important information at the top or beginning of the news. After that, gradually general information is written under it, then less meaningful information is written under it. Important information that is placed at the top or at the beginning aims to attract the attention of the readers.

    Basically, when making a Press Release, not only observe the structure, but also need to observe several things, such as the time the Press Release will be published, the date of the Press Release, providing the company or agency contact at the end of the Press Release, using the 5W+1H elements, and avoid specific terms.

    Various Press Releases

    Press Release is one of the ways that a company or institution does to introduce itself so that it is better known by the wider community. Press Release itself is divided into three types, namely Basic Publicity Release, Product Release, and Financial Release .

    1. Basic Publicity Release

    Basic Publicity Release is a Press Release that only provides information that exists within a company or institution. In addition, the information provided has news value that can be accepted by the mass media, whether it is value for local media or value for national media.

    2. Product Release

    Product Release is a Press Release that only focuses on soft selling or promotion of a new product, new company, and the like. However, usually at Product Release it is usually used to promote new products from a company. In general, this type of Press Release is published in media related to economics and business.

    3. Financial release

    Financial Release is a Press Release made with the purpose of providing information about the company’s financial condition to the general public. However, Press Release Financial Release is very rarely done by companies. If there is a company that makes a Financial Release , then it is most likely that the general public will believe in that company.

    Examples of Press Releases

    1. New Product Press Release

    Title: 

    Golden King Launches New Variant Chocolates . From the title alone, the reader can already imagine what information will be delivered by PT Golden King Chocolate. The easy-to-understand title makes readers interested in knowing what products will be launched by PT Golden King Chocolate in Sabuga, Bandung.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the Press Release above, directly explains the important information to be conveyed, “PT Golden King Chocolate launched a new variant chocolate product on Monday (18/3).

    Contents:

    The content of the Press Release written by PT Golden King Chocolate has applied an inverted pyramid where important information has been placed at the top or the first paragraph. After other general information is placed at the bottom. What’s more, this Press Release provides a contact that can be contacted so who knows if there are consumers who want to buy the new product.

     

    2. Hotel Press Release

    Title:

    The title from the Press Release above explains about the Grand Istana Rama Hotel that has passed the Ministry of Energy’s certification. However, this title is still incomplete because it does not explain the purpose of the certification.

    Core:

    Although the title is incomplete, but at the core, Grand Istana Rama Hotel directly provides very important information. The information was in the form of Grand Istana Rama Hotel very compliant with the Covid-19 health protocol. With the Press Release, tourists do not need to worry if they want to stay at the Grand Istana Rama Hotel.

    Contents:

    The content of the example Press Release above explains that the Grand Istana Rama Hotel strongly supports the prevention of Covid-19 so that it follows the health protocol implemented by the government. From the Press Release example above, Grand Istana Rama Hotel insists that tourists can stay at the hotel safely and comfortably.

    3. Activity Press Release

    Title: 

    From the title alone, the reader can already imagine the contents of the Press Release example of an activity in the form of a competition organized by KFC and followed by 10 universities. The competition in question is to create a solution to the problem of garbage.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the example Press Release above does not directly provide important information, but explains the background of the event. General information placed at the beginning of the Press Release can make the reader less interested in reading the Press Release example.

    Contents:

    The contents of the Press Release example above put important information at the bottom so that the reader should read it to the end first. The point of the Press Release example above is to announce the winner of the competition held by KFC.

    4. Press Release News

    Title: 

    The example of the press release above uses active sentences so that the reader can easily understand it and be interested in reading the example of the press release until the end. From the title of the Press Release example, the reader will know that the information to be provided in the form of PTPP experienced an increase in net profit of 38%.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the example Press Release above directly explains the point that matches the title. After that, the next sentences provide information about the cause of the PTPP profit increase.

    Contents: 

    Although at the beginning of the sentence you already know that PTPP experienced an increase in profits, but overall the contents of the Press Release example above are too much to make the reader confused.

     

    5. Press Release Event

    Title:

    Readers already get an idea when reading the title in the Press Release example above. The Press Release above gives a press release that a tribute concert will be held for Erros Chrisye Yockie.

    Core:

    From the opening sentence in the example of the Press Release about the event, important information has been immediately given in the form of the place and date of the Erros Chrisye Yockie tribute concert. In addition, an example of the Press Release event was published on January 30, 2019, which indicates that the Erros Chrisye Yockie tribute concert will be held in two days

    Contents:

    The content of this Press Release is very complete and directly explains important information from each paragraph. Not only is the time and place explained in the example of the Press Release, but the singers who liven up the concert are also informed.

    In organizing an event, very good management is required, from event financing to event decoration. Someone who is successful in managing events needs a long experience. Although it requires a long experience, but you can learn it through a book on Event Management . From this book you will learn many things about how to manage events. So, what are you waiting for, immediately buy this book, by clicking the “buy book” button.

    6. Press Release Seminar

    Title:

    The title from the example Press Release of the seminar above has the title “Indonesia 2040: Trapped or Missed?” From the title alone, people who see and read immediately understand what will be discussed at the seminar later.

    Core:

    Although there is no opening sentence in the Press Release example above, the reader immediately knows that the resource person will be present at the seminar

    Contents:

    The content of the press release example of the seminar in the form of a picture and a title where both of these things are able to explain the essence of the press release example.

    7. Company Press Release

    Title:

    The use of the title in the company’s Press Release example above already uses active sentences. Therefore, the reader will know what information is in the Press Release and be interested in reading the sample Press Release until it is finished.

    Core:

    The example of the Press Release above uses an opening sentence that is easy to understand and directly explains the important information to be conveyed. The important information contains about PT Bank Tabungan Pensiun Nasional Syariah (BTPN Syariah) preparing to release its shares to the public.

    Contents:

    The example Press Release above contains the release of BTPN sharia shares to the public which is continued with the amount of shares to be released as much as 10%. At the end of the paragraph it is explained that BTPN Syariah has always experienced an impressive increase.

    8. Press Release Notification

    Title:

    An example of the press release notification above, if seen from the title, it will look like it only explains the press release made by the Meteorology, Climatology and Geophysics Agency (BMKG). Some readers will feel confused about the meaning of the title.

    Core:

    The opening sentence in the example Press Release above indicates that BMKG is giving a statement related to the earthquake that will occur in Banten at 22:30-22:59. It was only in the next sentences that BMKG explained that the information about an earthquake in Banten was a lie.

    Contents:

    An example of the Press Release notification above contains the statement made by BMKG regarding the information of an earthquake that will occur in Banten. The content of this Press Release example uses inverted pyramid elements so that it is easy to understand and comprehend.

    Read Also:

    Conclusion

    For many companies, it is no longer strange to use a press release when they want to introduce a company or a product from a company. Every Press Release that is made must be in accordance with the purpose or meaning that is to be conveyed to the public. The point is, companies or institutions still desperately need a press release.

  • Understanding Metals: Elements, Properties, Classification, and Types

    The meaning of metal – When we hear the word metal, it must be familiar to our ears, Reader. Unknowingly we can find things around us that have metal elements. This material is very commonly used and used in our daily life. However, do Reader already know what the meaning of metal is? To know more about metals, then Reader can read the explanation of this article about what metals are.

    Meaning of Metal

    Metal is a chemical element that is strong, sticky, hard and able to conduct electricity or heat energy. Metals also have a high melting point. In addition, metals come from metal ores and to obtain them by means of mining.

    Generally, it is only done and searched for in the earth, whether it is pure or has a mixture of metals. Metal ores are found in a pure state, for example gold, silver, platinum. In addition, some are mixed with other elements such as carbon, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, soil and sand.

    The word metal itself comes from the Greek word matallon, which means that a chemical element that is ready to combine to form an ion. Then, it has a metallic bond and is considered a metal similar to the chiton that is below the electron.

    Metalworking Fabrication Techniques

    Metallic Elements

    In the explanation above we already know that metal is a hard chemical element and can melt at a very high boiling point. Metal elements that are widely known include metals, non-metals, and semi-metals. Here is an explanation of the metallic elements.

    1. Metal Elements

    In this element, the material is very shiny and able to be a good conductor of electricity and heat. Metals will generally be solid at normal pressure and temperature unless mercury is used. Basically, metal is very easy to forge this which makes it easy to make various things.

    For types of metal elements such as aluminum (Al), iron (Fe), gold (Au), barium (Ba), calcium (Ca), potassium (K), chromium (Cr), nickel (N), sodium (Na), Manganese (Mn) and Magnesium (Mg).

    2. Non-Metallic Elements

    In this element, metal does not have the slightest metallic properties. Most of these non-metallic elements have physical characteristics and shapes that are different from each other. Generally, non-metallic elements are in the form of gases such as oxygen. Some are liquid like bromine. In addition, when non-metallic elements are solid, the texture is brittle and hard.

    For types of non-metallic elements such as Oxygen (O), Iodine (I), Silicon (Si), Neon (Ne), Nitrogen (N), Carbon (c), Chlorine (Ci), Helium (He), Hydrogen (H) , Phosphorus (P), Fluorine (F), Sulfur (S) and Bromine (Br).

    3. Semi Metal Elements

    There are not only metal and non-metal elements, one other element is semi-metal. This element generally still has some metallic properties known as metalloids. In this element, it usually has semi-conducting properties which cannot conduct electricity at low temperatures. However, it will be very good when it is at a higher temperature.

    For the types of semi-metallic elements themselves, they consist of tellurium (Te), polonium (Po), antimony (Sb), germanium (Ge), arsenic (As), silicon (Si) and boron (B).

    Electroplating Metal Coating Technique with Electricity

    Properties of Metals

    According to their properties, metals are divided into two, namely metals and non-metals. The nature of metals certainly has various special features that have been fundamental except for mercury. According to the electron configuration, the nature of metals tends to give up electrons. In contrast to non-metallic properties that are more likely to capture metals.

    Here are the basic properties of various types of metals such as:

    1. Having Different Levels of Strength and Hardness

    Each type of metal generally has a different level of hardness. Generally, the hardness can be increased by mixing other metals. Be aware that metal is known to be very strong. Just not with mercury.

    2. Easily Available to Forge

    Metals are easy to shape by being forged and stretched. The presence of a valence electron makes the metal easy to move in the crystal. According to its nature, metal can be forged into thin plates and when pulled can also be bent.

    3. Become a Good Electrical Conductor

    Capable of being a good conductor of electricity. When a metal is electrified, its electrons will carry a valence charge throughout the metal. So that it can create an electric current in the metal.

    4. Capable of Transmitting Heat

    Freely moving valence electrons can cause metals to be good conductors of heat. When a type of metal, one side is heated, then the available electrons will receive heat. So that it can cause the metal to become a conductor of electricity. The more the kinetic energy increases and the faster it moves, the better it will be.

    5. Shiny

    All types of metals will certainly shine when exposed to light in their surface. Therefore, in this time, the nature of the metal will re-emit the light energy it gets from certain waves.

    6. High Relative Density

    Known for its relatively high density, a metal property that can determine or show the metal structure.

    • In type a, it shows a simple cube structure. (sc = simple cubic ).
    • Type b, shows a centered structure of the body. (bcc = body centered cubic ).
    • While type c, face centered structure. (fcc = face centered cubic ).

    Classification of Metal Types

    As it is known that metals also consist of many different types. For this reason, many classifications are based on physical characteristics or even basic materials. In its classification, metals are grouped in general and according to their basic material.

    Grouping of Metals in General

    In the general grouping of metals, they are divided into 4 groups based on their type. The following is the discussion:

    1. Heavy Metals

    In the heavy metal group, it is generally derived from metals as a whole. For example, metals in the form of nickel, iron, chrome, tin, copper, zinc, tin, black and white, and there are many others.

    2. Light Metals

    In the light metal group, it is composed of metals that are just not completely composed or it can also be said that the composing metal is light. Examples of these light metals are magnesium, aluminum, titanium, calcium, sodium, barium and potassium.

    3. Refractory Metals

    As for what is meant by fire-resistant metal, this type of metal is able to withstand or be able to withstand fire with a certain temperature range. Examples of these refractory metals are titanium, zirconium, tungsten, and molybdenum.

    4. Precious Metals

    The last is a precious metal, usually this type of metal is often used and used for jewelry or other equipment. not only that, for this type of precious metal, it usually gives quite an expensive price. Examples of these precious metals are gold, platinum, and silver.

    Grouping Metals Based on Their Base Materials

    The grouping of metals from the base material that composes them is divided into two groups, Generally, a type of metal is composed of iron or non-iron. See the explanation below:

    1. Iron Metal (Ferrous)

    A type of metal whose alloy consists of a mixture of carbon and iron. For the type of metal in the form of cast iron, wrought iron, medium and high carbon steel, mild steel and mixed carbon steel.

    2. Non-Ferrous Metals (Non-Ferrous)

    This type of non-ferrous metal has an alloy or mixture containing Fe. Among these metals are aluminum, copper, lead and tin.

    Examples of Types of Metals and Their Functions

    As explained above that metals have many types and also their groupings, then it is not surprising if metals are the elements that have the most amount on earth. But each type of metal has its own uses. The following are some types of metals that are often used in everyday life:

    1. Zinc

    Zinc is a metal that has a bluish white color, which comes from a sphalerite mineral. Usually, zinc is used to coat iron so that it does not easily rust or galvanize. In addition, zinc can also be used for electric batteries.

    2. Copper

    Copper is a metal that has special characteristics with its reddish color. In addition, this metal is very malleable. Generally, it is used to make electric cables, brass alloys, bronze, cupronickel and hot water tanks.

    3. Solder

    Solder is an alloy of tin and lead. Known for its very low melting point. Usually, used to connect cables for an electronic item.

    4. Mercury

    Mercury is a metal that has a liquid form but is also heavy. Mercury has a silvery white color and don’t forget this mercury is a poisonous substance. Mercury is commonly used in a thermometer and some explosives.

    5. Platinum

    Platinum is a metal that has a silvery white color. In addition, platinum is very easy to shape. Platinum is often used to make jewelry, electronic items or can also be a catalyst.

    6. Plutonium

    Furthermore, there is a radioactive metal, namely plutonium, which is produced from a uranium process in a nuclear reactor. Generally, plutonium is used to make a nuclear weapon.

    7. Titanium

    Next is titanium, titanium is included in the type of strong metal, which has the characteristic white color and is very easy to shape. Titanium is highly resistant to corrosion. Typically titanium is used for alloys in spacecraft, bicycle frames and airplanes.

    8. Tin

    Tin is a soft metal, which is very easy to form and has a silvery white color. Tin is often used to gild a steel and stop a corrosion of bronze alloys.

    9. Lead

    Lead is a type of heavy metal that has a whitish blue color and is easy to form. For lead itself including the poisonous type. Typically, lead is used for batteries, roofing, and radiation shielding.

    10. Aluminum

    Aluminum has physical characteristics in the form of a silvery-white color, very light and also resistant to corrosion. This aluminum comes from a bauxite ore obtained from the electrolysis process. Aluminum is often used for electrical cables in the air, ships, airplanes, cars and bottled drinks.

    11. Iron

    Next is iron, this type of metal has physical characteristics in the form of a whitish ash color. Iron is produced from a process of smelting hematite ore. Iron is generally used for building and steel alloys.

    12. Fertilizer

    Steel is a very widely used metal and plays an important role in the industrial sector. This is because the composition of steel consists of an alloy of iron and carbon, both of which are often needed in industry.

    13. Gold

    Gold is a metal that includes precious metals, gold has very soft properties and has a bright yellow color. Certainly Reader already know that gold is often used for jewelry and electronic devices.

    14. Potassium

    Potassium is included in light metals which have physical characteristics in the form of a silvery color and are very reactive with other substances or elements. Potassium is generally used to mix chemical fertilizers and can be used to make glass.

    15. Calcium

    Calcium has a silvery white color and is included in metals that are very easy to form. In its own use, calcium is usually used to make high quality cement or fertilizer.

    16. Magnesium

    Magnesium itself belongs to the category of light metals. Magnesium has a whitish silver color and if burned will give rise to a bright white flame. Magnesium is often used for rescue flares and fireworks.

    17. Chromium

    This metal has a gray color and is very hard. Chromium can be used to create a shiny color. Chromium is also often used to make rust-resistant steel and can coat various other metals.

    18. Cupronickel

    Cupronickel is one type of alloy made of copper and nickel. Cupronickel is used and used to make coins.

    19. Silver

    Silver is a metal that is very easy to form and has a grayish white color. Silver is also capable of being a good conductor of heat and electricity. Silver is also often used to make jewelry and photographic equipment.

    20. Bronze

    Bronze comes from an alloy of copper and tin that has been around since ancient times. Bronze is known for its resistance to corrosion and is very easy to form. Bronze is usually used to make coins of low value.

    21. Brass

    Brass is one type of alloy, which is made of copper and zinc. Brass is usually used for decorative items, musical instruments, nails and screws.

    22. Wolfram

    Wolfram is a hard metal, which has a whitish gray color. Wolfram is also often used for lamp filaments, electronic items or even a sharp cutting tool.

    23. Sodium

    Sodium is a very reactive metal and has soft properties and a silvery white color. Sodium is often used for street lights and used in a chemical industry.

    24. Uranium

    Uranium is one of the metals that has a silvery white color and is included in the radioactive. Uranium itself is widely used for nuclear energy or even nuclear weapons.

    25. Vanadium

    Vanadium is a hard and poisonous metal. Vanadium is often used to increase the hardness of steel alloys. In addition, it is often used as a catalyst for the production of sulfuric acid.

    Principles of Inorganic Chemistry: An Introduction to the Chemistry of Non-Metallic Elements

    Closing

    Well , he Reader an explanation about the meaning of metals , types, and elements and properties of metals. Hopefully all the discussions above are useful and add insight for Reader.

     

  • Understanding Digital Literacy: Components, Benefits, and Improvement Efforts

    Meaning of Digital Literacy – In this age of advanced technology, communication and information can be delivered quickly and easily. Good utilization of technology is actually able to help the development of important areas in the life of the community, such as education and economy. If these fields can experience progress, then the civilization of this nation can also progress.

    Meaning of Digital Literacy

    Then, what is the definition of digital literacy? According to Paul Gilster (2007, in Harjono) said that digital literacy is the ability to understand and use information obtained from various sources.

    Meanwhile, according to Deakin University’s Graduate Learning Outcome 3, it is revealed that digital literacy is an effort to utilize technology in finding, using, and disseminating information in the digital world as it is today.

    Meanwhile, according to Common Sense Media (2009, in Harjono) thinks that digital literacy includes the existence of three abilities in the form of technology utilization competence, interpreting and understanding digital content as well as assessing its credibility, researching and communicating with the right tools.

    So, it can be concluded that digital literacy is an effort that individuals need in a sophisticated era like today to filter information accurately. Another effort to support digital literacy is the use of the right application and an in-depth understanding of the information obtained. Considering the impact on the spread of hoax in society is very worrying.

    Bad literacy turns out to have a bad impact on the psychology of teenagers. This is because teenagers tend to be unstable and often swallow the information they receive raw without finding out the truth and accuracy of the information.

    Components in Digital Literacy

    The nine components are social networking, transliteracy, maintaining privacy, managing identify, creating content, organizing and sharing content, reusing/repurposing content, filtering and selecting content , and self broadcasting .

    In order to better understand the nine components, let’s explain them one by one!

    1. Social Networking

    Nowadays, every individual must have more than one social media account, starting from Meta (Facebook), Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram, TikTok, and WhatsApp.

    The acquisition of information from social media must also be selected first. However, not everyone is careful in trying to filter the information that is spread.

    The ability to utilize the features found in a social media application is basic knowledge that must be possessed by its users.

    For example, those who work in the academic world make more use of social media in the form of LinkedIn to support their relationships with scholars around the world. Then, those who work in the field of marketing, take advantage of the ‘Shop’ feature in the Instagram platform to promote their products.

    2. Transliteracy

    This component of transliteracy is defined as an effort to utilize various platforms to create content, share it and communicate it. In this component, the ability to communicate with various social media, discussion groups, or other online services is prioritized.

    3. Maintaining Privacy

    Privacy is important in this digital literacy. We as social media users from various platforms must understand cyber crime . Currently, cyber crime has become rampant as the digital world develops.

    What is cyber crime ? Cyber ​​crime is cyber crime that involves illegal activities using computers, digital devices or computer networks.

    Examples of cyber crime that often occur are online theft via credit card ( carding ), hacking via email, to theft of personal information ( phishing ).

    4. Managing Digital Identity

    This fourth component, namely managing digital identity, is related to how we as platform users use identity accurately on the various social media we have.

    5. Creating Content

    Creating content is our skill as a platform user in making or creating content, for example PowToon, blogspot, wordpress, and other platforms .

    6. Organizing and Sharing Content

    Organizing and sharing content is related to how we as platform users organize and share information content so that it can be more easily disseminated to the general public. For example, the use of social bookmarking sites that are judged to facilitate the process of disseminating information and can be accessed by many internet users.

    7. Reusing/ Repurposing Content

    In this component of reusing/repurposing content , prioritizing how we as platform users create or ‘reprocess’ existing content so that it can be reused as needed.

    For example, a teacher creates content on Indonesian language subjects with lecture text material. The content is uploaded on the Slideshare platform , with the aim that many people download and study it.

    After that, the content is ‘processed’ again by others by adding more complete new information or knowledge.

    8. Filtering and Selecting Content

    In this component of filtering and selecting content, we prioritize the ability to find and filter the right information according to our needs through search engines on the internet.

    9. Self Broadcasting

    In this component, it has the purpose of sharing interesting ideas or ideas as well as multimedia content through various platforms , for example through blogs or online forums . This Self Broadcasting can be an effort to participate in the online social community in digital literacy activities.

    Benefits of Digital Literacy

    The ten benefits are saving time, learning faster, saving money, making it safer, acquisition of the latest information, always connected, making better decisions, can make you want to work, be happier, and can influence the world.

    To better understand, let’s listen to the description of the ten benefits!

    1. Save Time

    In an effort to find the information needed faster thanks to this digital literacy. For example, when you get an assignment from your teacher or lecturer to find certain information, through your digital literacy skills you can find out reliable sources of information that can then be used as a reference for your task needs.

    The speed in finding the information can certainly save you time. The benefits are not only felt by students, but also by online services that provide services online so that you do not have to come and visit the service directly.

    2. Learn Faster

    For example, you get an assignment from your teacher or lecturer to search and find definitions of certain terms. It will feel difficult when you have to look for it in a printed glossary.

    Therefore, it will be faster if you take advantage of an online platform that provides definitions of these terms.

    3. Save Money

    In a sophisticated era like now, it is common to find special applications that contain a comparison of discounts on a product. The application when used carefully can certainly save our production in trying to buy the product.

    4. Making it Safer

    The circulation of information from various sources makes it easier for us as internet users to find the right information according to our needs.

    For example, when you want to go abroad, you can find information about your destination country from the internet. Information about what culture is found in your destination country or the history of its tourist attractions.

    5. Acquisition of Latest Information

    Applications that are on our devices often update their versions to be better, thus helping us to obtain the latest information. Through the ability of literacy in digital form, we get the latest information. However, don’t forget to check if the information is accurate or not, yes…

    6. Always Connected

    The existence of the internet network in the use of applications or social media makes us always feel connected to the general public, especially during the communication process. So that when you are feeling desperate, you can quickly communicate with your friend.

    7. Make Better Decisions

    The existence of digital literacy makes us able to search, learn, analyze and compare the information obtained. This can certainly prepare better decisions from the process of analyzing and comparing the information.

    An information can be said to be something valuable if the information can influence us to act to do something.

    8. Can Make You Work

    In this all-digital era, the ability to operate a computer is one of the skills that everyone should have. These skills can actually help us in our daily work. For example, skills in using Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Power Point, etc.

    Where can you learn these skills? Of course from the information available on the internet then you read and try to operate it according to the information that has been written.

    9. Be Happier

    The existence of content in the form of pictures, sound, audio-visual (video) that is spread on the internet turns out to be entertaining. Internet users who often access those contents feel happier and have an influence on their happiness.

    However, not all of these contents are entertaining. Sometimes there is also content that makes people sad or even angry. As intelligent internet users, we must be careful in filtering those contents for the “well-being” of our mood.

    10. Influence the World

    As explained in benefit number nine before, the content available on the internet can affect its users. Yes, it’s true, whether the content is in the form of writing, pictures, or audio-visuals, it can clearly influence the thinking of its users.

    The dissemination of content when properly directed can contribute to the development and change in the dynamics of social life.

    When viewed from a larger scope, the dedication of a person’s thoughts spread through the internet becomes a form of expression that can later affect the life of the world, both in the present and in the future.

    Digital Literacy Improvement Efforts

    1. Perpusnas

    The information literacy program has become part of the library service program in Indonesia. From the advancement of technology, digital information resources are becoming more and more abundant due to the large number of sources that provide the information.

    Currently, the government has contributed to efforts to increase digital literacy by launching various programs.

    One of them is the program developed by the National Library of the Republic of Indonesia (PNRI) with e-resources services at http://e-resources.perpusnas.go.id/ .

    Not only that, the National Library of the Republic of Indonesia (PNRI) also provides digital services that of course contain various information sources in the form of journals, e-books , multimedia, manuscripts, and others.

    2. ePerpus

    ePerpus is a digital library service with a B2B (Business to Business) concept carried by Kompas Sinaumedia. ePerpus offers digital library management for schools, companies, institutions, and communities.  https://www.eperpus.com/home/

    3. Digital Sinaumedia

    Sinaumedia Digital is an ebook application with the most complete collection of books, newspapers and magazines from renowned writers and publishers. Sinaumedia Digital can be accessed via an Android or Apple smartphone or tablet. https://ebooks.Sinaumedia.com/

    These efforts are carried out with the aim of making a positive contribution to the improvement of information literacy skills, especially students who are used to searching for information through Google .

    However, these efforts cannot simply stop, they must be developed so that a future generation that is “reliable” in the culture of reading, writing, processing, and evaluating information in this digital era can be realized.

    The Influence of Digital Literacy on Child and Adolescent Psychology

    In Indonesia, the number of internet users is dominated by teenagers, so it is possible that teenagers are the most affected. According to Retnowati (2015, in Pratiwi) good use of the internet can improve the user’s performance, but when it is used badly, it can have negative effects on teenagers.

    Examples that often happen nowadays are cases of defamation, bullying, and even prostitution that definitely trigger adolescent depression. Why can this happen?

    Because they have not fully understood the consequences of the use of digital media. It is true that they (teenagers) have mastered literacy in the form of the ability to read and write, but they do not yet have digital literacy skills.

    In the internet, many users are not shy to insult and even type rude words to other users. That is an example of the negative impact of digital literacy today. The phenomenon, when accepted by teenagers whose psychological conditions are generally not stable, can influence their emotional development in the future.

    The inability of teenagers to understand digital literacy can be seen from their actions who immediately make insulting comments when there is negative information, then when there is positive information they immediately share it on their account.

    So what should be done so that today’s teenagers are not easily depressed when doing digital literacy with social media? Of course, the role of parents is very important. They should be careful to monitor the behavior of teenagers.

    In addition, parents should provide an understanding of digital literacy. Don’t let the advancement of technology, especially the existence of digital literacy, make the psychological state of teenagers disturbed, even to the point of depression. Therefore, let’s be smart internet users! ^^

    So that you understand more about digital literacy in this era of globalization, you can read some books or references that discuss digital literacy. Come on, be an agent of change for the future!

  • The Understanding of Static Electricity and How It Works to Its Benefits!

    Understanding Static Electricity – Power generation or electrical energy is one of the main forms of energy needed by electrical equipment or energy stored in current in amperes (A) and voltage in volts (V), as long as the need consumes electrical energy in watts (W) to move a motor, light a lamp, flow energy to a water heater, cool the ac, or reactivate a mechanical device to produce another form of energy.

    Electrical energy powers household appliances, office equipment, industrial machines, trains, street lights, fireplaces, cooking utensils, and more. The energy produced can come from various sources, such as water, petroleum, coal, wind, geothermal, nuclear, solar and others. The basic unit of electrical energy is Joule, while the other is KWh (Kilowatt Hours). Electricity for industry and households is produced from power plants, such as PLTA, PLTN, PLTD (solar), PLTM, PLTS (solar energy), PLTU and others.

    Electrical energy is an important necessity in everyday life. Various necessities of life require electricity to continue operating. Some household chores such as ironing, washing, and storing food all require electricity.

    For other businesses, such as desks, laptops, computers and printers are often used, which of course are highly dependent on the power produced from electricity. The electricity used comes from the generating station. The electrical energy produced is then transported to homes, schools, factories and offices using conductive cables.

    In the science of physics about energy that comes from electricity, it is known that there are two types of electricity, namely static electricity and dynamic electricity, both of which must have significant differences even though they come from the same energy source. Well, this time we will focus more on discussing static electricity. Further discussion on what is the meaning of static electricity? we will review the definition, working method, and its use in life in the discussion below.

    Understanding Static Electricity

    Static electricity is electricity with a charge in a stationary or static state, unlike electro mobility where the charge is always moving. In a sense, static electricity is an imbalance of electric charge inside or on the surface of things. During this time, the load remains until it disappears when released.

    Electricity comes from the Greek word, specifically electron which means (Amber). The word amber itself comes from a petrified resin tree. The nature of this stone to attract small objects after being rubbed, this was later developed by a Greek scientist named Thales of Miletus with experiments that led to the discovery of electric charge

    In general, the understanding of static electricity is a group of electric charges in a fixed unit, the amount or balance of electric charges in one unit. Just like when you rub a plastic ruler on your hair, it will have a negative charge, and the hair will have a positive charge.

    The release when these two materials are rubbed causes both to be positively charged and negatively charged. Charge is a physical quantity related to electricity and other effects related to matter. Charges that can be neutralized by means of friction show that these charges do not negate each other.

    The amount of charge will depend on the lack or excess of the number of electrons, the more an object the greater the charge. According to electron theory, electrons that move from one atom to another are called free electrons, and things that can transfer electrons freely are called conductors.

    A static charge is generated whenever two surfaces are joined and separated, and at least one of the surfaces has a high resistance to current (and is therefore an insulator). Static electricity effects are already familiar to most people because people can feel, hear, and even see sparks when the excess charge is neutralized when brought close to a large conductor of electricity (eg: Earth).

    The coulomb is a unit of measurement for the magnitude of electric charge. There is negative and positive charge. An excess of electrons in an object makes the object negatively charged, and if the object is positively charged, then the object lacks electrons. If the amount of positive and negative charge on an object is the same, then the object has a neutral charge. 1 electron = -1,6 x 10-19 coulomb 1 proton = -1,6 x 10-19 coulomb.

    History of Static Electricity

    During the cultural era around the Mediterranean Sea, it was discovered that some objects, such as amber sticks, if rubbed with cat fur, could attract light objects such as fur. around 600 BC. a scientist named Thales conducted an experiment on static electricity, where he found that amber is magnetic unlike minerals, so it does not need to be rubbed. At that time, Thales had not really observed the magnetic effect of gravity, until scientific developments proved the relationship between magnetism and electricity.

    The history of the discovery of electricity begins with the research of a Greek philosopher named Thales from Miletus around 600 BC. At that time, Thales discovered a natural stone that was able to attract objects made of iron (now called magnets). He continued experimenting with other stones until he found a point at the conclusion that if amber is rubbed with wool, it can attract fragments of light.

    This happens because amber (in Greek for electron) carries an electrical charge, or static electricity as it is commonly used today. In short, Thales can be called the father of the inventor of static electricity. For the following centuries, electricity remained an interesting topic.

    It was only in 1600 that the English scientist William Gilbert discovered that amber is not the only object capable of attracting light. Gilbert also mentioned this event with a new Latin term, electrius, which was later absorbed into English by electric and electricity.

    Later, scientists such as Otto von Guericke, Robert Boyle, Stephen Gray and CF du Fay also conducted research related to electricity. A new breakthrough finally came in the 18th century, when Benjamin Franklin did extensive research on electricity.

    An American scientist experimented by attaching a metal key to a kite string during a thunderstorm and discovered that electricity was equivalent to lightning. After this historic discovery, people were eager to try harnessing the power of electricity in a very simple way to light their homes.

    How Static Electricity Works

    Understanding Static electricity is the result of the accumulation of electricity that occurs when two non-metallic objects rub against each other. This electrification usually occurs when charged particles move from one place to another. For example, when combing, the hair will not feel like it is lifted towards the comb.

    There are three ways of working to give an energy charge to static electricity, namely, friction, conduction, and induction.

    1. Friction

    Which of the following objects becomes electrified by rubbing with other objects? For example, some things can be statically charged, such as silk and glass. Glass is positively charged while silk is negatively charged. This process occurs when electrons from the glass are transferred to the silk fabric.

    2. Conduction

    The way to make things conduct electricity is by conduction. The definition of conduction is the transfer of electrically charged objects to non-charged objects. In this way, things that previously had no electrical charge will gain charge.

    3. Induction

    Induction is a way of giving an electric charge to things. In a sense, induction separates the charges in the conductor. The trick is to bring a charged object closer to another object that is in a neutral state. This conductive event is often found when we study the charge of an object using an electroscope.

    Static Electricity Formula

    There are several formulas that are commonly used to solve problems involving static electricity. We will describe the formula below:

    1. Coulomb force

    Coulomb force is the magnitude of the electric force that occurs between two electrically charged objects. Different amounts of electric current will attract and the same amount of electric current will repel. Therefore, the magnitude of the pulling or repelling force can be made according to the equation: F = k q1.q2 / r2 Description: F = total force (N) k = coefficient (9 x 109 Nm2 / C2) j = distance between loads (m) q1 and q2 = charge of each particle (C)

    2. Electric field

    An electric field is an area around a charged particle that is subjected to an electric force (Coulomb force). The direction of the electric field is such that the positive charge moves away from the source charge. When the negative charge moves inward. The charger that produces electricity is called the source load. At the same time, another load placed under the influence of the electric field from the source load is called a test load. Here is the formula: E=k Q/r2 or E=F/q Description: E = electric field strength (N/C) F = coulomb force (N) r = distance from the test charge to the charge source (m) Q = source charge (C) q = test load (C)

    3. Potential

    Potential energy is the work per unit charge required to move the charge from one point to another. The formula is: V = k Q / r Description: V = potential (volts) Q = source charge (C) k = coefficient (9 x 109 Nm2 / C2) r = distance to the charge source (m) )

    4. Potential Electricity

    The energy or effort required to move an electrical charge from one point to another. The following formula is: Ep = k q1.q2 / r Description: Ep = potential energy of the test load k = coefficient (9 x 109 Nm2 / C2) r = distance to the source of the load (m) q1 and q2 = electricity product of each particle (c ).

    5. Capacitor

    A capacitor is one of the electrical devices used to store energy in a short time so that it can be released quickly. The formula is: C = ???? oA / d Description: C = capacitance of the capacitor (Farad or f) q = charge between two parts (C) V = potential difference between two parts (voltA = cross-section of the room (m2)? ??? = allowed dielectric of the material

    Example of Static Electricity

    There are several examples of electricity that we can find in everyday life, apart from the friction of a plastic ruler on the head. Whether done consciously or unconsciously, examples of static electricity are as follows.

    Common examples of static electricity in everyday life are:

    1. Lightning

    So what is the relationship between static electricity and lightning? Therefore, lightning can occur due to the transfer of electrons. When the sky is in a state of excess electrons, lightning also appears towards areas with fewer electrons. In order for the excess electrons to be immediately transferred, the lightning finally finds the object closest to the cloud. This is why lightning often strikes large objects. It can be said that lightning is an example of static electricity hazards.

    2. When combing hair

    The hair unconsciously stands up according to the movement of the comb, which can occur due to the strength of the interaction between the comb and the hair.

    3. A silk cloth is rubbed on a glass rod

    This will cause the two objects to attract each other, this is due to the jump of electrons from the glass rod to the silk cloth.

    4. A plastic ruler is rubbed on the woolen cloth

    Both objects are neutrally charged but when rubbed together electrons jump from the cloth to the ruler.

    5. Bring your hand to the TV screen that has just been turned off

    Note that hairs will appear on your arms or hands, this is due to the presence of static electricity.

    6. In the nervous system

    It turns out that electricity also flows in the human body. Evidence of this can be seen from the arrangement of the central nervous system that regulates all activities that occur in the human body. The central nervous system is the body’s coordination system consisting of millions of nerve cells or neurons.

    A neuron is the smallest structure in the nervous system, which functions to transmit electrical charges in the form of ions from dendrites to axons. Thus, it can be concluded that there is electricity in the human body.

    7. Electricity in Animals

    Electrical properties can also be found in certain animals. Where, there are animals that are able to produce electricity and there are also animals that are able to take advantage of the electric current that surrounds them. Examples of animals with electrical properties include electric eels, electric rays, and hammerhead sharks.

    8. Use of Electricity in the Environment

    In our daily life we ​​cannot separate the use of static electricity. This can be seen from several applications that can be applied in human life such as lightning rods, electrostatic precipitators for car paint, photocopiers, laser printers and many others.

    Utilization of Static Electricity in Life

    1. Paint the car

    When the paint is sprayed, the fine paint particles become charged as they rub against the air. The painted vehicle receives a charge opposite to the paint particles, so the paint droplets will be attracted to the vehicle.

    This method is useful if the vehicle has an uneven surface. Because the paint particles will stick and follow the existing electric field.

    As a result, paint drops will cover all parts of the vehicle that may be hidden from the spray layer. Thus, this method will make the paint layer evenly and reach hidden places.

    2. Photocopier

    The photocopier was first designed by an American physicist named Chester F. Carlston. This machine uses the induction load principle as well as the Coulomb force.

    The main part of the photocopier is the photoconductor plate. This panel does not transmit electricity when in a dark room. The new sheet will conduct electricity when exposed to light.

    Initially, the photoconductor plate is induced by moving a negatively charged conductor along its surface. Therefore, a plate is formed with an induced positive charge.

    If the paper to be copied is illuminated, the reflected light will hit the photoconductive plate which already contains an induction charge. As a result, the electric charge formed exactly as it is on the paper is reproduced.

    Negatively charged ink is sprayed onto the plate. The ink is then transferred to another type of paper to make a photocopy. This layer of paper will be heated so that the ink adheres strongly. Static electricity affects some electronic devices.

    3. Inkjet printers

    This printer works by spraying fine ink particles onto the surface of the paper. With several injection points, the material to be printed will show its shape.

    However, to do so, the printer must control the position of the falling ink jet by applying an electrostatic force. Small droplets of ink are charged as they are sprayed through small channels in the print head.

    Then the particle will pass through two metal plates. If both plates receive an electric potential, the ink drop will become charged.

    By adjusting the load on the plate, the printer controls the direction in which the filled ink drops fall. If the ink particles are positively charged, they will be attracted to the negatively charged plate and repelled by the positively charged plate. Thus, the ink drops will be directed upwards.

    4. Smoke collector

    Smoke collectors are useful for reducing air pollution from factory chimneys. The use of this device is achieved by installing two metal with large opposite markings on the installed factory chimney.

    Smoke particles flowing through the chimney will be induced to have an induced charge. The resulting charge is positive and negative.

    These smoke particles will attract each other to form larger and heavier particles. The increased weight will prevent particles from flying with the smoke. Particles will fall to the bottom of the chimney.

    In addition to fusing together, charged smoke particles are also attracted to active metals in the chimney.

    These particles then aggregate on the metal and form larger clumps. Therefore, the mass is easy to clean and can reduce air pollution.

    Conclusion

    A short discussion about the meaning of static electricity Not just the definition, but how the early history of the discovery of static electricity was found, the formula of static electricity, how static electricity works, examples of static electricity and its use in everyday life.

  • Meaning of Economics: Purpose, Field and Principles

    Definition of Economics – Economics as a science that studies the use of limited natural resources in the fulfillment of unlimited human needs. Economics is also a science that studies human efforts in achieving prosperity. See a more complete explanation of Economics starting from its Definition, Purpose, Areas and Principles as follows:

    A. Understanding of Economics

    Economics is the science that examines market financial behavior ranging from interest rates, exchange rates, business cycles, international trade, government policies to the efficiency of natural resource use which you can learn in the book Introduction to Economics below.

    Economics also studies the income of individuals, companies, countries and stock prices to the imbalance of the economy. By studying economics will help a person in understanding how the economic behavior of a certain society, give input in decision-making, give an understanding of the potential and limitations of the economic policy taken, to increase human sensitivity to various economic and global problems.

    Here are other definitions of Economics according to experts:

    1. Alfred Marshall

    Through his book entitled The Principle of Economics, Alfred Marshall thinks that economics is a science that studies human actions both individually and collectively and their connection in the use of material goods.

    2. HJ Davenport

    In the book “Economics of Enterprise” , HJ Davenport reveals economics as a Science that handles various problems from the point of departure of prices. Economics is also a tool that studies how the level of production can be increased so that the standard of living of the community will automatically increase as well.

    3. M. Manullang

    According to M. Manullang, economics is a science that studies how to meet the desires of people or society in order to achieve prosperity or conditions where people can meet their needs, both in the form of goods and services.

    4. Oscar Langen

    Economics according to Oscar Langen is a science that studies the administration of various resources, both small and large resources, which are then analyzed so that they can be reused for human life to the maximum and best.

    5. John Stuart Mill

    According to John Stuart Mill, economics studies the various intricacies of billing and production. Not only that, according to Stuart, economics also discusses various production and wealth distribution activities.

    6. Prof. PA Samuelson

    In the book Economics: An Introductory Analysis Prof. PA Samuelson explained that economics is a study that studies how people make choices by using limited resources which are then further processed to produce various types of goods and services to then be distributed again to various levels of society.

    7. Louis Cantori

    According to Louis Cantori, economics viewed from an Islamic point of view is economics based on various Islamic rules. For example, about the problem that guarantees the rotation of property owned by an individual.

    8. Suherman Rosyidi

    Suherman Rosyidi as a Philosopher of Indonesian origin thinks that economics is a branch of science that provides an understanding of the symptoms that arise in the community in its efforts to meet the needs of life or its efforts to achieve prosperity.

    9. Adam Smith

    Often referred to as classical economic theory. According to Adam Smith Economics as a branch of science that studies human behavior in its efforts to allocate various limited resources to achieve certain goals..

    10. Mankiw

    Mankiw believes that a person who masters Economics will improve his understanding of the various potentials and limitations of economic policy. Economics also studies how an individual then interacts with each other.

    B, Branches of Economics

    Economics as a science that studies various human activities in order to meet all the needs of life. In order to achieve this prosperity, humans will then perform economic activities such as consumption, production, and distribution. This will then give rise to various economic problems, namely the imbalance of unlimited human needs with the increasingly limited amount of goods or production. Here are some divisions of the types of economics that you need to know:

    1. Applied Economics

    Applied economics is a field of economic science that applies economic theory and principles in real situations to predict possible outcomes that focus on the practical use of economic science, especially for individuals in decision-making, policies, guidelines, or certain standards with the aim of overcoming problems that occur. Economics usually uses case studies and statistics. For example in the sphere of enterprise, monetary economy, and banking.

    Monetary Economics is a part of economics that is used to study the nature, function, and influence of money in economic activities that you can learn in the book Monetary Economics: Indonesian Case Study.

    2. Descriptive Economics

    Descriptive economics is an economic science that describes the state of the economy in society at that time. Descriptive economics itself displays data from various facts and phenomena that occur. Economics examines various images, and conditions of the economy. The data collected is variable and can be in the form of numbers, graphics, curves, or other forms of presentation that you can understand the meaning of in the Descriptive Statistics book: Vivi Silvia.

    In Indonesia, this economic science is then used by BPS (Badan Pusat Statistik) to provide an overview of the Indonesian economic conditions both macro and micro. The application of this economic knowledge was also used when dissecting the monetary crisis that occurred in Indonesia in 1998.

    3. Macro Economics

    4. Microeconomics

    Microeconomics is an economic science that studies things that are limited to an economic activity only. Including the base price and the highest price that needs to be set in order to maintain a balance between demand and supply. Because if there is a monopolist in the market then it will narrow the business opportunities of new players, so that the entrepreneurial spirit of the community will also decrease.

    Microeconomics also discusses various aspects of individuals such as the behavior of buyers or consumers as well as the behavior of individual producers. You can learn this in the book Micro Economics An Introduction.

    5. Public Economics

    As in the example of the function of the government through the point of view of the micro economy in the book Public Economy by Bambang Suprayitno.

    6. Monetary Economics

    This knowledge also helps in the implementation of a country’s monetary policy. This knowledge studies a policy issued by the government to regulate the financial stability of a country. Monetary Economics also learns about money, banking, and various other financial institutions. Aspects studied range from inflation, the amount of money in circulation, and bank interest rates.

    It can be concluded that monetary economics talks about how money works which you can learn through the book Monetary Economics: Indonesian Case Study.

    7. Economics of Human Resources

    Human Resource Economics (HR) is an economic science that studies labor production factors, starting from job opportunities, labor quality, and wage determination. Its scope ranges from population dynamics, employment, employment structure, informal-formal sector, population transition, population mobility and migration, labor demand and supply, child labor, workforce planning and population and economic development.

    The Economics of Human Resources book: In the Perspective of Development below can be used as a reference for those of you who want to learn more about economics.

    8. International Economics

    International economics is an economic science that studies the occurrence of economic activities between countries, for example at the World Trade Organization (WTO); International Monetary Fund (IMF); and the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD).

    This knowledge also has an important role in the international business cycle. In addition, the theory of the international economy itself is progressing and developing according to the book International Economy by Mahyus Ekananda.

    Matters studied in international economics ranging from international trade, international balance of payments and international trade balance. Economics which will then also examine various international political events. Economic activity, and current economic problems, whether it is the latest developments regarding Brexit proposed by the United Kingdom from the European Union or the latest tariff changes in the United States. This discipline also brings together various principles and approaches of macroeconomics and microeconomics.

    9. Regional Economic Science

    Regional economics is an economic science that studies the economic interaction between a region and its development with the aim of increasing the level of the economy in a region. Regional economic knowledge itself can also be used as a medium that will help the regional government to analyze the economic problems that occur and then make policies as a solution.

    You can learn the theory and practice in economics through the book Regional Economics Theory and Practice by Mudrajad Kuncoro.

    10. Industrial Economics

    Some topics related to economics such as market structure, market competition behavior, monopolies-oligopolies can be learned in the book Industrial Economics by Muhammad Teguh.

    12. Economics of Natural Resources

    Economics that studies the problem and allocation of natural resources optimally viewed from an economic point of view covering positive and negative externalities.

    C. Field of Economics

    Economics is divided into two by Samuelson and Nordhaus, namely microeconomics and macroeconomics. Microeconomics is an economy that studies the behavior of companies and their consumers, as well as their relationship in determining prices and goods or services to be traded, and the quantity of input factors.

    Some aspects of analysis in microeconomics include Benefit Analysis, Cost Analysis, Supply Theory, Demand Theory, Elasticity, Production Theory, Price Theory. The scope of this economy examines more about producers and consumers. In addition, microeconomics also plays a role in making policies that are used as a foundation in planning various company policies in the management of their resources, for example price and wage management.

    While according to Mankiw (2014), microeconomics is a science that studies how households and companies make decisions and are able to interact in the market. Samuelson and Nordhaus (2010) explained that macroeconomics first appeared when the revolution titled “General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money” by John Maynard Keynes was published, the theory discussed the impact of the business cycle with high levels of unemployment and inflation. Macro economics helps in determining consumption and total investment, which is how banks then manage their customers’ money and interest.

    D. Principles of Economics

    The principle of economic science is used as a guide to achieve a rational comparison between the sacrifice and the result or in other words get the biggest profit with the smallest sacrifice, or with a certain sacrifice and then get the maximum possible result, the economic principle will also make a person minimize the loss that he suffering Here is a breakdown of the principles of economics that you need to know:

    1. Economic Principles in Production Activities

    2. Economic Principles in Distribution Activities

    3. Economic Principles in Consumption Activities

    E. Economic Theory and Model

    In economics, economic law is a cause-and-effect relationship between various economic activities that are interconnected, for example the law of demand and supply. Economic theory is also used as a basic summary as well as used as a basis for the implementation of various economic policies.

    It is these theories that then eventually form an economic model that helps explain an economic event. One example of the economic model itself is on the production curve that produces various concepts of diminishing returns and opportunity costs that can be applied.

    Economic method as a procedure taken to achieve certain goals is generally used to solve various economic problems based on certain theories. An example is in the decision-making method with deductive and inductive methods (decision-making based on data collected from the reality of human life.

    The reality is then experienced by families, individuals, and local communities. This reality is also studied to find efforts to fulfill needs) Meanwhile, the deductive method works on the basis of provisions, laws, or general principles that have been previously tested for truth. This method determines the steps for solving problems in accordance with the principles, principles, laws, and provisions that apply in economics.

    Actions, Motives, and Economic Principles.

    Economic action refers to every human step to meet his needs. This includes production, consumption, and distribution, while the economic motive is the force that moves people to perform economic actions.

    Not only that in the economic cycle, of course there are also economic principles that are used as thinking to achieve certain goals with the least possible sacrifice. So much information about Economics Starting from the Definition, Purpose, Field to the Principles. Hope it’s useful!

     

  • The Understanding of Dynamic Electricity Up to Its Types

    Definition of dynamic electricity – Human activities mostly depend on electricity. A variety of household furniture mostly requires electricity to be used. Electricity is something charged due to the presence or absence of electrons. It happened as a result of things rubbing against each other.

    While dynamic electricity is one of the classifications in electrical energy. Electricity can be interpreted as a condition of certain subatomic particles, such as protons and electrons that cause attraction and repulsion between the two.

    In general, electricity can be understood as a source of energy channeled through cables. Electric current arises because the electric charge flows from the positive end of the channel or cable to the negative end. Electricity is divided into two types, namely static electricity and dynamic electricity.

    Human needs in terms of electricity show that dynamic electricity is very necessary in our lives. This shows that the phenomenon of dynamic electricity plays an important role in our lives. Equipment such as televisions, refrigerators, rice cookers , computers, radios cannot turn on by themselves without being connected to electricity.

    Other examples can be found in flashlights, wall clocks, or toy cars that use batteries. The energy in the battery is the driving force of the dynamo (electric motor) in cars. While the battery in the flashlight creates a flow of electrons that work to light the lamp inside.

    Dynamic electricity is electrical charges that flow or move. Reported from Circuit Globe , dynamic electricity is electrons that move in one direction or back and forth in a conductor or what is commonly referred to as electric current. Dynamic electricity is a group of electrons that continuously flow from one point to another. The flow of electricity is similar to the flow of a flowing river, so dynamic electricity is called electric current.

    Electric current is the flow of positively charged particles that pass through a conductor or transmitter from a high potential to a low potential. Electric current can be analogized to the flow of water that occurs due to the difference in height. Water can flow from high places to low places. Likewise with dynamic electric currents that can move with potential energy differences.

    Dynamic electricity is electricity that moves or is called electric current. In dynamic electricity, the flow of charged particles in the form of electric current can produce electrical energy. Electric current flows from a point of higher potential to a point of lower potential, when the two points are connected in a closed circuit. This explanation is included in the IPA Class IX Electricity book .

    The formula for electric current is I = Q/t where I is the electric current, Q is the electric charge, and t is time. The largest and smallest unit of electric current is the Ampere (A).

    Quoting from the Automotive Basic Technology book , dynamic electricity can be said to be the state of free electron flow that comes from electrons that have separated from their respective atoms. Electrons will move through an object that has the properties of a conductor.

    When free electrons move in a fixed direction, then this dynamic electricity is called direct current (DC) electricity. When the direction of movement of the amount of current is periodic over time, then this dynamic electricity is called alternating current (AC). Dynamic electricity is electricity that can move or flow in an electrical network. The electric current is the flow of electrical charge that passes through the transmission wire every unit of time.

    Dynamic electricity can also be explained in detail as follows:

    1. Dynamic electricity is the flow of electric charge through a conductor (electric current).
    2. Dynamic electricity is electricity that moves or flows in an electrical network.
    3. Dynamic electricity is produced from a power source or power plant.
    4. Dynamic electricity occurs because of direct current and alternating current.
    5. Electric current can only turn on in a closed electrical circuit.

    Electric Current

    Based on the book Learning Concepts of Electricity and Magnets, electric current is divided into two, namely:

    1. Direct Current (DC)

    Direct current or direct current (DC) is a current whose current is always fixed and constant all the time and has only one direction, which is positive to negative. DC electricity generating sources are divided into two, namely:

    a. Primary Elements

    A primary element is an element that cannot be reloaded when its load is exhausted. When the electrical voltage of the element runs out, it can no longer be used. An example of a primary element is a dry battery.

    b. Secondary Elements

    A secondary element is an element that can be reloaded if its load is exhausted. This causes the electric current to flow back to the element. Examples of secondary elements are accumulators and rechargeable batteries.

    2. Alternating Current (AC)

    Alternating current or alternating current (AC) is a current that in its management moves back and forth, both in direction and magnitude. The source of AC electric current cannot be determined as positive and negative poles even though the electricity also has two ends of the transmitter or two ends of the channel.

    This is because the AC electric current will flow alternately between the two ends, sometimes being in a positive or negative position. Meanwhile, the number of back-and-forth flows traveled in each second is called frequency.

    An example of an AC electric current source is PLN electricity which has a frequency of 60 Hz. That is, in every second, the current has flowed back and forth 60 times. The electricity in the house also includes AC electricity. Other examples of AC power sources are dynamo and electric generator.

    Ohm’s Law

    As explained in the book Things you need to know about Electricity, electric current can flow in an electrical circuit if there is a potential difference in the closed circuit. The relationship between electric current strength and electric potential difference was first studied by Georg Simon Ohm. The results of his research are now known as Ohm’s Law.

    Ohm’s law explains that the connection between the potential difference or voltage of a current source, the strength of the electric current, and the resistance of a network. Ohm’s law states that if the voltage in a circuit is increased, then the current will increase, and vice versa. For example, when the voltage is doubled, the current will also double.

    That is, the current is proportional to the voltage. If the voltage remains constant, then a smaller conductor resistance will produce a larger current because the strength of the current is inversely proportional to the electrical resistance. Based on Ohm’s Law, the formula for electric current strength is I = V/R . I is the current, V is the voltage, and R is the resistance.

    V is the symbol of the potential difference with the unit of Volts, R is the resistance with the unit of Ohm (Ω), and I is the current strength with the unit of Ampere.

    Types of Dynamic Electric Currents

    As reported by Solar Energy , electric current is divided into two, namely direct current (DC) and alternating current (AC).

    Direct Current

    Direct current (DC) is a type of electric current when electrons flow in only one direction. An example of the type of dynamic electric current is the current produced by photovoltaic panels.

    Alternating Electric Current

    Alternating current (AC) is when electrons change direction repeatedly, starting from positive to negative. Alternating current or AC is a type of electricity that is often used in the homes we live in.

    Dynamic Electrical Characteristics

    1. Dynamic electricity consists of electric charge that moves to produce an electric current.
    2. To keep the load flowing, agents are needed to do the work needed to keep the load moving.
    3. In the International System of Units, charge is measured in coulombs (C) and current in coulombs/second, a unit called ampere (A). A current of 1 A means that the cross-sectional area of ​​the conductor flows 1 C every second.
    4. Electric current needs a closed path to maintain its flow. This strip is called a circuit and must be closed, if the current flowing through the strip is open, it will stop.
    5. All moving charges produce a magnetic field, including current-carrying wires.
    6. In principle, the direction of the current is the movement followed by the electrons in the conductor leaving the negative pole of the battery and going towards the positive.

    Example of Dynamic Electricity Application

    Every electrical energy, be it dynamic electricity or static electricity has a role in our daily life. Here are some examples of the application of dynamic electricity according to the Read Physics website , among which are:

    1. Electrical Network

    Dynamic electricity is present in the current that circulates in any electrical circuit, for example in things around us, such as flashlights, electric stoves, telephones, and all types of equipment that we use.

    2. Electric Transmission System

    The electrical energy transmission system uses dynamic electrical energy in the form of alternating current, because it is easier to conduct over long distances.

    3. Atmospheric Electricity

    Electric current is produced in the earth’s atmosphere, especially in the ionosphere, ultraviolet radiation from the sun comes from charged particles that flow in large circuits of electric current at high altitudes.

    4. Terrestrial Electricity

    Electric current also circulates in the earth’s crust as a result of chemical reactions that occur in the soil layer. Earth has its own magnetic field.

    One of them is that the flow of molten iron in the core of the planet produces an electric current, and this is responsible for creating the earth’s magnetic field.

    5. Aurora in the Polar Regions

    The polar aurora is a region of the night sky with bright and beautiful colors, which appears near the poles. This phenomenon is caused by dynamic electricity, because the flow of charged particles continuously comes from the sun, which is known as the solar wind.

    When these particles approach the Earth, this magnetic field deflects them, thus emitting light and creating a luminous effect called an aurora.

    6. Functions of the Nervous System

    The electric current in our body can process stimulation from the outside so that it can be received by the five senses and then transformed into information through the nervous system and travels to the brain with electrical impulses.

    In this case, a small electric current in our body is needed to carry information. In the same way, muscle movement depends on electrical impulses that run from the brain that carry movement orders to our body.

    7. Defibrillator

    Dynamic electricity can be very damaging to the human body, a current of 1 A can be fatal. But if used correctly, electric current helps save lives, as in the case of defibrillators.

    A defibrillator is a device that passes through a large capacitor, then conducts dynamic electricity to the heart, to help restore rhythm after a heart attack.

    8. Battery Use on Laptops

    A laptop can turn on and work because there is a battery inside the laptop. The flow of electrons from the battery moves to the laptop, this flow of electrons will stop flowing until the laptop battery is used up and finally the laptop dies and does not work.

    9. Use of Batteries to Light a Flashlight

    A lamp connected to a battery with a conductor wire. This causes the flow of electrons from the battery to move to the lamp through the conductor wire and cause the lamp to light up brightly.

    10. Use of Electric Bells

    An electric bell that is connected to the battery also with a conductor wire. The appearance of the flow of electrons from the battery moving to the bell through the transmission wire can cause the electric bell to ring. Batteries have a positive pole and a negative pole.

    The positive pole is the end of the battery with a small protrusion. The negative pole is the flat end of the battery. When the two poles are connected with a cable, it will produce electrons flowing from the positive pole to the negative pole.

    11. Use of Power Bank

    The phenomenon of dynamic electricity can actually be found in a power bank. Through the power storage device, electricity will flow to the cell phone battery. At that moment, there was an electric current.

    12. Use of Batteries to Move Cars

    Another example of dynamic electricity is the use of batteries to move cars. Similar to the working principle of batteries in other types of goods, electricity will flow when the switch on cars is turned on. Both ends of the battery that contains electricity will be connected to the electric motor, so that the cars can move.

    Benefits of Dynamic Electricity

    Dynamic electricity is a type of electricity that is often found in everyday life. However, not a few question the use of dynamic electricity to support various activities. Collected from the same source, here are four benefits of dynamic electricity for everyday life.

    1. As a source of energy

    Electricity is known as a source of energy. Because electricity is an energy producer. Therefore, electricity is often used as an energy source for various types of household appliances that use electricity.

    2. Light Producer

    Electricity through lamps can function as a light producer. Because, there is a change in electrical energy into light.

    3. Heat Producer

    Adapted from the book Getting to Know Electrical Safety by Andi Tiara, dynamic electricity can also be used as a heat generator and applied to devices that use heating elements. As for how it works, electric current flows through the nickel to produce heat.

    4. Motion Generator

    Electricity in general is also useful for producing motion on some specific types of things. The way it works is the flow of electricity is directed to the driving motor that produces movement.

    Basically, the electricity we use today has many benefits. In fact, it can be said that almost all life in this world depends on electricity. Thus the discussion about the meaning of dynamic electricity , hopefully all the discussions that have been explained above can provide benefits for Reader.

     

  • Meaning of License and Types of License in the Business World

    Meaning of License – In the business world we have often heard the term license. Whether it’s a business in the form of selling goods or offering a service, licensing is so important. Why is it so important to have a license in the business world?

    Simply put, a license can protect the business you run. So that you will also better understand what a license is. Then you can read the explanation in this article.

    This article will explain everything related to the license. Ranging from the meaning of the license, benefits to the types of the license itself.

    Definition of License

    Before going into a deeper discussion, of course the first thing we will discuss first is the meaning of the license itself. A license is the granting of permission to carry out a production process, both in the form of goods and services.

    Where the product or service has previously been patented by its creator for the first time. In addition, licenses are often referred to as the granting of permission to intellectual property. Where later the licensor will give a permit (license) to the recipient in order to be able to use it for production or service needs.

    In the license there is also a term license agreement. A license agreement can be done for two or more parties. Where later one party will be the licensor and the other party will be the recipient of the license.

    Later, the licensee can easily take advantage of the permission to produce goods or services legally. The licensor is usually referred to as the licensor. While the license recipient is referred to as the licensee.

    Types of Licenses

    Once you know the meaning of license. Then the next is an explanation about the types of licenses. Where actually licenses are divided into several types. Each type of license always has its own importance.

    Therefore, for those of you who want to make a license, it’s best to know the types of licenses first so that you don’t make a mistake in making the license.

    1. HKI License (Intellectual Property Rights)

    The first type of license is HKI or intellectual property rights license. Among other types of licenses. Maybe you will also hear this type of license more often.

    In this type of IPR license there are some rules that apply. For example, such as the territory of use, renewal and some other rules that have previously been determined by the owner of the license.

    A simple example is a license to computer software. Where later the licensor can grant rights to the user of their software.

    2. Bulk License

    Next there is a type of mass license, most of this type of license will be easier to find on computer software. In detail, the type of mass license written on computer software is UELA or End User License Agreement.

    Simply put, the type of mass license is the granting of a license from the licensee to an individual in order to be able to use the computer software.

    3. License of Goods and Services

    Further there is a license for goods and services. Those who hold this license can grant permits or licenses to individuals and other companies. The purpose of doing this is so that individuals or other companies can sell products and services that are under the license holder.

    Both individuals and companies can sell products or services from the main licensee without having to fear any legal claims.

    4. License of Artwork or Character

    The same is the case with goods and services licenses. This type of license for artwork or characters can also be given to other parties in order to be able to sell a product that has artwork or characters in it.

    5. Education License

    Finally there is a license in the field of education. This type of license is usually in the form of an academic degree. For example, a university is a licensee. The university can give its license to its students so that they can gain knowledge in a certain period of time at the university. In addition, a license in the field of education can also be given in the form of an award.

    Well those are some types of licenses that you often find in everyday life. Further, Reader can learn more about the advantages of having a license.

    Licensing Advantages

    It should be known that having a license also has some advantages, you know. Both for goods and services and other types of licenses have their own advantages. Well, if indeed you don’t really know what the advantages of the license are. Then the explanation below can help you.

    1. Those who receive a license can use the trademark legally.
    2. The licensor will get a royalty that has previously been agreed upon the amount to be paid.
    3. Licensors no longer need to incur additional costs in order to commercialize their products.
    4. The licensee will find it easier to gain trust from consumers. Especially if the brand they use is already famous.

    Lack of License

    Licensing does not only have advantages. But the license also has some drawbacks. Well, so that you can also better understand what are the shortcomings of the license. Here is a complete explanation about it.

    1. When the license has been sold, then the previous license owner has lost complete control over the product.
    2. Those who receive a license also have the risk of product sales.
    3. Although you can get royalties, everything takes time.
    4. When the agreement has been violated by those who received the license. So there is a high possibility of a competition. Of course, this can also threaten the legitimacy of the license owner’s trademark.

    License Legal Policy

    License also has its own legal basis. In 2018, in July to be exact, the government issued new regulations related to license agreements, namely Government Regulation No. 36 of 2018 on the Registration of Intellectual Property License Agreements (PP 36/2018).

    This license has been regulated by other legal regulations that are included in the field of intellectual property rights. It has also been mentioned in Article 2 paragraph (1) of PP 36/2018 that registration of licenses can be done on intellectual property objects in several areas such as:

    1. Copyright and related rights
    2. Patent
    3. Brand
    4. Industrial design
    5. Integrated circuit layout design
    6. Trade secret
    7. Plant varieties

    Prohibitions Contained in the License Agreement

    In the license agreement there are several prohibitions as explained in Article 6 PP 36/2018. Where in the license agreement it is not allowed to do or have the content of some things like the explanation below.

    1. License agreements made can harm Indonesia’s economy as well as Indonesia’s national interests.
    2. Licensing agreements can create restrictions that may hinder the ability of Indonesians to transfer, master and develop technology.
    3. The license agreement may result in unfair competition.
    4. A license agreement that is made contrary to legal regulations, religious values, morality and public order.

    From the explanation of some points above, you can make sure again before making a license agreement. Rechecking the contents of the license agreement file will make it easier for you to avoid various risks of violations.

    Creation of License Agreement

    The first thing you must know before making a license agreement is the expiration date of the Intellectual Property Rights. Where it is very important because you cannot make or accept a license agreement as long as the Intellectual Property Rights that have been licensed have expired and have been deleted.

    In addition, the process of making a license agreement must be in Indonesian. Then what if a license agreement is made with a foreign party? License agreements can still be done with foreign parties as long as the foreign language used also has an Indonesian translation. This has also been regulated in Article 4 paragraph (2) PP 36/2018.

    In Article 7 paragraph (2) PP 36/2018 has also provided a guide related to the contents of the license agreement. Some of the contents that should be contained in the license are as follows.

    1. Date, month, year, and place the agreement was signed.
    2. Name and address of licensor and licensee.
    3. Object of the license agreement.
    4. The terms of the license, whether exclusive or non-exclusive, including sublicense.
    5. Duration of the license agreement.
    6. Territory of validity of the license agreement.
    7. The party that pays the annual fee for the patent.

    Registration of License Agreement

    Making a license agreement is arguably not as simple as when you make a cooperation agreement that only requires signatures from both parties. However, the creation of a license agreement requires several processes first.

    In Article 10 paragraph (1) of PP 36/2018 it has been explained that in making a license agreement you must submit a written application to the Minister through the Directorate General of Intellectual Property using Indonesian.

    Later, the application can be made through electronic or non-electronic media. In addition, in order for the submitted application to be stronger, there are also some requirements that must be completed first.

    Some of the requirements to complete the application for making a license agreement are as follows.

    1. Copy of License Agreement;
    2. Official Citation of Patent Certificate, Trademark Certificate, Industrial Design Certificate, Integrated Circuit Layout Design Certificate, proof of ownership of Inventions or Related Rights, or proof of ownership of licensed Trade Secrets;
    3. Power of Attorney, if the application is submitted by Power of Attorney; and
    4. Proof of payment of fees.

    Term of License Agreement

    As in the form of an agreement in general that has a valid period. The license agreement also has a validity period. The period of validity of the license agreement depends on the period of the license agreement that has been agreed upon by the parties concerned.

    According to Article 17 paragraph (2) of PP 36/2018, when the validity period of the license agreement has ended. Then you can apply for re-registration as long as the license agreement will also be renewed or followed up during its validity.

    The difference between a license and a franchise

    Although it looks the same between license and franchise. However, the two actually have differences that are quite prominent. Compared to license, maybe you hear the term franchise more.

    However, for the difference between the two, either license or franchise, you can read the full explanation below.

    1. Definition of License and Franchise

    From the meaning, both license and franchise have differences. Franchise itself is an agreement or bond between two or more parties. Where later one of the parties can grant a benefit right and use the right from the existing intellectual property.

    Simply put, a franchise is a grant of authority for a brand or product so that it can be resold according to an agreement or agreement that has been made previously. In addition, the franchise process cannot be done casually. There must be a notary and have approval from the Ministry of Law and Human Rights.

    As for the license itself, it is the granting of a permit so that production actions can be carried out both for products and services. Which products and services have been patented by the first inventor.

    From the explanation above it can be concluded that franchise is more towards consumption. As for the license itself, it is more directed to the production process.

    2. License and Franchise Legal Policy

    Next, in terms of legal basis, both licenses and franchises have different legal bases. The legal basis of franchise is article 5 of government regulation 42/2007. Where the content is to regulate the personal data of the parties, types of intellectual property rights, business activities, rights and obligations of each party, facilities to marketing provided by the franchisor to the recipient, the duration of the agreement, compensation payment procedures, up to extension and termination procedures agreement.

    Then for the basis of license law is government regulation 36/2018. Where the rules used have content about the recording of intellectual property license agreements. The content regulates copyright and related rights, patents, trademarks, industrial designs and layouts, and trade secrets.

    3. Rights and Obligations

    Both franchise and license both have different rights and obligations. In franchise there is the term franchisor which is used for the owner or franchisor. While the term franchisee is the term given to those franchisees.

    Those who become franchisors have an obligation to provide names, recipes, products and various matters related to the sale of franchises in accordance with the agreement that has been made previously.

    While those who receive a franchise have the authority to use brands, products and recipes from the grantor in order to get results. Then for the obligation on the part of the franchisee is to provide the company so that the franchise agreement can take place.

    Then for the license itself there is a term licensor or creator is a person or a group who discovers or creates a product that has special properties. Creations from the licensor have various forms. Starting from art, the field of science, literature that is born from inspiration, ability, thought to imagination that is created in real form.

    Then there is also the term licensee or copyright holder. Where the licensee is the party that legally receives the copyright from the licensor. Simply put, the obligation of the licensor is to grant a license to the licensee in order to be able to produce a product or service.

    Which standards and quality have been determined by the licensor. Then for the licensee himself, he must produce and sell using copyrighted brand products and give royalties in accordance with the previous agreement.

    That’s some explanation about the meaning of the license and other things related to the license that you can read in full above. At least by reading the explanation above, it will be easier for you to make a license agreement. 

  • Understanding Organic Waste, Types, Characteristics, and How to Process It

    Definition of Organic Waste, Types, Characteristics, and examples of organic waste – Waste is one of the big problems in every country. In fact, over time, the amount of waste has not decreased, especially organic waste. Do you know what organic waste actually is? 

    Organic waste is material waste or garbage that can be recycled and comes from living things, such as food waste, waste from living things, or plant waste.

    In other words, organic waste is waste material or garbage obtained from production processes or activities, both activities in the household and industrial fields. This organic waste is waste or garbage that is easily decomposed through several natural processes.

    Why can it be easily decomposed?

    That’s because organic waste contains chemical substances that can be said to be stable so that this organic waste will be more easily buried or settled in the ground, lakes, rivers, even the sea.

    This type of organic waste decomposes faster in a short period of time until it finally decomposes into a small substance, but does not cause an odor. However, organic waste will cause unpleasant odors, even diseases if not managed properly.

    For that reason, often the manufacture of fertilizer utilizes material from organic waste to be used as compost.

    When viewed from the type, organic waste is divided into two, namely wet organic waste and dry organic waste. For a complete explanation, the following will be explained regarding wet organic waste and dry organic waste.

    Types of Organic Waste

    Organic waste is divided into two types, namely wet organic waste and dry organic waste. Here is the explanation.

    1. Wet Organic Waste

    Wet organic waste is one of the types of organic waste in which water content is stored at a high and abundant rate. Typically, wet organic waste has a low level of hardness or can be said to be softer so that bacteria are also easier to process and destroy waste or garbage.

    There are some examples of wet organic waste that you need to know and understand, among them.

    Examples of wet organic waste: food waste

    Wet organic waste from food waste, namely vegetable waste, corn husks, rotting fruit waste, onion skins, seeds, banana skins, straw and the like. The rest of the ingredients that have been mentioned, we often find them for cooking ingredients in the kitchen.

    That type of organic waste must be separated from other waste because we can still use it and process it again, for example, it can be processed into compost, or it can also be processed into something interesting (of course a drying process is required first).

    Examples of wet organic waste: excreta of living things

    Wet organic waste from the excrement of living things can be recycled to be used as manure that can be beneficial for plants at home. Usually, manure is produced from animal excrement such as chicken excrement, cow excrement, or goat excrement.

    Maybe you will ask, why should it be processed into manure? That is because manure contains micro and macro nutrients that are good for the soil so that when it is used for plantations, the plants will flourish.

    Organic fertilizers that have been tested for their superiority, are not only useful for fertilizing plants, but also for improving nutrients and restoring soil fertility.

    You can process your own environmentally friendly non-chemical fertilizers by making use of agricultural waste, animal husbandry waste, and even household waste.

    This book completely explains how to make solid and liquid organic fertilizers, as well as their application for agriculture, animal husbandry, and fisheries.

    2. Dry Organic Waste

    In contrast to wet organic waste, dry organic waste generally keeps water content at a rate that tends to be small. This causes dry organic waste to take longer to break down so that it can be recycled.

    Here are some examples of dry organic waste that is difficult to decompose, among them.

    Examples of dry organic waste: logs

    Typically, logs are sourced from felled trees. As we know that logs are very difficult to destroy, it even takes a long time, even though we have piled or buried them at the bottom of the ground. An effective way to make the process of destroying logs faster is to cut the logs into smaller sizes.

    Examples of dry organic waste: eggshells

    Eggshells become one of the household food wastes that belong to dry organic waste. That is because the eggshell has a material that is hard enough to cause the recycling process to take a long time. That way, even in its processing it needs better caution.

    Examples of dry organic waste: coconut shells

    No wonder when coconut shells are included in dry organic waste. That is because the coconut shell has very little water content, then the texture is also very hard. Then, the coconut shell also takes a long time to disintegrate.

    That can be proven when you are visiting a beach, then see a coconut shell that is very dry, but the shell is still very hard and not completely destroyed.

    There are various types of fertilizers that make farmers and garden operators have many options in determining which fertilizer is the cheapest or the easiest. However, due to the large variety of fertilizers, sometimes farmers and garden operators find it difficult to decide which fertilizer to use because they do not know it for sure.

    So through this book will be discussed and introduced about solid organic fertilizer and how to make it.

    Characteristics of Organic Waste

    There is an easy way to distinguish which is organic waste and which is not, namely by recognizing and understanding its characteristics or characteristics. The following will briefly explain the characteristics of organic waste.

    1. Generally, organic waste has a high water content. During the decomposition process, the water content found in the waste will evaporate until it finally dries up.
    2. Organic waste comes from the waste of natural materials which, when it is the result of human processing, does not go through a long process and contains many chemical substances.
    3. Waste tends to decompose easily, without having to go through various processing processes. That can be proven when you find waste or garbage that is about to be destroyed even though it is only left for a few periods without undergoing various processes.
    4. Microbes or decomposing germs that are in or at the bottom of the soil are able to destroy waste or garbage. In other words, when burying or burying organic waste in the ground in the right way, the condition inside or the bottom of the soil will not be contaminated.

    Benefits of Organic Waste

    Maybe you have thought that waste or garbage has absolutely no use or benefit. That thought is not accurate. That is because garbage or organic waste certainly has many benefits that can be used as a source of income when it is processed into a useful form or product.

    What’s more, the utilization can minimize the amount of waste in landfills or final disposal sites. Still don’t believe it? See the following explanation regarding some of the benefits of organic waste.

    1. Organic Waste can be Processed into Organic Fertilizer or Compost

    If you have a hobby of gardening and planting plants in your yard, you can use organic waste that has been processed into compost as a fertilizer for your plants.

    Make use of organic waste, such as vegetable waste, fruit waste which is then processed into compost. For the process of making this compost or organic fertilizer, it is not complicated.

    2. Organic Waste as Soil Fertilizer

    In addition to being used for the manufacture of organic fertilizers or compost, organic waste can be used as a soil fertilizer. How to do it? You just plant or bury garbage or organic waste in the ground.

    Later, the organic waste will decompose and provide nutrients that can fertilize the soil so that the plants you have also grow healthier.

    3. Organic Waste as Animal Feed

    Organic waste can also be used for animal feed. You can directly use waste or organic waste as animal feed, for example, goat, buffalo or cow feed.

    In addition to being used as animal feed, it turns out that organic waste can also be used and processed into pellets for chicken and fish feed. The high nutrients in organic waste can make livestock grow healthier.

    4. Organic waste becomes a source of electricity and biogas

    Furthermore, the benefit of organic waste is that it can be processed into a source of electricity and biogas. Organic waste that can be forgiven as a source of electricity and biogas material, among them the excrement of living creatures, tofu, and tempeh.

    How to do it? The trick is to prepare a media or a closed container to be used as a reservoir for the gas that has been added to water, then stir the two mixtures so that the manufacturing or processing process can run smoothly and quickly.

    5. Organic waste can be processed into handicrafts

    Some people, including you, may think that what can be processed into handicrafts is only inorganic waste. Although, organic waste can also be used, lol.

    Organic waste of a type of hyacinth plant can be dried and burned which is then processed into a beautiful bag. Not only that, coconut shells can also be processed and used for tableware, such as small bowls, cups, and others.

    This book will discuss step by step how to make your own liquid organic fertilizer with existing ingredients, and of course with a lighter cost than having to keep buying artificial fertilizer.

    How to Process Organic Waste

    After knowing some of the benefits of organic waste, it’s time to find out how to process it. The following will briefly explain how to process organic waste that you can follow at home.

    How to Process Organic Waste into Compost Fertilizer

    Before entering the manufacturing stage, prepare the necessary tools and materials first, namely media or a large container with a lid (you can use a bucket or a large barrel), gloves, household waste (you can use vegetable or other food waste), soil , enough water, chaff charcoal, agricultural lime, and EM4 fertilizer liquid for additional ingredients.

    Now, enter the stage of making organic waste into compost. First, prepare organic waste or household waste to be processed into compost or organic fertilizer. Then, separate organic waste, such as vegetable or food waste and plastic waste. That is because it is the organic waste that is to be used to make compost.

    Next, prepare the large container or media that was prepared earlier. Remember, the container or media to be used must have a lid. That is so that the fertilizer to be made will not be contaminated with outside air. Then, put enough soil into the container, make sure the container has also been filled with organic waste. For the thickness itself, you can adjust it to the media or container as well as the amount of organic waste used.

    Pour and flush the surface of the soil with water, just enough. Add the organic waste that has been mixed with husk charcoal (this is only optional), and agricultural lime into the container or media earlier.

    Try to make sure that the waste is stored evenly. In other words, the thickness between the litter and the soil should be equal. Then, pour and flush with water that has been mixed with EM4. then, add more soil to the container. The soil here serves as a garbage cover. Finally, close the container tightly and let it sit for approximately 21 days or three weeks.

    However, there are some things to be aware of when you make compost or organic fertilizer yourself at home. First, make sure that the container for making compost is not contaminated by rainwater and other animals. Then, do not leave the container exposed to sunlight.

    Well, when all that is done, you can immediately use the compost or organic fertilizer that you have made to cultivate various types of plants or plants in your yard.

    How to Process Organic Waste into Biogas

    Biogas is produced from the decomposition of organic matter by anaerobic bacteria, ie bacteria or germs that live and grow in dense air. Typically, all types of organic matter managed will produce biogas. However, only solid and homogeneous liquid organic matter is capable of producing biogas.

    There are three types of materials that promise to be managed as household biogas raw materials in Indonesia, among them organic waste, animal or human excrement, and liquid waste. The following will be explained related to the process of making household biogas.

    First, mix organic waste with water, the ratio is 1:1. Then, put the biogas material into the reactor through the filling point of 2,000 liters, then there will be a biogas production process inside the reactor.

    After approximately 10 days the biogas reactor and biogas container will expand and harden. That is because of the biogas produced. Biogas can be used as fuel and biogas stoves can be used.

    Then, don’t forget to shake the biogas reactor occasionally so that complete decomposition occurs and the gas at the bottom will rise to the top. Do the same at each reactor filling.

    For the next filling of biogas material can be done every day, ie every morning and afternoon as much as 40 liters. As for the waste from the processing of biogas material in the form of mud, it will come out by itself or spontaneously every time the biogas material is filled. Finally, the waste from the processing of the biogas material can finally be used directly as organic fertilizer. That way, biogas can be used for household needs.

    That is the information about Organic Waste, ranging from types, characteristics, benefits to how to process organic waste. If Reader is interested and wants to expand knowledge related to organic waste processing or the like, of course you can find, buy, and read the book on Sinaumedia.com and Sinaumedia Digital because Sinaumedia is always a #SahabatTanpaBatas for those of you who want to gain knowledge.

    Hopefully this article can add to your insight, yes!

    This book provides an introduction to organic farming and organic pesticides that can be made by yourself, the ingredients are simple and available around us. In addition to being environmentally friendly, organic pesticides can also be a business opportunity. A hassle-free way to make it can be practiced anytime and anywhere.

  • Definition of Domestic Waste & Examples of Domestic Waste

    Definition of Domestic Waste & Examples of Domestic Waste – Waste has become one of the long-lasting problems and is quite difficult to overcome because it will continue to exist following the development of human life. Humans will produce waste from their various activities. Starting from industrial activities, agricultural activities, to daily activities that humans do will produce waste. The waste that is currently the most produced by humans is domestic waste. Domestic waste is part of the waste or waste produced from various human activities. Domestic waste can come from households, schools, accommodation, restaurants, offices, markets, malls, and other similar facilities.

    Types and Examples of Domestic Waste

    Domestic waste is classified into two types, namely liquid waste and solid waste. Here is the explanation.

    1. Domestic Liquid Waste

    Domestic liquid waste comes from various human activities or daily needs, such as water used for bathing, water used for washing clothes, water used for washing tableware, liquid food waste, and human excrement. The disposal of domestic liquid waste needs to be well managed because not a few of these types of waste contain chemicals, such as detergents, bath soap, and oil, so they can cause damage to the environment.

    2. Domestic Solid Waste

    Domestic solid waste comes from various materials or items that are left over and are no longer needed. Solid waste that is disposed of carelessly will cause pollution and damage to the environment. Domestic solid waste is divided into two types, namely organic waste and inorganic waste.

    Here is an ebook about creative creations using used paper and newspapers.

    1) Domestic Organic Waste

    Organic waste is waste that comes from garbage or food waste, such as fruit, vegetables, chicken, and rice. Discarded organic waste will undergo decay and decompose by itself.

    2) Domestic Inorganic Waste

    Inorganic waste is waste that comes from materials or goods that are difficult or even cannot be decomposed through biological processes, such as iron, bottles, plastic, glass, household appliances, and electronic equipment. Inorganic waste that is piled up and disposed of carelessly will have a bad impact by polluting and disturbing the scenery and comfort of the environment.

    Impact of Domestic Waste

    If domestic waste is disposed of without prior management, it can cause various adverse effects on the environment and surrounding communities. Here are some of the negative impacts that can be caused by domestic waste disposal.

    1. Impact of Domestic Waste on health

    Disposing of domestic waste without prior management can have a negative impact on human health. Solid waste that is thrown carelessly on the surface of the ground will undergo decay. Waste that undergoes decay can produce poisonous gases, such as methane, sulfuric acid, and ammonia. This type of waste can also cause pollution to water and the environment if it is dumped in waters, such as rivers or seas. This type of domestic waste can cause various health disorders, such as diarrhea, itching, to kidney and liver disorders.

    In addition, domestic waste water originating from toilets can also cause various diseases, such as diarrhea, cholera, and typhus, because it contains E. Coli bacteria. This toilet waste water needs to be managed well. The distance between the well and the septic tank must be far enough because otherwise, waste water can absorb into the well. Well water contaminated by waste water will contain bacteria that can spread if used for bathing, brushing teeth, washing dishes, and other activities that use well water without going through the cooking process.

    2. The Impact of Domestic Waste on the Environment

    Disposing of domestic waste without prior management can cause pollution and damage to the environment. The disposal of domestic waste containing chemicals, such as detergents, on the soil surface can affect the level of acidity/pH of the soil which will affect the absorption of nutrients and plant growth. Waste with chemical content dumped in the river will damage or even kill the plants and animals that live in the river. This happens because the wastewater that contains domestic chemicals will reduce the amount of oxygen in the river water, thus damaging the quality of the river water. This situation will affect the damage to the ecosystem in the river in the long term.

    3. The impact of Domestic Waste on aesthetics

    The disposal of domestic waste without prior management can cause unpleasant odors or foul odors that will disturb the sense of smell. Indiscriminate disposal of waste will also cause the environment to become shabby and dirty so that it is not pleasant to look at.

    How to Reduce Domestic Waste

    Domestic waste has various adverse effects on the environment and human life. Therefore, there is a need for efforts to reduce the amount of domestic waste. Here are some ways that can be done to reduce the amount of domestic waste.

    1. Reduce Electricity Consumption

    Reducing the use or saving electricity can reduce the amount of domestic waste produced by electronic goods. Ways to save electricity can be done by always turning off electronic items that are not in use, turning off lights during the day by taking advantage of sunlight, and using more energy-efficient electronic items, such as LED lights.

    2. Reducing the Use of Air Conditioning

    Reducing the use of air conditioning or AC can reduce the amount of domestic waste because this device can produce waste in the form of freon or CFC substances, which can cause environmental pollution and result in the depletion of the ozone layer. The use of air conditioning can be reduced by taking advantage of natural air from windows and air ventilation in the house.

    4. Quit Using Plastic Bags

    Plastic is one of the most common domestic wastes. Plastic waste, as inorganic waste that is very difficult to decompose, can cause environmental damage. Therefore, replacing the use of plastic bags with shopping bags that are more environmentally friendly, such as shopping bags made of cloth and canvas, is very necessary to reduce the amount of domestic plastic waste.

    Domestic Waste Management

    Efforts to manage domestic waste accurately are very necessary to overcome the impact of pollution and environmental damage. Domestic waste management can be done according to each type. The following is an explanation of domestic waste management.

    1. Domestic Liquid Waste Management

    One form of management that can be done to reduce pollution from domestic liquid waste is to use a Bio Septic Tank . Bio septic tanks can be used to accommodate domestic liquid waste so that it can reduce environmental pollution. Bio Septic Tank has a large enough capacity and is equipped with a filtering device that can reduce the smell of dirt and avoid soil pollution. Bio septic tank is made of thick fiber so that it is able to prevent leakage from the waste stored in it.

    Another way that can be done to manage domestic liquid waste is to manage greywater. Greywater is a domestic liquid waste that comes from several liquid wastes, other than toilet waste. Greywater can be produced from used shower water, used water for washing clothes, used water for washing equipment, and others. Greywater Processingcan be done by making an organic filter tank so that domestic liquid waste is not wasted directly on the ground or waterways. The filter tank can be filled with sand, soil, and filtering plants, such as water hyacinth, kangkung, and marigold, which will purify and reduce water pollution. The channeling of water used for bathing and washing to the filter tank is done gradually. The water used to wash the tableware will go into the grease trap first. Greywater can reduce environmental pollution and can be used as an alternative water source to overcome the problem of the amount of water that continues to decrease in urban areas. Water produced by management greywater managementcan be used for needs other than eating and drinking, such as cleaning toilets, washing toilets, and watering plants.

    Here is an ebook on domestic waste water management.

    2. Domestic Solid Waste Management

    Domestic solid waste management can be done with the following processes.

    1) Sorting

    Sorting is one of the most common methods of solid waste management. This method is done by sorting or separating organic waste (wet waste) and inorganic waste (dry waste). Organic waste (wet waste) can be processed into organic fertilizer or compost. Meanwhile, inorganic waste (dry waste) can be sorted back to be given to scavengers or recycled to produce valuable goods.

    Here is an ebook on easy ways to make organic fertilizer.

    2) Container

    Containerization is a temporary waste storage activity independently before being transported or transferred to a Temporary Storage Site (TPS) or a Final Processing Site (TPA). Containment is done by providing a container to separate inorganic waste based on its type or material,

    3) Collection

    The process of collecting solid waste is carried out by sanitation workers who come to each place to transport or transfer waste to the Temporary Storage Place (TPS). The solid waste collection process can also be done in another way, namely through direct communal. Direct communal is the process of collecting solid waste at each communal point to be directly transported to the Final Processing Site (TPA) without being moved first.

    4) Transportation

    The process of transporting solid waste in direct communal collection is done by using transport vehicles such as compactor trucks and arm roll trucks . Each vehicle has a capacity of 6 m3 and 4 m3. Compactor trucks have the advantage of compressing solid waste so that it can increase its carrying capacity. These two solid waste transport vehicles are equipped with hydraulic pull arms so that the loading or unloading of solid waste can be done more easily without direct contact with the waste.

    5) Temporary Shelter (TPS)

    Solid waste that has previously been collected and transported will be taken to the Temporary Storage Site (TPS). TPS is a storage place before the waste is moved back to the processing and recycling site or Final Processing Site (TPA).

    6) Final Processing Site (TLP)

    Solid waste that has reached the Final Processing Site (TPA) will be isolated or safely piled up so as not to cause disturbance to the environment. In addition to isolating or accumulating waste, TPA will also process waste by sorting waste, recycling inorganic waste, and composting organic waste.